01 LiftEquip General-catalogue En

Compo om pone nent ntss and and Syste ys tems ms Best Quality - Made in Germany

LiftEquip Training Center

More than you expect ...

The details quoted in this Product Information can only be viewed as binding when conrmed expressly

in writing. Reproduction, reprint and storage only with authorisation of the editor.

2

Issue 09/2015

Table of Contents

Page Preface and Company Presentation

Drive Units and Frequency Inverter

Safety- and Elevator Elevator Components

Doors

Kits

Home Lift

Safety

www.liftequip.com

4

Inquiry Sheet , for Components and Systems

16

LEKalk , the tool for drive design and component selection

17

Homepage LiftEquip, Your information platform for components and systems

20

LiftEquip, Customer and training centre

21

Geared Machine, TW- and W-Series

27

Gearless Machinen, PMC- and DAF-Series

47

MO61, Solutions with PMC Gearless

67

Compact Gearless, SC-Series

77

External Rotor Gearless, DAB-Series

81

Drive Accessories, Brake Control, UCM-Modul

85

Frequency Inverter MFC and MFR with regeneration

93

Car Sling TCS, the Flexible One for Medium Loads

103

Counterw terwe eigh ight GTK, tth he Variab riable Solutio lution n for for many Ins Installa tallato ton n Situa ituation tions

107

Progressive Safety/Braking System

111

Overspeed Governor and Accessories

115

Oil and Spring Buffers, Telescopic Buffer Uprights

123

Roller Guides and Sliding Guides

131

Rope Pulleys and Accessories

143

Comfort Door S8A/K8A

147

Modernisation for Door Drive F9

167

LEA®

169

- Family

LEA®

173

LEA® - Flexible

185

LEA® - Comfort

189

LEA® - Cargo

193

LEA® - Home

209

LEMoS®, the Modular Modernisation Solution

219

Basic Safety Practices for Lifts

247

Calendar

289

Standards and guidelines

290

The TEAM of LiftEquip

294

3

Preface

Dear Sir/Madam, The complexity of t he lift business is steadily increasing. To enable you to nd the appropriate solution with the right specic ations for your project, we have now grouped all of our components,

kits and other solutions clearly in a general catalogue. True to our motto “ More than you expect... LiftEquip” you can nd all of our products here, fr om the

simple, but reliable-and-tested sliding guide shoes and the complete range of safety technology to all kinds of mechanical kits in the LEA family. LiftEquip also supplies the fast growing home lift market. We offer you the Gulliver and Orion as complete solutions under the heading “LEA Home" - not just for the private use. A large part of the catalogue is taken taken up by the eld of drive unit solutions: solutions: geared machines machines from the tried-and-tested

TW45C and TW63B to the heavy duty W332C. TW130 and TW160 effectively supplement the power ranges. Many drives are also optionally suitable for higher protection classes or explosion-risk areas or can be supplied with the successful NBS system for fast and safe A3 retrotting. In our gearless drives the smallest is the new star: the t he PMC125. PMC125. Economic, reliable and extremely smooth in opera tion, it is the perfect entry to the successful PMC series. Additional efcient drives are available for the higher perfor -

mance range in the form of the DAF and SC series. The importance we attach to sustainability is for example shown by our MFR inverter with integrated energy regeneration. It makes an active contribution to environmental protection during every journey – and this every day for many years. This will denitely also pay off for your customers!

We are aware from our day-to-day work how much safety is a concern for all of us and a constant companion in what we do. The optimally coordinated chain of development, planning, design, manufacture, assembly, maintenance and monitoring as well as repair and modernisation later on, is what make lifts one of the safest modes of transport there is. Despite all this, accidents can unfortunately still happen. This is why we have decided to include the brochure “Basic safety rules” in full as an annex, published by the European Lift Association (ELA) and in this way help to distribute these vital safety rules and prevent accidents. I greatly appreciate your interest and now wish you success in looking for the solution that ts you best. The LiftEquip team would be pleased to advise you. You You can nd our contact

data on the cover page at the end of the catalogue. We look forward to working with you. Best regards Thorsten Elsaesser

4

Issue 09/2015

Location and International Alignment Alw Alwa ays where you need us

Europe

Nort No rth h Ameri America ca

●

As A sia

Afr A fric ica a

South America Au A ustr tra alilia a

What occurs to you when you think of elevators? What do you consider particularly important when you are choosing a provider of elevators? No doubt you expect safety and reliability, and want products you can trust. After all, you are deciding on an investment that you do not want to regret in future. As LiftEquip, the renowned provider of components for elevators, we know your requirements and expectations very precisely. Our products and services, in the same way as our company and actions, have been aligned to these requirements and expectations. You receive full support where you need it. Our international alignment means that we know

the national legal and technical requirements in your country. Thousands of highly satised customers have been placing their trust in us for many decades. Alongside the „big

players“ in the industry, many small and medium-sized elevator companies and service operations are among our customers. What they appreciate is that we know more about elevators than almost anyone else!

www.liftequip.com

5

Range of Products

Whether you are planning a low-cost standard elevator or a premium installation that will be subjected to high loads, and whether your elevator is to run in a closed shaft or as a representative panorama system: we cover the entire range of

applications from passenger to freight elevators, and deliver all the important components for your elevator. Drives With our elevator drives, you can choose between the energy-efcient, gearless drives or the legendary gear drives for

virtually any range of speed and rated load. A balanced system with matching frequency control ensures outstanding running performance on every drive.

Gears

6

Gearless

Control system

Issue 09/2015

High-Quality Components for your Elevator From the Component to the Complete Assemblies

Solutions for modernisation

We have developed very special solutions for the modernisation of existing elevator systems. Variable in dimensions, our compact and highly modern drives can be easily adapted to almost any circumstances. With a modication, you

reliably bring your installation up to date with regard to safety, comfort and energy consumption.

Modernisation

A S L 5 5 5 - 7 6 5

ModKit MO61 S

m m

ModKit MO61 D4 LEMoS

®

www.liftequip.com

7

Range of Products

Safety

Doors

Safety gear frames and safety technology

Another centrepiece is the safety gear frame in which your elevator car is mounted to insulate it. Our safety technology components are space-saving and easily accessible, integrated in the safety gear frame. It goes without saying that the comprehensive range of products also includes all other safety devices. Doors

The comfort elevator doors S8A / K8A be in people - employed and freight elevators with high demands on quiet running, lifting height and comfort. The shaft doors are 81-58 brand tested for re resistance in accordance with DIN EN. The extensive range of options

(SA - special designs) the door is suitable for use under special requirements.

8

Issue 09/2015

High-Quality Components for your Elevator From the Component to the Complete Assemblies

Kits The LEA® - Family

®

LEA

Flexible

®

LEA

®

LEA

Comfort

Home Lift

Overall system in f ocus All of our products meet the applicable requirements of European regulations and are certied for many countries. They

are designed and built according to the state of the art, have long service lives and are very reliable. We pay particular attention to the function, co-ordination and availability of the entire elevator on designing our components. This is why you also get components in nely graded construction sizes, each of which has the optimal perfor mance and price for your elevator. Whether for a new installation or for a modernisation: with our components, you establish the basis for an outstanding elevator and always make a good decision in favour of an economical investment!

www.liftequip.com

9

Consulting for our Customers

Every elevator is individual and must be adapted to the type of use in the building and the requirements of the operator. The elevator should t into the building harmoniously and ensure smooth transport of passengers and freight. This is why the choice of the appropriate components is of particular signicance. Here, too, we support you as a partner.

Personal consul ting

In a personal discussion, we are glad to advise you on the telephone or on site, naturally also in your national language. Together we nd the optimal solution for your use case. Our aim at all times is to work with you to create an

elevator system with optimised technology and economy. Conguration program Our conguration program contains all of our experience from theory and practice. The relevant criteria are queried to

ensure a reliable selection of products and construction sizes. Alongside the performance data such as rated load and speed, the so-called handling capacity has a decisive inuence. The programs deliver you planning data and also the

complete documentation that you require for registration and approval of the elevator system.

10

Issue 09/2015

The Human Factor for Success Expertise in Elevators Guarantees you have made the right decision

What makes a company good and how does a good company differ from others? We are convinced that the m a jor factor is the workforce! Their qualications and ideas have made us one of the best providers on the market.

This is to remain so in future. Elevator expertise

Our specialists have the elevator expertise that enables them to adapt to your individual ideas and wishes. This is the basis for being able to provide you as a customer with skilled and superior support, above all when older elevator systems or delivery capabilities with respect to spare parts are involved. In the case of an elevator that is to continue running safely after ten, twenty or more years, our expertise is a great advantage. Continuous re-qualication This is why outstanding in-house training and continuous re-qualication are particularly important to us. We

want our employees to know our customers and understand their needs and expectations. Our customers place high demands on us with respect to safe and reliable elevators. And they are right to do so – after all, a long-term investment decision is involved!

www.liftequip.com

11

High-End Technology Production with top technology - at an attractive price for you

12

Issue 09/2015

High-Quality Components for your Elevator Alongside the people and their know-how, the technology in production has a decisive inuence on the quality of our products. This is why we

invest in the latest processes, machines and systems. Certied quality We guarantee the high quality level with certied processes. Quality assu -

rance checks are performed at each work step.. In our o wn test laboratory, we use a highly precise 3-D measuring unit. Nothing is left to chance. Our certications document this impressively: - Quality management complying with DIN EN ISO 9001

- Environmental management complying with ISO 14001 - Occupational health and safety management complying with ISO 18001. Production at the elevator specialist

One important aspect of an elevator is good preparation of the components for installation in the shaft. The metal plate parts must not be sharpedged. This is why we use a laser to cut them without burrs. The exact tting accuracy of the parts is achieved with a modern bending centre.

Excessive tolerances can only be balanced out on the construction site very laboriously. The drive is the component in the elevator that is subjected to the highest

stress. A long service life and reliability for gears are only achieved with precise production of the gear teeth. We do this with special machines and by exploiting our extensive experience. The same applies to the motors of the gearless drives. The electrical and thermal conguration and the insu lation of the windings are the decisive quality characteristics here. If only metal had no „natural enemies“ such as corrosion ... To counteract

this, we use sheets made of stainless steel or with galvanised surfaces. Other surfaces are covered with a high-quality powder coating. Attractive price-performance ratio

Alongside quality, you naturally also expect an affordable product. The deployment of technologically and economically optimised processes means that our products are very attractive as regards the price-performance ratio. Our production can react exibly when individual wishes or very short

delivery times have to be complied with. Perfection all the way to delivery

Before our components leave our plant, we test the function of all products and the completeness of every delivery. Our customers on the construction site receive correctly adjusted and tested products at all times. This is what we demand of ourselves!

www.liftequip.com

13

Reliable Delivery Tested products punctually at your elevator system

You order from us and want the products „immediately“? We can‘t quite manage „immediately“, but we deliver the components to your construction site within a few days!

How do w e manage that?

The common products such as drives, frequency controls and components for modernisation are in stock in our warehouse. Our production plant is also very well situated for road, rail and air transport. We maintain other warehouses at central locations within Europe. This is an unbeatable advantage when a matter becomes urgent!

What awaits you at the constr uction s ite?

We deliver the products safely and suitably packaged for transpo rt to the construction site and prepared for installation in line with the needs of the site. Our own installation specialists check and improve this continuously. We offer soluti ons The short-term availability of major components rounds off our service and together we nd the right solution for your project. Safely – quickly – reliably.

We make every effort to manufacture the best products for you – so they should also arrive at your site in faultless condition and punctually!

14

Issue 09/2015

Service and Customer Proximity Full support until you are fully satised

For such a sophisticated and long-term investment as an elevator, we offer not only the product itself but also a comprehensive range of services. We assure you: you always get our full support! Consulting and telephone hotline

On our telephone hotline, we advise you with regard to our products and the best way to deploy them. You talk

to specialists with practical experience who do their best to answer your questions at all times. We clear up most of these questions quickly and reliably by telephone, email or fax. You can also talk to our employees in many

languages. Proximity to our customers

Close contact to our customers and the practitioners on the construction site provide us with valuable feedback. We use this acquired knowledge to continuously adapt the products and their documentation to the requirements of our customers to an even greater degree. Prot from this

wealth of experience from elevator construction and from our close relationship to our customers. On-site support

For each product, you receive detailed documentation with all technical details, connection values, installation instructions and many valuable tips. The safe and errorfree installation of the products is our number one priority. Should you ever need on-site support, we will send one of our specialists directly to you and your elevator as quickly as possible. Trade fairs and visiti ng you Allow us to convince you of our services: we are repre-

sented at many trade fairs within Europe. There, you can inspect our products and have them explained in detail. We will also be glad to visit you to present our components directly on site. Place your trust in the attitude of our employees: „We are only satised when your elevator runs perfectly and reliably and your wishes have been fullled!“

www.liftequip.com

15

Inquiry Sheet

Inquiry Sheet For components and systems t e e h S y r i u q n I

2.1 Drive Unit s Inquiry/Order

Customer



Inquiry



Order ____________________________

To

Company

Since only you know your project, we need your

LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components

Contact person Phone

+49 (7158) 12-2929 +49 (7158) 12-2971 [email protected]

Fax E-Mail

Systems have interfaces to the building and components have interfaces to the neighbouring assemblies.

input in order to be able to submit a tailor-made offer to you, which takes all your requirements into account.

Date

Machine type

 Gear

Controller type

 Fr equency

VVVF inverter

 MFC

 Gearless

regulated

20/21

 1:1

Rated load Q [kg]

 2:1

 3:1

You can nd the enquiry forms for downloading on

 4:1

our home page or contact our sales.

___________

Car weight [kg]

You will not only assist us in designing your com ponents, but also benet from our serving you as

___________

incl. Car sling Counterweight [kg]

___________

Travel height [m]

quickly as possible.

___________

Compensation rope / chain

 Yes

Machine located

 Above

(MR)  Below (MR)

Depth of machine [m]

 No  Above  Below

beside beside

 Above  Below

(HR) (SP)

If it is very urgent, use LEKalk and assemble the components needed.

___________

(if machine not above) Gear Gearless Documentation

qualied offer.

30/31  Others

___________

Rated speed v N [m/s]

Machine type

 2-speed  MFC

 MFR

Suspension r

We have produced enquiry forms for all of our products, covering the parameters we need for a

 TW

 TW

 TW

 TW

45 C 160  PMC 145-2  PMC 170

 W

 W

 German

63 B 263 C  DAF 210  DAF 270  English

 French*

130 332 C  SC 300  SC 400  Russian**

When you place the order, we will once again check the technology with you so that you can be sure of having selected the best product for your needs.

Notes:

Page 1 of 2

16

Issue: 12/2014

Issue 09/2015

LEKalk

LEKalk The tool for drive design and component selection k l a K E L

The LEkalk tool is a design and planning instrument for customers and planners with which a gearless or gear drive can be quickly and efciently calculated with the matching inverter, with or without energy

feedback. As a result, it is also very easy to calculate different lift congurations – comparing gearless or gear drive or designs with or without energy

feedback for lift planning and evaluation and in this way work out the best solution for each application. The drive design, traction capacity and rope detection can be used as calculation for your registration documents at the body mentioned. The programme is a local application, which you can download from our homepage www.liftequip.de after the corresponding registration. Please contact us in this regard. Below there is a short overview of the LEKalk tool options:

LEKalk suggests possible motors on the basis of the lift data and selection of the gear drive. Here you can for example also indicate whether energy feedback is desired.

After selecting the motor and type of frequency control (here with feedback), a selection of possible inverters is suggested. Power consumption and power reserves are likewise stated.

www.liftequip.com

17

LEKalk

LEKalk The tool for drive design and component selection k l a K E L

LEKalk shows possible suitable inverters. Power reserves are stated.

LEKalk calculates the traction capacity on the basis of the relevant parameters.

You can add even more compo -

nents via the catalogue function, such as the base frame, ropes, car frame and the entire spectrum of safety technology.

18

Issue 09/2015

LEKalk

LEKalk The tool for drive design and component selection

In this way you can create your own offer independently with price and delivery information at any time.

k l a K E L

The design is for submission to the responsible monitoring bodies.

An employee of LiftEquip would be pleased to assist you with queries and training courses regarding LEkalk and with technical advice.

www.liftequip.com

19

www.liftequip.com

www.liftequip.com Your information platform for components and systems e g a p e m o H p i u q E t f i L

Always online, always up-to-date Here you can nd all the information on

LiftEquip’s products. Register as a customer and the following additional documents and tools will be available to you: • LEKalk • product catalogues • operating manuals • type approval certicates • CAD data • 3D models • ….

LiftEquip newsletter

To ensure you are always up-to-date, please register via the home page for our newsletter. https://www.liftequip.com/newsletter.html

Modernisation lift car LEMoS ® LiftEquip has provided a modular solution for lift modernisations for rated loads up to 1050 kg at speeds of 1 m/s in the form of LEMoS®.

Flexible means you can keep the parts of your lift whose replacement is not technically necessary and would make little economic sense. This exibility with the exible LEMoS® lift car, which can be combined with the doors of different manufacturers, is

this solution’s USP. Customised modernisation solutions, which make allowance for technical as well as economic considerations, can be put together here irrespective of the old lift’s manufacturer. You can nd more advantages of the LEMoS® system below or on our homepage: www.liftequip.com/products/systems/lemos.html

LEMoS® - in a nutshell: • The lift car width and depth can be congured in millimetre steps – hence optimal use of the existing shaft. • Very compact. Micrometer: car width + 40 mm. • Short standstill times thanks to short installation and delivery times. • Prepared for doors of many different well-known markt manufacturers. As a result, it is possible to react with the exibility required to all kinds of demands.

• Modern lift car design and high quality appearance. LEMoS® arose out of modernisation for modernisation! Modernisation can be this easy! Find out from us today with the question sheet.

Machine base frame ModKit MO61 S Extremely exible and economic! We would like to present another LiftEquip modernisation solution – our new ModKit MO61S machine base frame. It is a pre-installed machine base frame, specially developed for our gearless PMC145-2 M/XL and L/XL for 1:1 suspension, rated load

up to 675 kg and 1.0 m/s. The ASL dimension (distance of lift car suspension to the counterweight suspension) can be set exibly from 555 to 765 mm and is delivered with rope guard. A hand

release and hand wheel are optionally available. The frame is pre-installed and can be supplied from stock with the drive. www.liftequip.com/products/systems/modkit-mo61s.html

20

Issue 09/2015

Customer and Training Centre

LiftEquip - Customer and Training Centre e r t n e C g n i n i a r T d n a r e m o t s u C

In the new LiftEquip customer centre we will soon be offering you the following training courses. • LEKalk course: Here you learn how to handle LEKalk like a professional. The goal of this course is to learn the ner points of the programme and then use it in everyday work. Course duration: one day • MFC/MFR inverter course: In the theoretical part you learn the basics of inverter technology and the correct ins-

tallation and fast start-up of the MFC and MFR inverters. In the practical section you work on our training lift (1000 kg, 17m, 1.6 m/s) to implement what you have learned with exercises and get practical tips and tricks. You must

bring your own work clothing and personal protective equipment. Course duration: one-and-a-half days

*For assistance during commissioning, you can contact our hotline (+49172735 2020). • Home lif ts Gulliver and Orion co urse: Learn the installation and start-up of the home lift on our Gulliver training model. You must bring your work clothing and safety shoes. Course duration: one day • Maintenance and service on LiftEquip motors: You learn the basics of gear drive and gearless drive technology

as well as everything needed to maintain and correctly set the drives of LiftEquip and replacing the rotary encoder and traction sheave. You must bring your work clothing and safety shoes. Course duration: one day • LEA assembly course: You learn how to assemble the LiftEquip LEA MRL building kit in real lif t shafts. We show

you the version of frameless assembly. The focus here in particular is on the installation of the machine base frame. You must bring your own work clothing and personal protective equipment. Course duration: one-and-a-half days

Please contact us if you are interested in one of t he courses.

www.liftequip.com

21

22

Issue 09/2015

Technical Report

Technical Report LiftEquip - From components to home lifts

LiftEquip – from components to home lifts

UK

a matching rope drum for two ropes for the familiar TW63, TW130 and TW160 gear systems. These can be used to move rated loads of 450 to 1200 kg and, in accordance with EN 81-1, speeds of up to 0.63 m/s can be achieved. This is a clever alternative if other drive system can only be installed with high overhead or, in accordance with EN 81-70, a larger eleva tor car has to be installed.

The legendary gear systems

Clearly structured trade fair booth: gear systems and door (front), gearless and frequency converters (back), system parts (left) and home lift (right)

LiftEquip was present for the 11th time at the largest elevator trade fair interlift 2013 in Augsburg. Once again this year, interesting innovations awaited the visitors: the drum drive for elevators without counterweight; the gearless for "adjacent" with traction sheave in the shaft; the wide range of balanced components conforming with EN 81-1/2:A3; the h ome lift for retrofitting inside and outside of buildings. LiftEquip is consistently pointing the way as component supplier and solution provider.

The drum drive is back Even today, drum drive elevators are still in operation in numerous buildings. For these elevators and for older installations with small car floor areas, the drum drive using modern technology is a good modernisation solution. The fact that there is no counterweight enables better use of the shaft cross section and a larger elevator car can be installed. Even hydraulic systems can easily be converted to a frequencycontrolled drum drive. LiftEquip offers

From the small TW45 all the way to the mighty W332, LiftEquip offers a very wide range of gear systems, unsurpassed by any other provider. "Above all during modernisation, the optional horizontal or vertical design of smaller gear systems means they can be adapted to almost any spatial circumstances," says sales expert Thomas Bäzner. At LiftEquip, the continuous enhancement of the gear systems means that they are a genuine alternative to modern gearless drives from a technical and economic perspective. Their high efficiency enables energyefficient operation. The gear systems of the TW model series are optionally available with an emergency brake system conforming with EN 81-1:A3. The large gear systems of the W model series move high rated loads of up to 6 metric tonnes.

s t f i l e m o h o t s t n e n o p m o c m o r F t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T

Uniform colour assignment for all drives Trade fair visitors to Hall 1 found the well-known exhibitors in their usual places. In line with tradition, LiftEquip Elevator Components from Neuhausen near Stuttgart could be found on the right-hand side with a clearly structured booth layout. It was conspicuous and well received that all gear and gearless drives are now painted with an environmentally friendly and rugged water-based paint in a noble blackgrey. This has provided the high-quality drive components from LiftEquip with a uniform colour assignment, from the reliable drives all the way to the progressive frequency converters.

78

www.liftequip.com

The modern gear systems with high efficiency are still very much in demand, above all for modernisation

LIFT-REPORT

39. Jahrg. (2013)

Heft 6

23

Technical Report

Technical Report LiftEquip - From components to home lifts s t f i l e m o h o t s t n e n o p m o c m o r F t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T

The gearless range encounters substantial interest: filigree model series PMC145 (front) and strong Compact Gearless (left)

Gearless drives remain first choice Arranged in a circle were the impressively filigree gearless drives of the PMC145 model series in the construction sizes from "S" (rated load 275 kg / suspension 1:1) to "XL" (1000 kg / 2:1). On request, these and the larger PMC170 are available together w ith the modernisation solution ModKit MO61. This enables very simple conversion of existing elevators with gear systems to a gearless drive. The options range from suspension 1:1 up to 1000 kg / 1.0 m/s and/or in 2:1 up to 1000 kg / 1.6 m/s. Under the key words "Geared to Gearless", another modernisation solution with DAF210 and/or DAF270 was presented as a new product. The system is suitable for upward or downward rope departure and for the traction sheave in the shaft or in the machine room. In all cases, secure support in relation to the building, protected from vibration, is ensured. The highlight: existing circumstances such as wall openings, rope pulleys, safety gear frame and counterweight do not have to be changed. As could be expected, many expert visitors were very interested. Upwards, the range of products is rounded off by the Compact Gearless SC300/400 using synchronous technology.

Frequency converters from 5 to more than 50 kW LiftEquip offers a wide range of frequency converters for motor outputs of 5 to 50 kW or more, for asynchronous or synchronous drives. They are characterised by simple parameter input, quick initial operation and safe evacuation and maintenance. The modern

80

24

generations of converters in black housings are configured to conform with EN 81-1:A3 and do not require contactors, which makes them very quiet. In addition to many options, they include an integrated brake control, power filter, interface cards, as well as a display. Connection per plug&play makes commissioning very simple. The MFC model series has been extended to include the construction sizes 100R, 155R and 310R with nominal output power of up to 140 kVA. The devices of the MFR model series for synchronous drives have an integrated energy recovery unit and are available in the performance classes from 5.5 to 18.5 kW.

Solutions for all drive types with A3 conformity Under the key safety concept UCM (Unintended Car Movement), LiftEquip provides solutions in accordance with EN 81-1/2:A3 for all kinds of drives ranging from the hydraulic installation to the geared drive to the gearless elevator. A brochure provides a clearly arranged overview of which certified components can be used for each drive system. This can be seen at www. EN81-A3.com.

High-quality S8A comfort door with glass door panels and sturdy TW160 gear with emergency braking device

nents was exhibited on a large shelf within the main trade fair booth: safety gears, overspeed governors, buffers, guides and elevator car LED lighting system. Markus Bruckmeyer, Sales Manager for Germany: "These important components and many other small parts concerning every aspect of elevators can also be ordered directly from LiftEquip. Our customers appreciate this, as it rounds off our range of products perfectly."

New: Gulliver home lift To date, LiftEquip has aligned its offering to components and drive products for traction elevators. Brand new in the

The S8A / K8A comfort door for sophisticated applications On the other side of the trade fair booth, LiftEquip exhibited the S8A landing door for the matching K8A car door. Günter Stoll, Sales Manager for Export North / East: "This door series has been developed for deployment in high-quality elevator systems. The design is very solid and the frequencycontrolled door drive is very quiet. The incredibly wide range of version options enables adaptation of the door to virtually any customer requirement. This door series clearly stands out from the broad mass of standard doors." It was only possible to exhibit a few variants on the trade fair booth. The entire performance capability of the comfort door is shown in the new door brochure.

System components and small parts It was presented on a separate trade fair booth two years ago, but this year a small selection of system compo-

New product: Gulliver home lift in a free-standing shaft, ideal for retrofitting and setup indoors or outdoors. Picture: LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components

LIFT-REPORT

39. Jahrg. (2013)

Heft 6

Issue 09/2015

Technical Report

Technical Report LiftEquip - From components to home lifts range is the Gulliver home lift: a freestanding elevator with its own shaft and a travel height of up to 15 metres with a maximum of 5 landings. The system is configured in accordance with EN 81-41 and Machines Directive 2006/42/EC. The hydraulic drive enables a rated load of 300 or 400 kg with a speed of 0.15 m/s. Only 10 cm is required as the floor recess; alternatively, an access ramp can be installed. The shaft head height is only 2350 mm. The doors can be arranged on three sides. "Gulliver is suitable for setting up indoors and outdoors," explains

82

www.liftequip.com

Norbert Blum. "This makes Gulliver an ideal retrofit solution in the private and public sector. This is confirmed by many trade fair visitors. We are very excited about the way the market will develop."

Skil ls in development, production and system application What are the special features of LiftEquip and the offered products? Managing Director Andreas Hönnige provides some insight: "The products of LiftEquip have been developed in-

house and are made in Germany. They are configured with the extensive experience of a system provider and optimised in relation to one another. Our customers appreciate the ability of our salespeople to provide useful information alongside their commitment, also where special wishes may be involved. To ensure long-term customer loyalty, we attach high value to skilled consulting, and reliable service, all the way to rapid spare parts supply." On request, interested customers are very welcome to tour one of the largest production locations for elevators in Europe.

LIFT-REPORT

39. Jahrg. (2013)

s t f i l e m o h o t s t n e n o p m o c m o r F t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T

Heft 6

25

26

Issue 09/2015

Gears

TW- and W-Series s r a e G

www.liftequip.com

Product description

29

Performance Matrix Gears 1:1 / 2:1

30

TW45C

32

TW63B

34

TW130

36

TW160

38

W263C

40

W332C

42

Drum drives

44

Emergency Brake System NBS

45

Colouring for all Drives

84

27

Gears

TW- and W-Series

EN81-

20/ -50

Product Description s r a e G

All gear drives are designed with

-conform

Machine base frame

VVVF motors in B5 conguration with A series of base frames are availabexible coupling and as result provide

le in connection with the gear drives,

maximum travel comfort. Depending on your space requirements, these gear drives are available with a vertically or horizontally installed motor (TW160, W263C und W332C only horizontal). Pole-changing (AC2) motors are also optionally available for the geared machine TW63B. One- to three-stage worm gears ensure continuous smooth running. Tight production tolerances and the use of high quality materials preserve smooth running. Synthetic transmission oil ensures optimal lubrication and

e.g. with and without diverting pulleys,

high efciency.

Optimal adjustment to your lift

The hardened, low-wear traction sheave has a long service life.

Traction sheaves in all directions are

for 2:1 or 1:1 rope suspensions, in left or right designs and in general for downward traction sheaves. The rope distance dimension can be chosen exibly according to the circumstan ces on the spot as a result of suitable

Emergency brake system NBS

perforation patterns for the attachment

optional

of the drive and diverting pulley. The

TW45C to TW160: as single-circuit

base frame design left / right can be

spring-operated disc brake it permits

chosen irrespective of the left / right

upward braking and complies with EN

traction sheave.

81-1/9.10. Certication according to

The machines base frames are moun-

EN81-1: Amendment 3 is available.

ted on anti-vibration elements.

possible, but must be ordered as custom-build.

The service brake keeps the lift safe as dual-circuit disc brake in the Also optionally as Ex part TW45C and from the TW63B as dual- An extended traction sheave shaft with circuit external contracting shoe bra- wall bearing, vapour-proof shaft duct and the optional accompanying base ke, even if a pitch circle fails.

EN81 20/-50

Our drives meet all requirements with regard to the above standards, in particular the approval of safety brakes and the rope guard.

frame permit the use of standard machines for Ex areas.

28

Issue 09/2015

Gears

TW- and W-Series Product Description

TW45C up to 1000 kg*

• Horizontal/vertical version • Right or left hand • Emergency braking system optional

TW160 up to 4000 kg*

• Horizontal version • Right or left hand • Emergency braking system optiona l

TW63B up to 2000 kg*

• Horizontal/vertical version • Right or left hand • Emergency braking system optiona l • pole changing

W263C up to 5000 kg*

• Horizontal version • Right or left hand • Worm gear with combined plained bearings

TW130 up to 3500 kg*

s r a e G

• Horizontal/vertical version • Right or left hand • Emergency braking system optiona l • pole changing

W332C up to 6000 kg*

• Horizontal version • Right or left hand • Worm gear with combined plained bearings

*Representation of the drives: horizontal right, 2:1 suspension

www.liftequip.com

29

Gears

TW- and W-Series Performance Matrix Gears 1:1 s r a e G

Travel heigh t 25 m

Operating speed 0,63 m/s

0,8 m/s

1 m/s

1,2 m/s

1,6 m/s

2 m/s

Q= 450kg F= 950kg

TW45C, 46:1, TS440 TW45C,46:1,TS520

*TW45C,32:1,TS440 TW45C,32:1,TS590

TW45C, 41:2, TS440 TW63B, 48:2, TS 675

2726 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 6,5 A / 10,1 A 1258 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1


3630 kJ/h, 3.8 kW 8,9 A / 13,9 A 1389 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1


5513 kJ/h, 7 kW 13,8A / 21,5 A 1424 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1

Q= 630kg F= 1000kg

TW45C, 32:1,TS360

TW45C, 32:1,TS440

TW45C, 32:1,TS440

TW45C, 41:2, TS360 TW63B, 48:2, TS 590 TW63B, 48:2, TS 675


4593 kJ/h, 4,6 kW 12,8 A / 19 A 1111 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1



Q= 800kg F=1050kg

TW45C,32:1,TS320

TW45C,32:1,TS320

*TW63B, 33:1, TS 510 *TW63B, 33:1, TS 510 TW63B, 48:2, TS 510 TW63B, 43:3, TS 450




Q= 1000kg F= 1200kg

TW63B, 48:1, TS 450 TW63B, 33:1, TS 450 TW63B, 33:1, TS 450 TW63B, 48:2, TS 450 TW130, 45:2,TS 540

TW130, 45:2, TS 640

5277 kJ/h, 7 kW 12,5 A / 18 A 1283 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1


Q= 1200kg F= 1400kg

*TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 52:1, TS 640 TW130, 42:1, TS 640 TW130, 35:1, TS 640 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 640

Q= 1600kg F= 1800kg

TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 45:2,TS 640

Q= 1800kg F= 2000kg

TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW1301, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 *TW160, 45:2, TS 640

Q= 2000kg F= 2200kg

TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 TW160, 51:2, TS640

W263C, 41:2, TS 640


13544 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 30 A / 39,7 A 990 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

31384 kJ/h, 36,2 kW 73,7 A / 113,2 A 1224 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

Q= 2200kg F= 2400kg

TW160, 50:1, TS640

TW160, 50:1, TS 640 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 41:2, TS 540 W263C, 41:2, TS 540



27506 kJ/h, 31,1 kW 70,3 A / 107,1 A 1160 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

31658 kJ/h, 42,0 kW 80,6 A / 130,9 A 1450 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

Q= 2400kg F= 2600kg

TW160, 50:1, TS 640 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 40:1, TS640 W263C,41:2,TS540

W332C, 46:2,TS700



36143 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 93,6 A / 176,7 A 1255 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

Q= 2600kg F= 2800kg

W332C, 63:1,TS640

W263C, 40:1, TS 540 W263C, 40:1, TS 540 W332C, 47:1, TS 800 W332C, 59:2, TS 700 *W332C, 46:2,TS640

16046 kJ/h, 26,1 kW 38,3 A / 87,4 A 1184 1/min MFC 20-60 V1

18431 kJ/h, 24,9 kW 46,5 A / 70,5 A 1132 1/min MFC 20-48 V1

20833 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 52,6 A / 75,4 A 1415 1/min MFC 20-60 V1

26872 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 65,1 A / 121 A 1347 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

34660 kJ/h, 42 kW 82 A / 166,7 A 1288 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

Q= 2800kg F= 3000kg

*W332C, 63:1,TS640 W332C, 63:1,TS700

W332C, 47:1,TS640

W332C, 47:1,TS800

W332C, 59:2, TS 700 W332C, 46:2, TS 640

16622 kJ/h, 26,1 kW 37,9 A / 87,9 A 1184 1/min MFC 20-60 V1

23550 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 58,1 A / 101,9 A 1403 1/min MFC 20-60 V1

28833 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 69,7 A / 126,6 A 1347 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

37186 kJ/h, 42 kW 87,8 A / 175,8 A 1288 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

7099 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 17 A / 26,6 A 1159 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1 9737 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 23,9 A / 34,2 A 1159 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 10891 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 26,6 A / 37,4 A 1159 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

The calculations are examples, alterations are possible

30

40 m

6370 kJ/h, 9 kW 20,4 A / 30,5 A 1121 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 9179 kJ/h, 11,1 kW 21,7 A / 33 A 1241 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 10563 kJ/h, 15,2 kW 26,8 A / 39,2 A 1188 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 11791 kJ/h, 15,2 kW 29,9 A / 43 A 1188 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

19808 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 47,9 A / 101,2 A 1375 1/min MFC 20-60 V1

7422 kJ/h, 10 kW 22,9 A / 32,3 A 1401 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 10762 kJ/h, 11,2 kW 25,5 A / 38,5 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 12597 kJ/h, 15,8 kW 31,3 A / 46,1 A 1238 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 14086 kJ/h, 15,8 kW 35 A / 50,7 A 1238 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 16063 kJ/h, 20,1 kW 39,1 A / 57,6 A 1225 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 17637 kJ/h, 20,1 kW 42,9 A / 62,4 A 1224 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 18262 kJ/h, 23,0 kW 50,5 A / 71,2 A 1045 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1

* 50% compensation of rated load Machine type, Ratio, TS-Ø [mm] Heat dissipated [kJ/h], Motor perf. [kW] at RPM Req. motor current [A] / Req. start up current [A] Motor RPM [1/min], (NBS possible) Inverter type.

6692 kJ/h, 10 kW 20,5 A / 29,5 A 1483 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 8939 kJ/h, 9,8 kW 27 A /42,4 A 1222 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 11494 kJ/h, 16,0 kW 28,6 A / 43,9 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 14244 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 36,9 A / 49,9 A 1485 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 17041 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 38,3 A / 53,3 A 955 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 18412 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 44,7 A / 66,8 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 18903 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 46,7 A / 70 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 22661 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 57,3 A / 82 A 1432 1/min MFC 20-60 V1

7779 kJ/h, 9,9 kW 23,5 A / 40,2 A 1243 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 8914 kJ/h, 10 kW 27,2 A / 39 A 1438 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 12198 kJ/h, 16 kW 30,8 A / 46,8 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 14917 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 37,4 A / 56,4 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 18007 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 45,8 A / 68,2 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 20881 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 52,9 A / 78,8 A 1218 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1 23266 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 59 A / 87 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC20-60 V1

29694 kJ/h, 34,3 kW 71,3 A / 107,9 A 1160 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

7091 kJ/h, 10 kW 22,1 A / 38,8 A 1358 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 9499 kJ/h, 13,0 kW 25,7 A / 40,8 A 1358 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 11005 kJ/h, 12,7 kW 29,3 A / 46,5 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

18395 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 46,8 A / 67,6 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 22441 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 57,3 A / 81,8 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1 23805 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 59,8 A / 87,9 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1

36445 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 95,3 A / 173,6 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1 38059 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 97,2 A / 178,3 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

Q = Rated load, F = Maximum mass of car, TS = Traction sheave diameter, (NBS) = Compatible with emergency brake system. 1) stronger brake

Issue 09/2015

Gears

TW- and W-Series Performance Matrix Gears 2:1 Travel heig ht 25 m

40 m

Operating speed 0,63 m/s

0,8 m/s

1 m/s

1,2 m/s

1,6 m/s

Q= 630kg F= 1000kg

TW45C, 41:2, TS 440 3234 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 7,9 A / 12,3 A 1121 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1

TW45C, 41:2, TS 440 3969 kJ/h, 5,2 kW 11 A / 14,5 A 1424 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1

TW45C, 41:2, TS 590 5039 kJ/h, 7 kW 12,4 A / 17,8 A 1327 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1

TW45C, 40:3, TS440 5555 kJ/h, 7 kW 13,8 A / 19,7 A 1389 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1

TW63B, 43:3, TS 675 8150 kJ/h, 10 kW 25,1 A / 40,4 A 1298 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

Q= 1000kg F= 1500kg

TW45C, 32:1, TS 520 5388 kJ/h, 7 kW 13,4 A / 16,1 A 1481 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1

TW45C, 40:3, TS 360 5956 kJ/h, 6,3 kW 15,8 A / 22,2 A 1132 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1

*TW45C, 40:3,TS 360 6597 kJ/h, 7 kW 15,9 A / 21,9 A 1415 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1


*TW63B, 43:3, TS 675 11370 kJ/h, 13 kW 30,2 A / 47,9 A 1298 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

Q= 1600kg F= 1800kg


TW63B, 48:2, TS 590 9716 kJ/h, 12,9 kW 25,6 A / 37,4 A 1243 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

TW63B, 43:3, TS 450 11577 kJ/h, 12,7 kW 31,1 A / 45,1 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

TW130, 43:3, TS 540 14134 kJ/h, 15,6 kW 35,9 A / 53,4 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1


Q= 2000kg F= 2200kg

TW63B, 48:2, TS 450 9333 kJ/h, 10 kW 28 A / 38,1 A 1283 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

TW130, 45:2, TS540 11736 kJ/h, 16 kW 29,3 A / 42,1 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

*TW130, 45:2, TS640 13668 kJ/h, 16 kW 34 A / 48,1 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

TW130, 43:3, TS 540 17425 kJ/h, 20 kW 43,9 A / 65,2 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

TW 1301, 43:3, TS 640 21916 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 56,8 A / 77,8 A 1369 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1

Q= 2500kg F= 2500kg

TW130, 35:1, TS 640 12048 kJ/h, 16 kW 30,2 A / 40,8 A 1316 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

TW130, 45:2, TS 540 14447 kJ/h, 16 kW 36 A / 49,4 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1


*TW1301, 43:3, TS 540 TW 1301, 43:3, TS 540 18859 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 25128 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 47,2 A / 71,3 A 67 A / 80,3 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) 1622 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-105 V1

Q= 3000kg F= 2800kg

TW130, 35:1, TS 640 14468 kJ/h, 16 kW 36,2 A / 47 A 1316 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

TW130, 45:2, TS 540 17357 kJ/h, 20,5kW 42,8 A / 58,5 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1



TW160, 41:3, TS 640 31911 kJ/h, 42 kW 79,4 A / 129 A 1305 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1

Q= 3500kg F= 3200kg





*W 332C, 57:3, TS 800 36107 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 97,9 A / 179,1 A 1452 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

Q= 4000kg F= 3500kg


TW160, 51:2, TS 640 22169 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 55,4 A / 75 A 1218 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1


W263C, 41:2, TS 640 34038 kJ/h, 42 kW 86,6 A / 131,6 A 1468 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

Q= 4500kg F= 4000kg


W263C, 50:2, TS 540 25747 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 64,8 A / 87,9 A 1415 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

W263C, 41:2, TS 540 31046 kJ/h, 42 kW 78 A / 120 A 1450 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

*W 332C,57:3,TS640 36192 kJ/h, 42 kW 86,3 A / 172,4 A 1361 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

Q= 5000kg F= 4500kg


W263C 41:2, TS 540 30548 kJ/h, 34,3 kW 72,9 A / 101,1 A 1160 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

W332C, 46:2,TS640 35725 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 95,8 A / 177,5 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

Q= 5500kg F= 5000kg


W332C, 59:2, TS 640 34694 kJ/h, 42 kW 85 A / 163,1 A 1409 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

*W332C, 46:2,TS640 37993 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 98,7 A / 176,3 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

W332C, 47:1, TS800 31916 kJ/h, 37 kW 74,6 A / 124,8 A 1414 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

W332C, 59:2, TS640 36111 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 97 A / 175,3 A 1409 1/min MFC 20-105 V1

Q= 6000kg F= 5500kg

s r a e G

* 50% compensation of rated load Machine type, Ratio, TS-Ø [mm] Heat dissipated [kJ/h], Motor perf. [kW] at RPM Req. motor current [A] / Req. start up current [A] Motor RPM [1/min], (NBS possible) Inverter type. Q = Rated load, F = Maximum mass of car, TS = Traction sheave d iameter, (NBS) = Compatible with emergency brake system. 1) stronger brake

The calculations are examples, alterations are possible

www.liftequip.com

31

TW-Drives

TW45C

With NBS this geared machine is conform to EN81-A3

The ideal solution f or light loads • VVVF-motor (5,2 and 7 kW) controlled accurately • Emergency braking system NBS: braking upwards, EN81-1/9.10, optional • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 320, 360, 440, 520 or 590 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 250 kg Special designs are possible

s r a e G

TW45C horizontal right

Technical Data Gear type Axle distance Load on shaft (Ft) Ratios Oil lling

Type of oil Backlash Weight Type of protection - Motor Hand wheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake Type Braking Torque Operational Voltage Traction Sheave Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) Weight

TW45C 120

mm kN

≤ 30 46:1 / 32:1 / 41:2 / 40:3

L

5,5 synthetic gear oil 0,03 - 0,07 ca. 105 IP54 D270 (plastic) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sinus/Cosinus

° kg mm

Robastop RSZ 60 2 x 50 180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage

Nm VDC mm mm

kg

320 102

360 77

7x8

5x8

30

25

440 7 x 8 / 6 x 10 6 x 11 45

520 590 115 7 x 8 / 6 x 10 6 x 11 / 5 x 12 55 60

Subject to modications

32

Issue 09/2015

TW-Drives

TW45C s r a e G

PERFORMANCE DATA

Rated Load Q [kg]

Operational Speed v [m/s]

Suspension r

320 450 630 900 1000 1300

0,63 - 1,20 0,5 - 1,25 0,5 - 1,0 0,4 - 0,63 0,4 - 1,0 0,4

1:1 1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1 2:1

TW45C on machine base frame

Motor position horizontal (pictured with traction sheave on left and with emergency brake system NBS, optional) Brake release lever (plug-in type

Bolt connection 4xM16

Motor position vertical (pictured with traction sheave on left)

DT = 320 WT = 102

360 77

440 115

* Dimensions applicable to D T = 360 mm

520 115

590 115

Bolt connection 4xM16 Brake release lever (plug-in type t ype))

www.liftequip.com

33

TW-Drives

TW63B


The machine for middle loads • VVVF-motor (5,2 up to 13 kW) controlled accurately • Emergency braking system NBS: braking upwards, EN81-1/9.10, optional • Brake monitoring onitoring switch, ma manual nual brake release • Traction Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Gear according according to ATEX • Brake Brake magnets, Ex-proof Ex-proof (SA (SA 15) • Low-wear traction traction sheave, sheave, available available in Ø 450, 450, 510, 520, 590 or 675 mm • Gear, Gear, motor, traction traction sheave: approx. 350 kg Special designs are possible

s r a e G

TW63B horizontal right


Type of oil Backlash Weight Motor Hand wheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special)

TW63B 155

mm kN

≤ 43 (rope departure direction downwards) 54:1 / 48:1 / 33:1 / 48:2 / 43:3

L

vertical: ca.11 / horizontal: ca. 9

° kg pole changing ywheel rim

WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL without

Operational Brake Ty Type Braking Brakin g Torque Operational Voltage Traction Sheave Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) We Weight

synthetic gear oil 0,025 - 0,07 ca. 190 frequency-controlled IP54 D270 (plastic)

TW63B max. 2 x 90 180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage

Nm VDC mm mm

450 132 8x8 7 x 10/11

kg

WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos

50

510 132 8x8 7 x 10/11 6 x 12 60

520 110 5 x 13 50

590 132 8x8 7 x 10/11 6 x 12

675 96 6x8 5 x 10/11 4 x 12 70


34

Issue 09/2015

TW-Drives

TW63B s r a e G

PERFORMANCE DATA

Rated Load Q [kg]


Suspension r

800 1000 1000 1600 2000

0,63 - 2,0 0,63 - 1,2 0,4 - 1,6 0,4 - 1,2 0,4 - 0,63

1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1 2:1

TW63B, vertical left hand on machine base frame down beside

1 Machine centre of gravity 2 Mount of machine on machine base frame 3 Operation lever for manual brake release (plug-in) kproj. = see product catalog catalog

www.liftequip.com

35

TW-Drives

TW130 With NBS this geared machine is conform to EN81-A3

The ideal solution for higher loads • VVVF-motor (11 up to 42 kW) controlled accurately • Emergency braking system NBS, optional • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave sheave in shaft with extended traction traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Reinforced machine mounting for rope pull resultant - horizontal or vertical pointing upwards (SA1) • Additi Additiona onall terminal terminal block for intermediate intermediate term terminal inal connection (SA12) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 540, 640, 720 or 900 mm • Gear, Gear, motor, traction traction sheave: approx. 560 kg Special designs are possible

s r a e G

TW130 horizontal right


Type of oil Backlash Weight Motor Motor Type of protection - Motor Hand wheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special)

TW130 191

mm kN


L

vertical: ca. 25 / horizontal: ca. 20

° kg

synthetic gear oil 0,02 - 0,06 430 frequency-controlled IP 21 D270 / 360 (plastic)

WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos

Operational brake Type Braking Torque Operational Voltage Traction Sheave Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) Weight

IP 55 D270 / 360 (plastic)

TW130 max. 2 x 125 / max. 2 x 200 max. 2 x 125 180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage

Nm V DC mm mm

540

640

720 150

5 x 16 7 x 12/13, 8 x 10/11, 10 x 8, 9 x 9 kg

900

75

90

140

6 x 12/13, 7 x 10/11 150


36

Issue 09/2015

TW-Drives

TW130 s r a e G

PERFORMANCE DATA

Rated Load Q [kg]


Suspension r

1000 1300 1600 1300 2200 3000

0,63 - 2,5 0,63 - 2,5 0,63 - 1,0 0,5 - 2,0 0,5 - 1,75 0,5 - 0,8

1:1 1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1 2:1

TW130 on machine base frame

kproj. = see product catalog catalog

www.liftequip.com

37

TW-Drives

TW160


The cart horse for higher loads • VVF-motor VVF-motor (11 up to 42 kW) controll controlled ed accurately • Emergency braking system NBS: braking upwards, EN81-1/9.10, optional • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave sheave in shaft with extended traction traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 640, 720 or 800 mm • Gear, Gear, motor, traction traction sheave: approx. 925 kg Special designs are possible

s r a e G

TW160 horizontal right


Type of oil Backlash Weight Motor Type of protection - Motor Hand wheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake Type Braking Torque Operational Voltage Trachtion Sheave Type Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) We Weight

TW160 225

mm kN

≤ 97 (rope departure direction downwards) 50:1 / 42:1 / 35:1 / 57:2 / 51:2 / 41:3

L

ca. 16,5 synthetic gear oil 0,015 - 0,06 ca. 540 frequency-controlled IP21 D360 (plastic)

° kg

IP55

WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos

TW160 max. 2 x 245 180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage

Nm V DC

mm mm

640

Standard 720 180

800

640

8 x 13, 7 x 16 kg

140

160

SA 4/9 720 160

800

7 x 13, 6 x 16 190

130

150

180


38

Issue 09/2015

TW-Drives

TW160 s r a e G

PERFORMANCE DATA

Rated Load Q [kg]


Suspension r

1800 2000 2500 3000 3500

0,8 - 2,0 0,8 - 1,2 0,63 - 1,6 0,63 - 1,2 0,63 - 1,0

1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1 2:1

TW160 on machine base frame

kproj. = see product catalog

www.liftequip.com

39

W-Drives

W263C For big travel heights & high loads • VVVF-motor (16 up tp 75 kW) controlled accurately • Horizontal rope departure (SA1) • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Reinforced traction sheave shaft (SA13) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Double safety by dual-circuit shoe brake • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 540, 640, 700, 740 or 800 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 1250 kg Special designs are possible

s r a e G

W263C horizontal right


Type of oil Backlash Weight Motor Type Type of protection - Motor handwheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake Type Braking Torque Operational Voltage Traction Sheave Type Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d)

Weight (incl. hub)

W263C 263

mm kN


L

ca. 20

synthetic gear oil 0,021 - 0,05 1250 frequency-controlled DTE / DTL / 1LA6 IP23 IP55 D360 (plastic) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos

° kg

W263C max. 2 x 320

Nm VDC

mm mm

1180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage

540 160

160

7x13 6x16 kg

125

150

Standard / SA 9 / SA 4 640 700 740 800 180 215 180 215 160 215 160 215 8 x 10/11 8x13 8x13 7x13 8x13 7x13 8x13 7x16 8x16 7x16 8x16 6x16 8x16 6x16 8x16 5x18 7x18 5x18 7x18 160 180 185 210 195 230 225 265

Technische Änderungen vorbehalten

40

Issue 09/2015

W-Drives

W263C s r a e G

PERFORMANCE DATA

Rated Load Q [kg]


Suspension r

2000 2200 3500 4000 4500

0,8 - 2,0 0,8 - 1,2 0,63 - 1,2 0,63 - 1,0 0,63 - 1,0

1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1

W263C horizontal left hand

2:1


www.liftequip.com

41

W-Drives

W332C The well proven for big loads • VVVF-motor (16 up to 75 kW) controlled accurately • Horizontal rope departure (SA1) • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Double safety by dual-circuit shoe brake • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 640, 700, 740 or 800 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 1700 kg Special designs are possible

s r a e G

W332C horizontal right


Type of oil Backlash Weight Motor Type Type of protection - Motor handwheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake Type Braking Torque Operational Voltage Traction Sheave Type Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d)

Weight (incl. hub)

W332C 332

mm kN


L

ca. 33 synthetic gear oil 0,022 - 0,04 1700 frequency controlled DTE / DTL / 1LA6 IP23 IP55 D360 (plastic) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos

° kg

W332C max. 2 x 625

Nm VDC

mm mm

kg

180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage

160

640 180

7x13 6x16

8x13 7x16 8x16

150

160

215

180

Standard / SA 9 / SA 4 700 740 180 215 160 215 8 x 10/11 8x13 7x13 8x13 7x16 8x16 6x16 8x16 5x18 7x18 185 210 195 230

800 160

215

7x13 6x16 5x18 225

8x13 8x16 7x18 265


42

Issue 09/2015

W-Drives

W332C s r a e G

PERFORMANCE DATA

Rated Load Q [kg]


Suspension r

2800 3200 4500 5500 6000

0,63 - 1,6 0,63 - 1,2 0,4 - 1,2 0,4 - 1,0 0,4 - 0,6

1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1 2:1

W332C horizontal left hand


www.liftequip.com

43

Drum Drives

Drum Drives s r a e G

TW130 incl. drum

Techni cal Data Rated load max. Q [kg] Car weight max. F [kg] Total load F+Q [kg] Rated speed [m/s]

450 300 750 0,5

525 400 925 0,63

800 550 1350 0,5

Suspension

800 550 1350 0,63

1000 700 1700 0,5

1000 700 1700 0,63

1200 800 2000 0,63

1:1

12 TW130

Travel height max. [m]

Machine type Ratio

TW63B 48:1

33:1

42:1

35:1

50:1

41:1

35:1

Drum diameter [mm] Drum length [mm]

360 240

360 265

450 300

520 300

520 300

520 300

8 1850 6,5 14,4

9 2615 9,3 25,5

10 3185 11,8 26,8

450 300 2 11 4183 14,5 44,5

11 4232 14,7 46,0

12 5483 18,1 41,2

13 6623 22,2 52,4

Number of ropes Rope diameter [mm] Dissipated heat [kJ/h] Motor output [kW] Motor current [A]

TW160

For higher loads the W-series is available on request

MODERN TECHNOLOGY „Made in Germany“ FOR THE FIRST GENERATION OF ELEVATORS Also nowadays this kind of machines are used in many buildings. For providing their service in future we offer our TW-series* for a smooth operation of your elevator. The car is directly mounted on the rope and the drive coils the ropes on the drum. The non-use of counterweights saves space and the whole shaft cross section can be used for the cabin. Therefore existing hydraulic elevators and rope elevators in limited space areas can be modernised easily. Our whole range of options, for example emergency brake system (NBS), Ex-protection or vertical motors) is available for you. If you cannot nd the suitable machine in the matrix above, please contact us, together we will nd a solution for higher loads or

special applications.

TW63B incl. druml

Requirements of the standard EN 81-1:

- Minimum 2 cables which are wound one layer - D / d (Drum/Rope):> 40 - Rope diameter: ≥ 8 mm - Rope safety:> 12

- Speed max. 0.63 m/s

44

Issue 09/2015

Emergency Brake System NBS

Emergency Brake System NBS s r a e G

Space saving, simple, cost-

effective Certied and type approved according to EN 81-1:A3

Control unit (mounting on machine room wall or in control cabinet)

Control System

We provide you with a well thought out and calculated package of solutions: Machine with emer gency brake, overspeed governor including a switch for overspeed and a separate control-unit. Together, those components form a closed and operable system. This systemic solution spares you time consuming self-made constructions bearing unforeseeable costs. Compact Design

Our emergency brake is mounted on the drive shaft vis-à-vis the traction sheave: A conguration, which offers you a space saving solution. Easy Conversion To modernize your lift installation the addition of Additional switch at overspeed governor

the following components to the drive sufces: an additional safety switch at the overspeed governor and a separate control unit with a voltage

Terminal box for inte rmediate con trol -Brake port -Ventilation monitoring -Temperature monitoring Emergency Brake NBS

supply for wall-mounted installation in the machine room. Continuous Availability The emergency brake system is optionally availa-

Motor

ble for the following geared drives: TW 45C, T W63B, TW130, TW160.

Technical Data Machine TW 45C TW 63B TW 130 TW 160

Rated Load Q [kg]*

Suspension r

Brake Torque [Nm]

500 / 1000 1125 / 2100 1800 / 3500 2200 / 4750

1:1 / 2 :1

1200 2200 4000 5500

1:1 / 2 :1 1:1 / 2 :1 1:1 / 2 :1

* maximum values depending on speed v

www.liftequip.com

45

46

Issue 09/2015

Mini-Gearless

PMC- / DAF-Series s s e l r a e G

www.liftequip.com

PMC - DAF Product Description

48

Performance Matrix

49

PMC125 S / M

50

PMC145-2 S/XS

51

PMC145-2 M/XM

52

PMC145-2 L/XL

53

PMC145-2 M/L with TS Ø 320

54

PMC170 S - XL

55

DAF210 M / L

56

DAF270 S / M / L / XL

58

Machine Base Frame for PMC - Gearless

62

Machine Base Frame for DAF - Gearless

63

Modernisation solution 'Geard to Gearless'

64


84

47

Mini-Gearless

PMC - DAF

EN81-

20/ -50

Product Description s s e l r a e G

Efcient

With our synchronous gearless series (PMC and DAF) one of the most compact drives is available

-conform

A design version of the brake with a manual venting lever is possible. Another option of the PMC series is a handwheel extension.

Safe

A safety brake is used in all gearless drives available from LiftEquip, which is licensed as type-tested safety brake against excessive speed upwards in accordance with EN81-1/9.10. EN 81-A3 compliant. Rope guard acc. to EN 81-77 up to earthquake category 3. Flexible

The drives can be used both in the shaft (MRL) as well as in the machine room. The arrangement can be congured in 1:1 and 2:1 suspension.

48

Compact The compact design is a signicant

for deployment in energy efcient

modernisation / or system solutions, ideally suited for energy recovery. These series stand out as excellent value for money. Excellent efciencies with low energy consumption.

life, low vibrations and an extremely smooth running drive for your lift.

Complete

We can provide you with the matc-

advantage for using the drives in your systems.

hing frequency inverter (MFR: with integrated power regeneration; MFC:

Reliable

with braking resistor) in each case for our gearless drives, which feature all of the drive parameters required. In this way we guarantee fast, safe start-up. Optionally in plug&play version with integrated brake control, line lter, line inductor and contac tors. In addition, we provide various machine frames, perfectly adapted to these drives. Special designs are available on request.

Durable, sturdy construction, promising exceptionally long service life and availability and sustainable economic efciency. EN81 20/-50

Our drives meet all requirements with regard to the above standards, in particular the approval of safety brakes and the rope guard.

Smooth running

The traction sheaves we use are precisely manufactured and supplied with hardened grooves. As a result we guarantee you a long service

Issue 09/2015

Mini-Gearless

Performance Matrix s s e l r a e G k Q

1:1 DAF270L/XL

1000

630

DAF270M

PMC145-2 L

DAF210L

500 DAF210M

PMC145-2 M PMC145-2 S

1,0 ] g k [ Q

1,5 v [m/s]

2:1

2500 DAF270L/XL

2000 DAF270M

PMC170

1500

DAF270M

DAF270S DAF210L

1000

630 500

PMC145-2 L

DAF 210L

PMC145-2 XL

PMC125M PMC145-2 M

DAF 210M

PMC145-2 XM

PMC125S

PMC145-2 XS

PMC145-2 S

1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

3,0

3,5

v [m/s]

In the diagrams the range of performance of the different machines are painted as an approximate value. For the exact assining of the machine we advise a technical calculation with the parameter of your installation. For this LEKalk is available.

www.liftequip.com

49

Mini-Gearless

PMC125 S / M

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

PMC125S

PMC125M

Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Mass of Car Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Rim width Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Groove type Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Braking Torque Designation Brake Monitoring Protection Class Noise level Frequency inverter type

50

PMC125S001 r

PMC125M002 2:1

Q

[kg]

F v DT B d z

[kg]

450 600

630 700 1,0 240 75 6 6 at groove clearance 12 mm / 7 at groove clearance 10 mm seat / vee groove, hardened 3,8 230 12 137

[m/s] [mm] [mm]

51

[mm]

4

PN MN

[kW] [Nm] [kN] [kg]

2,8 170 10 127

120 40 10,2 0,89

% IN cos

[A]

7,9

φ [Nm]

2 x 210

2 x 300

2-surface disc brake in double conguration (2 brake circuits)

[dB(A)]

MFR MFC

1 microswith per brake circuit IP 21 < 65 5.5 21-15, 31-10

Issue 09/2015

Mini-Gearless

PMC145-2 S/XS

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

PMC145-2S

PMC145-2XS

Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Groove type Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Designation

PMC145-2S r

Q [kg] v [m/s] DT [mm] d [mm]

z PN [kW] MN [Nm] [kN] [kg]

% IN [A] cos φ

1:1

2:1

275

450 1,0

www.liftequip.com

1,6

240 6 6 at groove clearance 12 mm / 7 at groove clearance 10 mm seat / vee groove, hardened 1,59 2,8 4,4 190 170 165 14 15 132 158 120 50 8,4 7,5 9,9 0,92 0,91 0,96 2 x 250 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double conguration (2 brake circuits)

Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type

PMC145-2XS

MFR MFC

1 microswith per brake circuit IP 21 5.5 31-10

31-15

51

Mini-Gearless

PMC145-2 M/XM

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

PMC145-2XM

PMC145-2M

Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake

PMC145-2M r

1:1

2:1

Q [kg]

400

630

52

1,0

v [m/s]

1,2

6 8 at groove clearance 12 mm / 9 at groove clearance 10 mm seat / vee groove, hardened 2,38 2,72 2,86 3,91 3,9 6 6,9 285 235 205 225 236 18 19 172 189 180 40 50 11,5 9,5 8,3 14,8 15,6 0,93 0,92 0,94 0,97 0,96

MN [Nm] [kN] [kg]

% IN [A] cos φ

210

1,75

d [mm]

PN [kW]

240

1,6

240

z

210

1,0

DT [mm]

240

2 x 350 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double conguration (2 brake circuits)


PMC145-2XM

MFR MFC


7.5

Issue 09/2015

Mini-Gearless

PMC145-2 L/XL

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

PMC145-2L

PMC145-2XL

Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type

www.liftequip.com

PMC145-2L

PMC145-2XL

r

1:1

2:1

Q [kg]

630

1000

1,0

v [m/s] DT [mm]

240

d [mm]

z PN [kW]

3,69

MN [Nm] [kN] [kg]

216

% IN [A] cos φ

0,94

1,2 210

240

1,0 210

1,6

1,75 240

6 11 at groove clearance 12 mm / 13 at groove clearance 10 mm seat / vee groove, hardened 4,2 4,42 6,01 6 9,4 10,2 440 360 315 352 350 32 30 214 216 214 229 180 40 50 18,3 14,9 13 24,7 24,6 0,93 0,92 0,95 0,96

2 x 550 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double conguration (2 brake circuits)

MFR MFC


18 31-26

53

Mini-Gearless

PMC145-2 M/L with traction sheave Ø 320

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

Bottom view

Sideview

View from above

PMC145-2M

PMC145-2L

Technic al Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake

PMC145-2M

PMC145-2L

r

1:1

2:1

1:1

2:1

Q [kg]

300

480

500

800

1,0 320 8

v [m/s] DT [mm] d [mm]

z PN [kW] MN [Nm]

max. 5

max. 6 seat / vee groove, hardened 3,1 2,76 245 440

1,79 285 18 185

[kN] [kg]

4,7 375 32 225

180 % IN [A] cos φ

40 11,5 0,94

50 9,9 0,93

40 18,3 0,93

2 x 350 Nm

50 15,5 0,92 2 x 550 Nm



54

1 microswith per brake circuit IP 21 MFR MFC

5.5

7.5 31-15

Issue 09/2015

Mini-Gearless

PMC170 S - XL

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

Dimensions L (mm)

D (mm)

E (mm)

F (mm)

H (mm)

S (mm)

G (kg)

PMC170S

180

613

426

300

706

273

381

PMC170M

240

673

486

360

766

304

423

PMC170L

270

703

516

390

796

319

448

PMC170XL

330

763

576

450

856

350

492

Technic al Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type

www.liftequip.com

PMC170S

PMC170M

r Q [kg] v [m/s]

1050 1,6

d [mm]

z

MN [Nm] [kN] [kg]

9,7 485 30 381

% IN [A] cos φ

PMC170XL

2:1

DT [mm]

PN [kW]

PMC170L

23 0,95

1650 1,0

1,6

1,75

320 8 10 seat / vee groove, hardened 9,8 15,6 17,1 781 42 40 423 448 180 50 27 40 0,94 0,95

2,0

19,5 42 492 240 45 0,94

2 x 1200 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double conguration

1 microswith per brake circuit IP 21 MFR MFC

--

18 31-26

31-40

31-60

55

Mini-Gearless

DAF210M

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake Brake Monitoring

DAF210M

r

1:1

Q [kg]

450

v [m/s]

1,0

d [mm]

z

MN [Nm]

630 1,6

320 8 5

DT [mm]

PN [kW]

2:1

2,83 450

4,3 430

240

180

50 12,5

60 12,0

[kg]

IN [A] cos φ

0,94

56

1,0

700

630

1,6

16,1 0,96

16,2

320 8 5

630 2,0 360 8/9 5/4

7,9

8,0

1,75

320 360 320 360 8 8/9 8 8/9 5 5/4 5 5/4 seat / vee groove, hardened 4,2 4,7 6,8 7,3 7,2 378 380 382 365 370 33 (≤ 75 1/min) / 37 (> 75 1/min) 250 240

10,5 0,95

700

50 17,4

15,4 0,95

360

17,2


1 microswith per brake circuit

Protection Class Frequency inverter type

630

360 8/9 5/4

[kN]

%

700

IP 20 MFR MFC

5.5 31-15

7.5 31-26

Issue 09/2015

Mini-Gearless

DAF210L

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type

www.liftequip.com

DAF210L r

1:1

Q [kg]

630

v [m/s] DT [mm] d [mm]

z PN [kW] MN [Nm] [kN] [kg]

2:1

630/900/1000/1125 1,0 520/400/360/320

630/900/1000/1125 1125 1000 1,0 1,6 1,6 1,75 2,0 320 520/400/360/320 320 360 8 8-13 7 5-8 seat / vee groove, hardened 4,10 5,75 4,7/5,9/6,6/6,5/7,5 7,4/9,5/10,5/11,5 11,3/12,4 12,5 650 575 610/590/586/520/600 600/595/590/575 580/565 563 for 320-, 360- and 400-traction sheave 38 (≤ 75 1/min) / 46 (> 75 1/min) for 520-traction sheave 37 (≤ 75 1/min) / 41 (> 75 1/min) 320/325/330 240

% IN [A] cos φ

16,0 0,94

14,0 0,95

15,4/15/15,2/13/16,8

0,96/0,94/0,95

50 23,4/23,2/23,0/25,5 25,7/25,1 0,96/0,95/0,95 0,95/0,96

25,0 0,96


1 microswith per brake circuits IP 20 MFR MFC

7.5 31-15

18 31-26/40

31-40

57

Mini-Gearless

DAF270S

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

Technic al Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight incl. traction sheave Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor

DAF270S r

2:1

Q [kg] v [m/s]

1,0

DT [mm] d [mm]

z PN [kW] MN [Nm]

8 640

[kN] [kg] [F/h] [%] IN [A] cos φ

23 0,94

Brake Monitoring Protection Class

58

2,5

17,8 570

27,8 0,96

2-surface disc brake in double conguration 2x1700 Nm option: with manual release

Version of Brake

Frequency inverter type

1250 1,6 1,75 2,0 320 8 10 seat / vee groove, hardened 12,6 13,8 15 630 600 43,5 475 240 50 30,7 29,2 0,95

MFR MFC

31-26

1 microswith per brake circuit IP20, optional IP54 18 31-40

-21-50R

Issue 09/2015

Mini-Gearless

DAF270M

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove

DAF270M r Q [kg] v [m/s] DT [mm]

1:1

2:1

1600 2000 1,0 1,6 1,0 440 320 440 320 320/440

1600 1,75

900 800 1000900 800 1000

1,6

2,0 440

8-11 7-9 seat / vee groove, hardened

d [mm]

z

Rated Power

PN [kW]

Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight incl. traction sheave Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor

MN [Nm] 1200/1175 1075/1050 1175 1250 1050/1025 1025/1050

5,4/7,4

7,8/10,6

10,7 11,4 15,3/14,9 16,3/16,7

[kg] 180

IN [A] cos φ

18,2

19,5

21,6 21,3 24,8

1000

860

950

780

180

240

43,5/58 550/570

[kN]

%

1350 1600 1250 2,5 3,0 3,5

240

240

180

180

40

240

50 40 50 40 27,5 24,5 24 25 22 30 24 25,5 30/35 0,96 0,94 0,92 0,93 0,95 0,94 0,94 0,95/0,94

50 35/30,5 38/29 41,5/28,5 31,4 31,2 36,5 0,95 0,96/0,95 0,95/0,96 0,96

Version of Brake

2-surface disc brake in double conguration 2x1250 / 2x1700 Nm option: with manual release

Brake Monitoring Protection Class

1 microswith per brake circuit IP20, optional IP54

Frequency inverter type

www.liftequip.com

MFR MFC

31-26/40

18 31-26

-31-40

31-60

21-50R

59

Mini-Gearless

DAF270L

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max.

DAF270L r

1:1

2:1

1100/1000 v [m/s] 1,0/1,6 Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 440 Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max.

Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load

Weight Number of Switching Operations

Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake

2000/2250/2500 1,0 1,6 490/440

Q [kg]

8-11 7

% IN [A]

26/24,5

50 25/36/41/28

cos φ

0,96

0,96/0,95

60

50/40 42,5/43,5/36/ 43,5 50/41 0,96/0,94 0,95

50 41,5/60/ 35/60

58/40/59 0,96

50/40 35/42,5/51,5/ 62 0,96/0,94

2-surface disc brake in double conguration 2x1700 option: with manual release

MFR MFC

4:1

2000 2200/2000 1800/2000 3000/4000/3400 4000 1,75 2,0 2,5 1,0/1,6 1,0 490 440/490 490/440 490/440 440

8-12 z 6-10 seat / vee groove, hardened PN [kW] 6,6/10,1 11,7/12,8/14,6 18/20,4/23,3 20 24,6/22,5 26,5/30 17/22,5/30,5 MN [Nm] 1475/1400 1433/1400/ 1375/1400/ 1400 1350/1375 1300/1325 1385/1650/ 1600 1600 1400 [kN] 58 730/740 [kg] 240 240/180 180 240 240/180 d [mm]


3:1

18 31-40

1 microswith per brake circuit IP20, optional IP54 18 / --31-60 31-60 / 21-105

18 / --

Issue 09/2015

25,1 1380

180 40 56 0,96

Mini-Gearless

DAF270XL

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

s s e l r a e G

Option: with manual release

Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max.

DAF270XL r

1:1

2:1

3:1

4:1

4000/3400 1,0/1,6

4000 1,0

8-13 z 6-10 seat / vee groove, hardened PN [kW] 6,6/10,1 12,2/12,8/14,6 17,3/20,4/23,3 24,6 30 22,5/30,5 MN [Nm] 1475/1400 1400/1600 1350 1325 1650/1400 73 [kN] [kg] 770/780 240 240/180 240 240/180

25,1 1380

1100/1000 v [m/s] 1,0/1,6 Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 440 Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max.

Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load

Weight Number of Switching Operations

Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake

1800/2000/2250/2500 1,0 1,6 520*/440

Q [kg]

d [mm]

cos φ

50 26/24,5 0,96

36/41/28 0,96/0,95

440

50/40 43,5/36/50/41 0,96/0,94

50 41,5/60 0,96

59 0,93

50/40 42,5/51,5/62 0,96/0,94

180 40 56 0,96

2-surface disc brake in double conguration 2x2200 option: with manual release


2000 2,5

8-11 7

% IN [A]

2200 2,0

MFR MFC

31-40

1 microswith per brake circuit IP20, optional IP54 -31-60 31-60

21-105

*see product catalogue DAF270

www.liftequip.com

61

Mini-Gearless

Machine base frame for PMC - Gearless s s e l r a e G

ModKit MO61 S

ModKit MO61 D4

Handrad/-lüftung optional

A S L 5 5 5 - 7 6 5 m m

For more information see description ModKit MO61S

For more information see description ModKit MO61 D4

Techni cal Data Frame Machine Suspension Rated load Rated speed Rope departure at drive

MODKit MO 61 S*

MODKit MO61 D4

PMC145-2 M, L

PMC145-2 M, L, XL

r Q [kg] v [m/s] [mm]

2.1 up to 1000

1:1

up to 675 1,0 from 555 to 765

up to 630 up to 1,6 600 ≤ ASL ≤ 1400

exible

Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] d [mm] Diameter of ropes Number of ropes max. Number of grooves max. z Type of groove DT [mm] Pulley diameter Vibration isolation elements Integrated rope end fastening points, rope anchorages Handwinding wheel, optional Manual release, optional Hoist

210 / 240

240 6 12 12 seat / vee groove, hardened 240 Yes No (1:1)

Yes Yes Yes

No

Yes

Pre-assemble machine base frame on stock Machine available from stock

* ▶ ▶

62

Issue 09/2015

Mini-Gearless

Machine base frame for DAF - Gearless

DAF210 on TW63B machine base frame

DAF270 on TW130 machine base frame

s s e l r a e G

Technic al Data Frame


Machine Suspension

DAF210M r

ASL-dimension exible*

[mm]


DAF210L

DAF270S/M/L 1:1

481 - 1073 320 / 360

Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] d [mm] Diameter of ropes Vibration isolation elements Adapter plat Rope guard optional Manual release optional * ASL-dimension is dependent on the traction sheave

501 - 1097 360 / 400

522 - 1297 320 / 360 / 440 8 / 10 / 11

8 / 10 Yes Yes Yes Yes

Further special frames on request. Contact us!

www.liftequip.com

63

Mini-Gearless

Modernisation solution "Geared to Gearless" s s e l r a e G

DAF210

DAF270

A exible solution, adjustable to the specic situation of the machine room

Existing situation

Possible solution

Szenario 1 Geared drive with extended shaft (SA9), Traction sheave located in the lift shaft and machine room located beside the lift shaft.

A gearless drive is installed in the already existing opening. The machine frame is especially designed to provide support upwards and downwards.

Szenario 2 Geared drive is mounted below the lift shaft, the machine room is located under the lift shaft, rope departure in upward direction.

The gearless machine frame is especially designed for rope departure in upward direction. A support with isolations is included.

Szenario 3 Geared drive is mounted above the lift shaft, the machine room is located abovethe lift shaft, rope departure in downward direction.

64

The gearless machine frame is especially designed for a rope departure in downward direction. A support with isolations is included.

Issue 09/2015

Mini-Gearless

Modernisation solution "Geared to Gearless" Example with DAF210L Rope departure in downward direction:

s s e l r a e G

Rope departure in upward direction:

Advantages of this example:

• Energy-efcient Gearless Technology • No additional safety gears required as the brake of the machine is certied for the overspeed in upward direction

• no replacement of the rope pulleys in the lift shaft required

Usage parameters: Q ≤ 630 kg / 2:1 / 1,0 m/s / diameter = 520 mm / 13 mm ropes

www.liftequip.com

65

66

Issue 09/2015

ModKit

MO61 Solutions with PMC Gearless s s e l r a e G

A S L 5 5 5 - 7 6 5 m m

MO61 D4 • Product description

68

• Techn. specifcations Rope suspension 1:1, 2:1

70

• Scope of supply

72

MO61 S • Technical Data

73

• Dimensions

74

MO61 CRX • The solution for plastic-coated ropes Colouring for all Drives

www.liftequip.com

75 84

67

ModKit

MO61 D4 Product Description s s e l r a e G

The powerful system solution in the modernisation of installations up to 1000 kg / 1.0 m/s (1:1) or up to 1000 kg / 1.6 m/s (2:1). Safety   

Sustainability

Type-approved safety brake EN 81-A3 compliant Integrated device for pulling out of the safety gear (optional)

 

Scope of supply

Small quantities of lubricants used and no oil change required Rolling bearings, life-time lubrication

Innovation Efciency





High level of efciency of up to 92%



provides for low energy consumption Ideally suited for energy recovery 

Comfort  Minimal noises and very smooth running  Outstanding ride comfort, e.g. in combination with a matched frequency inverter from LiftEquip



  

Well-conceived, exible solution with integrated deecting pulleys, rope xing points and mountings on elevator car / counterweight Drives optimally matched to the lower to middle power segment Ideal for use in modernisation in exchange for a geared drive in the machine room, general without structural adaptations



Gearless drive: Gearless PMC145-2 Machine base frame with elements for vibration isolation Additionally for 2:1: integrated rope suspension and universal diverter pulley mounting for car and counterweight Protective covers on traction sheave and diverter pulleys in acc. with EN 81-1 inclusive

Reliability  All installed components and parts are high quality  Ensuring a rapid and long lasting spare parts availability

IAvailable in versions for 1:1 or 2:1 rope suspension:

As a rule the previous ceiling openings can be used to feed through the ropes with the machine base frame that can be individually adapted to the existing project planning. This avoids costly structural measures.

Suspension 1:1

Suspension 2:1

Available in left- or right-hand version::

Left-hand version

68

Right-hand version

Issue 09/2015

ModKit

MO61 D4 Product Description Powerful and compact Exclusively the modern, tried-and-tested synchronous gearless drives of the PMC145-2 and PMC170 series are used in the ModKit MO61.

particu-larly favourable conditions for long-

life design are therefore satised. The PMC gearless drives have a typeapproved safety brake in accordance with

s s e l r a e G

EN 81-1 subclause 9.10 and a protection

Gearless PMC145-2

The low-noise and low-vibration drives operate at air-borne noise levels of less than

device against unintentional elevator car movement in accordance with EN 81-1:

60 dB(A). The efciency levels extend up to 92% and are therefore particularly efcient

1988+A3: 2009. This eliminates the need

in both driving and generator operation with energy recovery. The PMC drives are designed for 180 trips per hour with a duty cycle of 50% and can therefore easily cope

ures, e.g. retrots on the elevator car or a

during modernisation for additional measrope brake.

with high trafc volumes. The traction sheaves have a diameter of 240 mm with wearresistant, hardened seat grooves. Ropes with diameters of 6 mm are used. The ratio between traction sheave diameter and rope diameter is thus always 40. In accordance with the standards the

y g r 1 e 6 n O e s M ' t n i o K i d t a o l l M a t s e h n t i r h t u i o y w y e c s n a i e e r c c  f n e I

High energy efciency

The perfect c ombination: MFC and MFR frequency inverters The ModKit MO61 is rounded off if required by a compact, optimally matched MFC series frequency inverter in which all the drive parameters of the gearless drive are already stored.

The frequency inverters from LiftEquip are specially designed for the strict re-quirements in elevator construction. The high clock frequency and control quality ensure a high degree of smooth running of the drive and low noise development.

If required, you can operate the drive with an MFR series frequency inverter with integrated energy recovery unit. When the drive is in generator operation, electrical energy is fed back to the in-house system

and additionally increases the efciency of your installation. MFR frequency inverter, Webcode 2069from the wide product range

www.liftequip.com

69

ModKit

MO61 D4 Technical specifcations – Rope suspension 1:1 with PMC145-2 s s e l r a e G

Rope suspension 1:1

Openings and load points in the machine room

Rope progression

(wrap angle on example with RCD =1400)

Centre of elevator car frame

Centre of counterweight

Dimensions in mm

Performance chart (rope suspension 1:1) Nominal load max

Q

[kg]

320

450

630

Nominal speed

v

[ms]

0.6 - 1.0

0.6 - 1.0

1.6

0.6 - 1.0

Drive, gearless

PMC

145-2M

145-2L

145-2XL

145-2L

Rope suspension

r

Travel height*.

FH

[m]

Car weight min./max.

FK

[m]

Rope clearance dimension

SAM

[mm]

600 - 1400

Diameter, traction sheave

DT

[mm]

240

Suspension ropes

n x dS

[mm]

Diameter, diverter pulleys

DA

[mm]

Weight, drive

mA

[kg]

Weight, sling

mR

[kg]

1:1 33

25

400 - 900

300 - 650

8x6

650 - 900

12 x 6 240

172

229

216

216

max. 150

*approximate value

70

Issue 09/2015

ModKit

MO61 D4, Technical specifcations – Rope suspension 2:1 with PMC145-2 s s e l r a e G

Rope suspension 2:1

Openings and load points P in the machine room

Centre of counterweight

Rope progression

(wrap angle on example with RCD = 1250)

Centre of elevator car frame

Dimensions in mm

Performance chart (rope suspension 2:1) Nominal load max

Q

[kg]

630

1000

Nominal speed

v

[mm]

0.6 - 1.0

1.05 - 1.6

0.6 - 1.0

1.05 - 1.6

Drive, gearless

PMC

-

145-2M

145-2XM

145-2L

145-2XL

Rope suspension

r

Travel height*

FH

[m]

Car weight min./max.

FK

[m]


SAM

[mm]

750 - 1400

Diameter, traction sheave

DT

[mm]

240

Suspension ropes

n x dS

[mm]

Diameter, diverter pulleys

DA

[mm]

Weight, drive

mA

[kg]

Weight, sling

mR

[kg]

2:1 33 600 - 1200

870 - 1450

9x6

12 x 6 240

172

189

216

229

max. 150

*approximate value

www.liftequip.com

71

ModKit

MO61 D4 Scope of Supply s s e l r a e G

We supply a exible modication set, consisting of the components

 

Permanent-magnet, gearless synchronous machine: Gearless PMC 145-2 Machine base frame with vibration isolation elements, in acc. with VDI 2566 - for rope suspension 1:1 - for rope suspension 2:1, integrated rope end fastening points, rope anchorages - Machine base frames are individually manufactured to the desired rope clearance dimension RCD - Both versions (1:1 and 2:1) are available in the left- or right-hand version



Integrated plastic rope deecting pulleys



Variant for rope suspension 1:1:

- Optional: Universal, highly exible mounting with rope xing points for car and counter 

weight Variant for rope suspension 2:1:

- Universal, highly exible mounting with diverter pulleys for car and counterweight - Complete rope kit: suspension ropes with dia. 6 mm, expert's report, conformity-tested

with Directive 95/16/EC “Lifts / Elevator Directive”, all rope accessories 

Integrated device for pulling the car out of the safe ty gear (optional)

Optional: - Handwinding wheel - Device for pulling the car out of the safety gear - Optimally matched MFC or MFR series frequency inverter

Diverter pulley mounting for car and counterweight (suspension 2:1)

Universal diverter pulley mounting

The pulley supports are xed to the top beam of the elevator car sling and to the counterweight. The freely rotatable suspension enables the diverter pulley to be mounted to match the rope suspension so that the ropes are not subjected to twisting. Mounting on car sling, variable adaptation dep.

on mounting proles

Mounting on counterweight, variable adaptation dep.

on frame proles

72

Issue 09/2015

ModKit

MO61 S Technical Data s s e l r a e G

Option:

with handwinding wheel

Option: manual release

A S L 5 5 5 -

7 6 5 m m

Techni cal Data Type of Machine Suspension Rated load Rated speed Rope departure at drive exible

Diameter of traction sheave Diameter of ropes Groove clearance Number of ropes max. Number of grooves max. Type of groove No. of switching operations Duty cycle Version of brake

PMC145-2 M, PMC145-2 L r Q

v ASL DT d RA

1:1 [kg] [m/s] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]

z

ED

%

up to 675 1,0 from 555 to 765 210 / 240 6 / 6,5 * 10 12 12 seat / v-groove 180 40 2-surface disc brake (safety brake) option: with manual release

Brake monitoring Protection class Pulley diameter

DT

[mm]

with microswitch IP 21 240

* 6,5 mm ropes with special diverter pulley

Pre-assembled machine frame on stock ▶ Machine available from stock ▶

www.liftequip.com

73

ModKit

MO61 S Dimensions s s e l r a e G

max.

1 m m 4 6 0 1

2

m m 1 6 4 = y

555 ≤ ASL ≤ 765 (TS 240 mm) 540 ≤ ASL ≤ 750 (TS 210 mm)

3 4

n o L i s / m n M e 2 m m i 5 0 d 4 0 l 1 8 . a n n r C i e M m t x P E

Position of the rubber elements

5

Scope of supply machine frame:

1 2 3 4 5

74

Rope cover Console Rubber element Frame telescopable Axle, diverter pulley

Issue 09/2015

ModKit

MO61 CRX The solution for plastic-coated ropes Compared to steel ropes with the same diameter, plastic-coated ropes have a higher friction c oefcient and higher breaking strength. Thanks to the higher friction coefcient, the forces

required can be transferred at a lower wrap-around angle. Due to the lower D/d ration when using this rope, it is possible to use smaller diameter traction sheaves. This means given the same drive power, greater torque is available with a smaller traction sheave diameter. An economic solution is possible with fewer ropes and a smaller drive by using plastic-coated ropes.

s s e l r a e G

EN 81-1 and EN 81-20 only describe the use of steel ropes with a nominal diameter of at least 8 mm and a D/d ratio of at least 40. Given the corresponding authorisation and type approval test, it is possible to deviate from this standard if the measures described in the authorisation conditions for use and the requirements demanded for operation are complied with. The trend to increasingly small traction sheaves makes it necessary to look for corresponding solutions with regard to the traction capacity. The solution here is the ModKit MO61 CRX for plastic-coated ropes

It consists of the PMC 145-2 drive, with a traction sheave diameter of 150 mm for up to 11 ropes with 6 mm diameter (manufacturer Drako PTX 300) or up to 6 ropes with 8,1 mm diameter (manufacturer Brugg CTP 8.1 G2). The machine-frame is telescopic and as a result can be adjusted to the required ASL dimension. Insulation elements and rope

protection according to EN 81-20 are included in delivery.

Technic al Data Type of Machine Suspension Rated load

Mass of car Rated speed

ASL-Maß Diameter of traction sheave Diameter of ropes Number of ropes max.

PMC 145-2 r

1:1

Q [kg] F [kg] v [m/s] [mm] DT [mm] d [mm]

630 900 1,0

Type of rope Number of grooves max.

Groove-type

z

500 ≤ ASL ≤ 1400

150 6 8,1 7 6 DRAKO PTX 300 Brugg CTP 8.1 G2 11 6 Round groove

(Sample conguration)

www.liftequip.com

75

ModKit

MO61 CRX s s e l r a e G

Technical notes on the use of plasticcoated steel ropes

The requirements for the area of use, ambient conditions and state of wear are described in the particular type approval certicate for the rope. Among other things,

the replacement criteria depend on a specied number of travels or duration of use. For

this purpose it is necessary that the travel number (change of direction) is recorded by a manipulation-proof trip meter and that the lift is immobilised upon reaching this travel number. The ropes must be checked for wear and damage; here too the discard criteria dened in the type approval certicate

must be observed. The traction sheaves and rope pulleys have a groove prole corresponding to the infor mation of the rope supplier. Calculation of the traction capacity must be performed according to the requirements in EN 81. The advice of the rope supplier provided on storage, transport, handling, mounting and operation of the ropes must be observed. In particular, the ropes must be secured against twisting and the special information of the rope supplier regarding diagonal pull complied with

76

Issue 09/2015

Compact-Gearless

SC-Series s s e l r a e G

SC300/400

www.liftequip.com

• Product description

78


84

77

Compact-Gearless

SC300 and SC400

EN81-

20/ -50

-conform

s s e l r a e G

SC300

The synchronous COMPACT-Gearless SC 300 is our workhorse for superior lifts. Capable of rated loads up to 1600kg with 2:1 suspension or for operating speeds up to 3.5m/s. The synchronous COMPACTGearless SC 400 is the drive for high-speed lifts and heavy loads. Capable of rated loads up to 2750 kg with 2:1 suspension or for operating speeds up to 4.0 m/s.

is available in several power classes

Super Quiet Machine

ranging from 19.4 kW up to 48.6 kW and

Thanks to its excellent efciency the SC 300

Excellent Motor Control The vector controlled, synchronous machines with permanent magnet excitation are known for outstanding driving comfort. They are available in several power classes ranging from 10 kW up to 24.8 kW and as standard in protection class IP 43 for SC300. The SC400

certied as safety brake according to the

Machine Suspension

SC300S 2:1 SC300M

Machine

Compact Design As synchronous machine with a monobloc housing the SC-Series is very space-

saving in both the S- an the M-version. Double Safety The type-tested dual-circuit disc brake ensures safety at the best. This device is

European standard for lifts EN 81-A3. An additional and costly braking system for upwards braking operation is thus not necessary.

Rated speed v [m/s]

1000

1,0 - 2,5

900

3,0

1800

1,0

1600

1,6 - 2,5

1250

3,0 - 3,5

Machine Suspension

SC400S SC400M

SC300M

ca. 665 kg ca. 1230 kg ca. 1315 kg

1:1

SC400S

Drive with Traction sheave [kg]

ca. 565 kg

SC400M

IP20 as standard protection class.

Rated load Q [kg]

SC300S SC400S

78

SC400

2:1 SC400M

can pass on an additional ventilation. This results in a comfortable low sound-pressure level.

Package Solution High precision machine frames facilitate the construction of lifts with double wrap. If desired you can also obtain a frame for single wrap.

Maintenance-Free Due to its design our COMPACT-Gearless has a small number of mechanical components. In addition, since no oil is needed, a positive effect on maintenance and product life is achieved.

Rated load Q [kg]

Rated speed v [m/s]

1000 1350 1250 1000 2000 1700 1400 2750 2500 2000 1600

4 2,5 3 4 2 3 4 2 2,5 4 4

Traction sheave Ø

1)

560

1) Reduced travel height

Issue 09/2015

Compact-Gearless

SC300 and SC400 s s e l r a e G

SC300 on Machine frame

SC300

SC400

www.liftequip.com

79

80

Issue 09/2015

External Rotor Gearless

DAB-Series s s e l r a e G

DAB 450, 530

www.liftequip.com


82


84

81


DAB450

EN81-

20/ -50

-conform

s s e l r a e G

Technical Data DAB450* Machine

DAB450S

DAB450L

DAB450S

DAB450L

Suspension

r

Rated load

Q [kg]

1150

1600

2400

2000

2400

2200

Rated speed Diameter Traction Sheave max. Numbers of Grooves

v [m/s]

3,5 / 4,0

3,0 - 4,0 600

2,5

3,0

3,5 660

4,0

52

54

2445

2220

1:1

DT [mm]

2:1

z

16 x Ø 13/14 // 16 x Ø 1“/ 2“

Type of Groove

seat / vee / semicircular groove

Rated Power

PN [kW]

27,5 / 30,3

28,5 / 38,8

Rated Torque

MN [Nm]

2340 / 2280

2840 / 2920

permitted radial Axle Load

[kN]

Weight

[kg]

40 2400

2200 360

2300

2650

Number of Operations

2300

2650

240

Duty Cycle

%

Rated Current

IN [A]

56 / 56

57 / 76

72

97

96

Output Factor

cos φ

0,77 / 0,83

0,78

0,84

0,77

0,81

60

Version of Brake Brake Monitoring

external dual circuit shoe brake

Protection Class

IP20

temperature monitoring

* Standard values

82

Issue 09/2015


DAB530

EN81-

20/ -50

-conform

s s e l r a e G

Technical DataDAB530* DAB530L

DAB530XL

Machine Suspension

r

Rated load

Q [kg]

2400

2250

5000

4500

4700

4100

Rated speed

v [m/s]

3,5

4,0

2,0

2,5

3,5

4,0

Diameter Traction Sheave

DT [mm]

700

max. Numbers of Grooves

z

20 x Ø 16 // 20 Ø 5/8 “ // 14 x Ø 18

1:1

2:1

740

seat / vee / semicircular groove

Type of Groove Rated Power

PN [kW]

Rated Torque

MN [Nm]

permitted radial Axle Load

[kN]

Weight

[kg]

50,6

57,5 5040

64,0

77,3

5600

5430

88,5 4670

4083

450 4000

4300 240

Number of Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current

% IN [A]

103

106

115

132

169

164

Output Factor

cos φ

0,77

0,82

0,83

0,86

0,77

0,8

60

Version of Brake Brake Monitoring

external dual circuit shoe brake

Protection Class

IP20

temperature monitoring

* Standard values

www.liftequip.com

83

Colouring

Colouring for all Drives and machine frame s e v i r D

RAL 7021 – Black grey

RAL 7005 – Mouse grey Colour of the machine base frames

84

The paintwork of drives is the environmentally friendly hydro-paint in the colour RAL 7021 (Black grey).

The machine base frames will continue to be supplied with a high-quality powder coating in a colour similar to RAL 7005 (Mouse grey). A polyester epoxy powder

Advantages of the new hydro-paint:

mix with a coating thickness of approx. 60 μm is used.

• Two-component water-based paint with higher impact strength • Complies with the VOC Directive (Volatile Organic Compounds) and thus very environ mentally compatible • Resistant to solvents, alkaline solutions and synthetic oils

Galvanised add-on parts are not painted. This changeover means that the drives and the optional machine base frame will consistently have a technologically superior and environmentally compatible surface coating. It will also lend the entire drive unit an even more attractive appearance.

Issue 09/2015

Drive Accessories

Drive Accessories s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D

Brake control for operational brakes • BS3

87

• BSV2 and BSV4

88

• BSV1

89

UCM-Modul incl. Shaft Encoder

www.liftequip.com

86

90

85

Drive Accessories

Brake Control for Operational Brakes and NBS In gearless and geared drives s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D

The operational brakes and NBS systems of the gearless and geared drives are closed in de-energised condition. To enable the brake to be opened, the brake magnets of the two brake circuits must be energised. Depending on the brake design, the brake is opened with high-speed excitation and kept open with reduced voltage. There are also brakes that are opened without high-speed excitation. Selection of the brake control for different brakes depends on the high-speed excitation voltage and holding voltage required and the current needed. The table below shows the assignment of the drives with brakes to t he different brake controls:

Overview Drive accessories BS 3 (50-60 Hz)

BSV 2

BSV 2 (60 Hz)

BSV 4 (207/144V)

BSV 1 (50-60 Hz)

6510 000 9263

65 100 27 68 0

6510 000 9262

6510 000 92 65

65 000 06 67 0

● Gear Brake: Warner/Kendrion (not W332C)



● DAF (Mini Gearless) (not DAF270 2x2200 Nm)

● DAF (210/270) only ships (not DAF270 2x2200Nm)

● DAF (210/270) only ships (not DAF270 2x2200Nm)

● DAF270 (2x2200 Nm)

● SC 300

● SC 300

● SC 300

● W332C

● PMC (manually released)

● PMC (manually released) only ships

● PMC (manually released) only ships

● DAB 450/530

● PMC 125/145-2 (electrical brake release) ● PMC 170

● SC 400

● PMC (electrical brake release 207/144V)

When using the drives with the MFC 30/31-xx inverters in plug&play design or MFR, the brake control is integrated in the inverter. The different brake controls with their technical data are described below.

86

Issue 09/2015

Drive Accessories

BS3 s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D

Brake control 3 serves to activate brake magnets for elevator drives. Design

Brake control 3 consists of a control board, an integrated power lter and the

connection terminals for mounting on a top hat rail. Operation

The direct voltage required for the brake magnets is generated via a bridge rectier and downstream pulse width modulation with output lter. A varistor

protection circuit is provided at the output. An integrated power lter ensures compliance with the

EMC limit values.

Technic al Data

6510 000 9263

Part number: Nominal system voltage:

230 V AC

Line fuse (glass fuse on the PCB)

230V F,4AT 48-63 Hz

Frequency of system voltage:

Braking voltages:

Nominal output current: Maximum output current:

• • • • •

180/90V 207/103V 207/144V overexcitation continously on 180V or 207V additional freely programmable braking voltage

1,5 A 3 A (for overexcitation time, max. 2 sec.)

Switch ON duration:

100 % ED; 60% ED with continuous overexcitation

Level of protection:

IP20

Ambient operating temperature: Relative air humidity: Max. site altitude above sea level: EMC check: Mounting:

Dimensions (LxBxH) Weight

www.liftequip.com

0° - 50°C no condensation 10…95%r.H., annual mean 70 % 1000 m without derating compliance with EN 12015 and EN 12016 top hat rail 170 x 125 x 78 mm

approx. 1,00 kg

87

Drive Accessories

BSV2 and BSV4 s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D

The brake control 2 and 4 is used to activate brake magnets for elevator drives with rated currents of 0.25 - 1.25 A Structure

The brake control 2 and 4 consists of a control board, a power lter and the connection terminals.

The components are mounted on a steel bracket and covered with a perspex sheet to prevent human contact with live parts. Operation

The direct current for the brake magnets is generated via a semi-controlled bridge rectier. The bridge rectier is activated by a phase-control module. The bridge rectier is equipped with a free wheeling diode as well as a varistor protection circuit at the output. An integra ted power lter ensures compliance with the EMC limit values. After applying the mains voltage (230 V AC), there is

an output voltage according to Table 1 at the output of terminal 10 - and terminal 20 + . Connecting connections 10 and 22 reduces the output voltage after approx. 1 second to approx. retentive voltage.

Technical data Brake control 2 and brake control 4

Part number

Brake control 2

Brake control 2 60Hz

Brake control 4

65 100 27 68 0

6510 000 9262

6510 0009265

Nominal system voltage:

230VAC

Line fuse (glass fuse on the PCB)

230V F 3,15A 50Hz

60Hz

50Hz

Output voltage (retentive voltage)*

90V

90V

144V

Overexcitation voltage*

180V

180V

200V

Frequency of system voltage:

Output current

max. 2,5A

Activation period

100% ED

Type of protection

IP00

Ambient operating temperature

0° - 50°C

Relative air humidity:

max. 70%

max. site altitude amsl EMV check Dimensions L*B*H Weight

2000m without derating (derating above this to 3500m: derating 1% pro 100m The requirements of EN 12015 and EN 12016 are complied with 180mm*120mm*103mm 1,1 kg

* all data refer to the rated connection voltage

88

Issue 09/2015

Drive Accessories

BSV1 s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D

The brake control BSV1 is designed for activating brake magnets at rated currents of 2.0 A to 7.8 A. With BSV 1 the preselected current will always ow independent of line voltage uctuations. The

effective force of the brake magnets and consequently their noise response during activation can be inuenced by means of the current to be set through jumpers. Conguration

The brake control BSV1 consists of the power part, the control board and the lter board. All parts are

mounted on a heat sink, including the terminals for the main connections. The heat sink is isolated from the remaining assemblies and is applied to protective earth potential (PE). The heat sink is also used for fastening the assembly in the control cabinet. Mode of operation

BSV1 is designed as current controller and has PI characteristic. The reference current value is generated on the control board. The desired continuous current (which normally corresponds to the holding current of the brake release magnets) is preselected by means of jumpers J1 and J2 in increments of 0.2 A in the range of 2 A to 7.8 A. Technical data of BSV1

Part number Nominal system voltage: Frequency of system voltage:

Supply voltage for internal power supply: Output current: (Stabilized) pick-up current: Mode of operation: Activation period: Max. operating frequency: Type of protection: Ambient operating temperature: Relative air humidity: max. site altitude amsl: EMV check: Dimensions L*B*H:

Weight www.liftequip.com

65 000 06 67 0 230 V AC – 15% to 400 V AC + 10%, 2- phase or phase – N (note operating

conditions of connected brake release magnets) 50 Hz bzw. 60 Hz 230V AC + 10% / - 15%, 50/60 Hz Continuous (stabilized) current is equivalent to holding current of brake: 2A

to 7.8 A, to be preselected in increments of 0.2 A. Twice the value of the preselected continuous current for one second S4 75% ED 260 circuits / hour IP00 0°C to 45°C max. 70% 2000 m without derating derating of 1% per 100m above 2000 m to 3500 m compliance with requirements of EN 12015 (interference) and EN 12016 (immunity). 165 x 200 x 93 mm 2,2 kg

89

UCM-Modul

Incl. Shaf Encoder s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D

Control

The twin encoder is mounted in the sha. Our mounng-set consists of: • • •

An universal xing for the guide rails Toothed belt (length depends on the travel height) for the encoder drive Diverter pulleys for the sha pit.

The UCM-module has to be integrated in to the control. Due to the small dimensions of the module the installaon is very easy and doesn´t pose any problems.

For the operaon with an overspeed governor an addional emergency power supply is neccessary. Therefore the governor doesn´t stop the machi ne in case of power breakdown unless there is no error message.

Gearless machine

Geared machine incl. NBS

Geared machine without NBS

Hydraulic

1:1 - Stopping the machine - Activating the UCM brake device

- Bucher DSV-A3 valve

- Stopping the machine - Activating the UCM brake device

stopps the ow at the

piston

- Stopping the machine - activates locking device - activates safety gear

2:1 - activates locking device - activates safety gear

90

Issue 09/2015

UCM-Modul

Incl. Shaft Encoder s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D

With our type-examinaon tested combinaon of UCM-module and twin sha encoder, fulllment of EN81-A3 is very easy.

This soluon can be integrated very fast and easy in rope elevators and also in hydraulic elevators . Thanks to its autonomous operaon the module can be used universally with almost any controller and EN81/A3 cered emergency stop facilies.

Technical data

Supply voltage Power consumption Safety circuit voltage Triggering speed max. Triggering distance max. Triggerung time max. Speed max. Type of incremental encoder Travel height

24V 4W 230V 0,2 m/s 100 mm 50 ms 3,5 m/s HTL-1024 Imp./U. 55 m (higher travel heights on request)

And that´s how it works: The device monitors the movement of the car t hrough two independent evaluaon channels. The speed and traveling distance are monitored as from the start of the travel operaon. As soon as the door contact is interrupted and the speed exceeds a value of 0.2 m/s, or the covered distance is greater than 100 mm, safety relays will be turned o. The redundant encoder system consists of two encoders and has a belt crack monitoring incl. safety switch.

www.liftequip.com

91

92

Issue 09/2015

Frequency Inverter

MFC and MFR r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F

MFC 20/21, Product description

94

MFC 30/31, Product description

96

MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18, with Regeneration

www.liftequip.com


98

Plug & Play Cable sets

101

93

Frequency Inverter

MFC 20/21 r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F

Current vector-controlled frequency inverters from LiftEquip are designed for controlling asynchronous (MFC 20) or synchronous (MFC 21) drives. Frequency inverter package In addition to the inverter, it contains the mains lter and the power choke for connecting to TN, TT and IT power supply systems. The connection is established via the parallel or the DCP interface. The braking resistor is supplied in a separate housing. Safe evacuation and maintenance In the event of failure of the power supply, a single-phase UPS (uninterruptible power supply) enables emergency operation. If, during maintenance, the controller is switched-off and the operational brake of a synchronous gearless machine is released, an optional coasting device limits the car speed to safe values by connecting an additional resistor. Fast start-up The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. You can thus easily and quickly select the relevant motor. Special and time-consuming motor parameterisation is thereby avoided. The motor data of third-party motors is determined through autotuning. Simple parameter entry The MFC 20/21 inverter is equipped with a control panel with a two-line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, acceleration, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks, traction sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in physical values

94

Issue 09/2015

Frequency Inverter


Technical data Inverter type MFC 20/21-... Motor power

[kW]

15

32

48

60

105

7,5

14

24,5

28,5

49

INPUT DATA (MAINS SIDE) Line voltage range

[V]

Nominal input current

[A]

16

3 AC 380, -10 % bis 415, +10 % 27 43 52 92

Maximum input current

[A]

26

42

64

95

145

Line fuses AFF (external)*

[A]

25

40

63

80

125 **

Conductor cross section

[mm²]

2,5

6

10

16

25

OUTPUT DATA (MOTOR SIDE) Nominal output voltage Nominal output current, Irated Maximum output current for 10 s, Imax Nominal output power Maximum output power for 10 s

3 AC 350

[V] [A]

18

32

50

60

115

[A]

30

48

75

110

180

[kVA]

11

20

31

36

70

[kVA]

18,5

30

46

60

110


[mm²]

2,5

6

10

16

35

Loss at rated power

[W]

350

600

900

1200

2100

0,97

0,97

0,97

0,97

0,97

[mm]

305

305

330

334

440

[mm]

345

345

460

523

900

[mm]

207

207

223

295

278

[mm]

+ 70

+ 70

+ 70 0 100 / 100

0

Total efciency

MECHANICAL DATA Width Height Depth Additional for connector Minimum top / bottom clearance

[mm]

Fan power, free blowing

[m³/h]

140

140

360

360

620

[kg]

17

18

26

35

59

Weight * Duty class gR ** Line fuse internal class gRL

www.liftequip.com

95

Frequency Inverter


Plug&Play current vector-controlled frequency inverters from LiftEquip are the optimal addition for controlling asynchronous (MFC 30) or synchronous (MFC 31) drives. Ready-to-install inverter package In addition to the inverter, it contains the brake controller, the mains lter, the power choke and the travel contactors completely wired and integrated in the housing for connection to TN, TT and IT power supply systems. The connection is established via the parallel or the DCP interface. The braking resistor is supplied in a separate housing. EN81-A3 With integrated speed monitoring and the standard HSD circuit board, our MFC 30/31 frequency inverter, when used together with a suitable controller, is ideal for satisfying the requirements of EN81-A3. Safe evacuation and maintenance In the event of a power failure, emergency operation is possible via a UPS (uninterruptible power supply). If, during maintenance, the controller is switched-off and the operational brake of a synchronous gearless machine is released, an optionally available coasting device limits the car speed by connecting an additional resistor. Simple parameter entry The MFC 30/31 inverter is equipped with a control panel with a twoline LCD display. Parameters such as speed, acceleration, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks, traction sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in physical values. Ad di ti on al s afety Our inverter package controls the release of the operational brake via the integrated control unit. The brake monitoring switches of our drives (version SA3) for evaluating the brake condition must be connected to the controller in accordance with EN 81. The integrated travel contactors are also monitored for "switching of the contactors after change of run direction" as set out in EN 81. Fast start-up The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. The motor data of third-party motors is determined through autotuning.

96

Issue 09/2015

Frequency Inverter


Technical data Inverter type MFC 30/31-... Motor power

[kW]

10

15

26

40

60

50R

100R 155R 310R

5

7,5

11

18

28,5

18

36

60

105

Input data (mains side)

Line voltage range

[V]

3 AC 380, -10 % bis 415, +10 %

Nominal input current

[A]

10

16

23

34

52

36

72

105

180

Maximum input current

[A]

17

26

38

55

95

85

170

315

630

Line fuses AFF (internal)

[A]

25*

25

40

63

80

80

135

315

400


[mm²]

2,5

2,5

4

6

16

10

25

35

95

Output data (motor side)

Nominal output voltage

[V]

Nominal output current, Irated

[A]

12

18

27

42

60

35

64

104

180

Maximum output current for 10 s, I max [A]

18

30

43

67

110

75

150

225

450

Nominal output power

[kW]

7,2

11

16

25

36

24

48

81

140

Maximum output power for 10 s

[kVA]

11

18,5

26

40

60

51

102

187

375


[mm²]

2,5

2,5

4

10

16

6

16

35

95 / 2x35

Loss at rated power

[W]

220

330

500

800

1200 1500 3000

6000

6000

0,97

0,97

0,97

0,97

0,97

0,94

0,94

0,94

0,94

344

401

600

1000

1400

Total efciency

3 AC 350 - 10

3 AC 440

3 AC 450

Mechanic al data

Width

[mm]

244

309

309

333

Height

[mm]

387

715

715

1090 1263 1105 1950

2200

2200

Depth

[mm]

260

263

263

270

340

284

470

600

600

[m³/h]

80

140

140

360

360

360

700

1000

1000

[kg]

19

35

38

55

81

80

195

460

750

Fan power, free blowing Weight

* Line fuses AFF (external), duty class gR

www.liftequip.com

97

Frequency Inverter

MFR5.5, 7.5, 18 with regeneration r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F

A very compact device for inverter and regenerative mode

The patented, energy-regenerating MFR frequency inverters from LiftEquip are the optimal addition for the energyefcient control of synchronous drives. Ready-to-install inverter package

The MFR frequency inverters include energy recovery, electronic brake controllers, mains lter, power choke and the

electronic travel contactors. Control takes place via parallel, DCP or CANopen interface. EN81-A3

Electronic travel contactors and an electronic brake controller (within the standard scope of supply) enable a uniquely fast shutdown time of the drive. With our integrated speed monitoring and a suitable controller, you have the safest and fastest solution for satisfying EN81-A3. Energy-saving functio n

In addition to energy recovery, our MFR inverters also offer the possibility to further save energy in standby mode (approx. 17 watt). Simple parameter entry

The MFC inverter is equipped with a control panel with a two-line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, acceleration, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks,

traction sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in physical values. Remote parameterisation via DCP and CANopen is possible. Ad di ti onal s afety

Our inverter package controls the release of the operational brake via the integrated control unit. The brake monitoring switches of our drives, for evaluating the brake condition, can be connected to the inverter in accordance with EN 81. Fast start-up

The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. Third-party motors can be matched to the inverter by entering the motor data.

Interfaces

• CANopen - Position Mode - Velocity Mode • DCP - 03 - 04 • Parallel The motor parameters can be programmed on request.

98

Issue 09/2015

Frequency Inverter

MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18 with regeneration r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F

Technical data Inverter type MFR Motor power

[kW]

5.5 5,5

7.5 7,5

18 18,5

INPUT DATA (MAINS SIDE) Line voltage range Line frequency Continuous input current (thermal) Maximum input current

[V] [Hz] [A] [A]

3 AC 380, -10 % up to 460, +15 % nominal 50, range 48 ... 63 10 14 36 20 30 75

OUTPUT DATA (MOTOR SIDE) Nominal output voltage

[V]

Nominal output current, Irated Maximum output current for 3 s, Imax Maximum output power for 3 s Conductor cross section Loss at rated power

[A] [A] [kVA] [mm²] [W]

Total efciency

Type of protection

3 AC 0…input voltage (max. 340 V for motor design) 12 18 42 21,8 33,5 75 11,5 17,5 35 2,5 2,5 10 350 500 1200 0,95 0,95 0,95 IP21

MECHANICAL DATA Width Height Depth Minimum top / bottom clearance Fan power, free blowing Weight

[mm] [mm] [mm]

330 614,5 196

[mm] [m³/h] [kg]

140 18,4

330 614,5 196 0/100 140 18,4

353 971,8 207,5 100/100 300 43,5

Radio interference (emission) according to EN12015 Immunity to EN12016 Power dissipation in standby mode max. 17 W PlugPlay device (complete inverter with regeneration)

www.liftequip.com

99

100

Issue 09/2015

Plug & Play Cable sets

Accessories MFC 30/31 r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F Cable W1

Cable W2

Cable W3

Cable W5

Cable W10

Cable W11

DIN-rail plug XE1, XE2, XE3

Shield clamps 4mm, 7mm, 8mm

Do you want to save assembly time? Do you want to avoid unnecessary error diagnostic caused by clamp faults? Use our Plug&Play cable sets With these completely ready-for-use cable sets our MFC frequency inverters are ready for operation at your installation rapidly. You can connect DCP3/DCP4 and the parallel interface with your control

system fast and safely. All necessary accessories, such as DIN-rail plugs and shield clamps, are included in our cable sets. Content Cable Sets (Length: 10 meter) Type of interface

Parallel

DCP 03/04

Lisa

8807 308 10 200 8807 308 10 100 8807 308 10 300

Cable W1

Control Voltage

X

X

X

Cable W2

X1a

X

X

X

Cable W3

X1b

X

X

X

Cable W5

DCP

---

X

---

Cable W10

Floor Selection

---

---

X

Cable W11

Brake

---

---

X

DIN-rail plug XE1

10-pin female connector

X

X

X

DIN-rail plug XE2

7-pin female connector

X

X

X

DIN-rail plug XE3

14-pin male connector

X

X

X

shield-clamps

4mm, for Cable W5

---

X

---

shield-clamps

4mm, for Cable W10

---

---

X

shield-clamps

7mm, for Cable W3

X

X

X

shield-clamps

8mm, for Cable W2

X

X

X

www.liftequip.com

101

102

Issue 09/2015

Car Sling

Car Sling TCS The exible one for medium loads g n i l S r a C

TCS25/40/60

www.liftequip.com


104

• Weight mass

105

103

Car Sling

TCS 25/40/60 Product Description g n i l S r a C

Our car sling TCS is designed for safety gear masses m ges up to a maximum of 6500 kg depending on cabin width, operating speed and car sling type.

High Safety

Progressive Safety Gear, upwards

Great Stability Multiple bent sheet steel proles in

the top and bottom beam ensure the required stability. Polyamide-pulleys

Progressive Safety Gear, Down

are used with suspension 2:1. Variable Height Adjustment

Variable Height Adjustment

The side beams consist of 2 sheet

Quick and Easy Assembly

steel proles which are screwed to gether. They are xed at the top and

the bottom beam and a punched grid allows their length to be adjusted in

Optimal Adjustment to Your Lift

steps of 25 mm. Excellent Driving Comfort

The cabin is bedded on compression springs, which are mounted in a spe-

Excellent Driving Comfort

cially isolated U-prole. This results

in an outstanding vibration isolation. Roller guides instead of sliding guides can be supplied on demand.

Great Stability Car Sling TCS 25

Compact Design

With safety gears mounted in the top and the bottom beam compact overall dimensions of the car sling are possible High Safety

The complete car sling as well as its single parts were calculated on the computer with the nite elements

method (FEM). They are therefore veriably safe!

Optimal Adjustment to Your Lift A great variety of conguration

Special Versions

- Load sensor for overload

alternatives make an optimal custo- - Rope pulleys for 2:1 suspension xed misation to many requests possible. in a pulley carrier on the top beam Special versions are shown overleaf. - Rope pulley isolation (SA 9) - Braking system (upwards, SA 10) Colour - Without car isolation for goods lifts The products shown are available in - Buffer plates in addition mouse-grey - RAL 7005 - as stan- Extended governor rope end (SA 1) dard and with zinc coated parts. - Travelling cable mounting (SA 11) - Compensation chain mounting (SA 11)


The true to size production of all parts and a small number of components permit an easy and quick assembly in next to no time.

104

Issue 09/2015

Car Sling

TCS 25/40/60 Weight Mass g n i l S r a C

Car Sling TCS - Gradation in following sizes

TCS 25

TCS 40

TCS 60

Rated load Q [kg]

≤ 1600

≤ 2000

≤ 3200

v [m/s]

≤ 1,6

≤ 2,5

≤ 2,5

mges [kg]

≤ 3000

≤ 5000

≤ 6500

Car width [mm]

900 ÷ 1600 900 ÷ 1900 900 ÷ 2500 2200 up to 2700 in a raster of 25 mm

Car height [mm]

Car Sling TCS 25 Suspension 1:1

Rope attachm. + Hitch plates Suspension 2:1

2 Stk. rope pulley 360 Ø - PA/steel 2 Stk. rope pulley 450 Ø - PA/steel

CW 900

CW 1100

CW 1300

CW 1600

kg kg

156

167

178

195

kg kg kg

150

172

189

40 161

39 / 91 61 / 155

Safety gear, buffer plates, sliding guides, car isolation

kg

79

Braking system SA 10

kg

20

Car Slin g TCS 40 Suspension 1:1


2 Stk. rope pulley 540 Ø - steel 2 Stk. rope pulley 450 Ø - PA/steel

CW 1100

CW 1300

CW 1600

CW 1900

kg kg

253

267

289

311

kg kg kg

241

277

299

60 256

196 61 / 155


kg

144

Braking system SA 10

kg

40

Car Sling TCS 60 Suspension 1:1


2 Stk. rope pulley 540 Ø - steel 2 Stk. rope pulley 450 Ø - PA/steel

CW 1100

CW 1300

CW 1600

CW 1900

kg kg

416

446

491

551

kg kg kg

416

491

551

60 446

196 61 / 155


kg

144

Braking system 10

kg

40

www.liftequip.com

105

106

Issue 09/2015

Counterweight

GTK 700/1050/1370 The variable solution for many installation situations t h g i e w r e t n u o C

GTK 700/1050/1370

www.liftequip.com


108

• Special Versions

109

107

Counterweight

GTK 700/1050/1370 Product Description t h g i e w r e t n u o C

For a counterweight mass of up to 6460 kg in various versions The coun terweight frames calculated for an overall mass up to 6240 kg (special llers). The various n ecessary widths, gauges between rails and suspensions (1:1 and 2:1) are available in the modular system:

High Safety


Governor rope anchorange, top beam

Variable Filling

Optimum adjustment to your installation With the variations in length, width and gauge be tween rails, the counterweight is an optimum t for the most diverse project planning dimensions. In the standard versions, the counterweight frames with rope attachment for 1:1 arrangement or rope pulleys are available for 2:1 arrangement. Besides the standard gauge between rails of 700, 1050 and 1370 mm, other clearance dimensions can be produced as well.

Great Stability

Optimal Adjustment to Your Lift

Counterweight frames GTK

Additional options Various special versions such as sliding and pulley guides, and a safety gear on the counterweight can be selected. For aesthetic purposes, the counterweight can be encased in a glass shaft. Diverse accessories for the mounting of compensation chains and compensating ropes are selectable. The path cover in the pit area in com pliance with

EN81-1, adjusted to the mass of

the counterweight, is available in the program. Variable lling The two lengths for a multilayer lling with max. 30 or 40 levels (a layer is 60 mm) and various ller materials such as Gussolith, steel and lead allow variable adjustment to the dimensions of

Counterweight (CW) GTK - Data table 2:1 Width of CW [mm] GTK 700 GTK 1050 GTK 1050 GTK 1370

135 135 200 270

Total Mass [kg]1

Pulleys [mm]

≤ 1650

360

≤ 2435

360

≤ 3630

450 / 540

≤ 6240

540

the shaft. High level of safety The frame construction of angular sheet metal proles in the top and bottom beams and reinforced knot junctions and their connections were calculated and optimised with the Finite Element Method (FEM), whereby the necessary proofs of solidity were also provided.

Filler materials • Steel • Gussolith • Concrete • Lead

1

Total Mass (ller+frame)

108

Issue 09/2015

Counterweight

GTK 700/1050/1370 Special Versions

Drawing for 2:1

Counterweight Mass

The following approximated values do include the masses of the counterweight frame, the hitch plate or the rope pulley, one or two buffer

t h g i e w r e t n u o C

plates and the sliding guides: GTK 700/135: 159 kg, 1:1 suspension; 187 kg, 2:1 suspension; GTK 1050/135: 184 kg, 1:1 suspension; 211 kg, 2:1 suspension; GTK 1050/200: 210 kg, 1:1 suspension; 287 kg, 2:1 suspension; GTK 1370/270: 374 kg, 1:1 suspension; 422 kg, 2:1 suspension.

Colour

The products shown are available in mousegrey - RAL 7005 - as standard and with zinc coated parts. The variable gauges are: • GTK 700/135: 612 ≤ gauge ≤ 700 mm • GTK 1050/135/200: 701 ≤ gauge ≤ 1050 mm • GTK 1370/270: 1051 ≤ gauge ≤ 1370 mm • Special Versions

• Roller guides • Rope pulleys for 2:1 suspension xed in a pulley carrier on the top beam • Progressive safety gears (type 0, 1 and 2) • Buffer plates additionally • Panelling of counterweight on one or on both sides • Compensation chain or compensation rope mounting

www.liftequip.com

109

110

Issue 09/2015

Safety Gears

Progressive safety/Braking system s r a e G y t e f a S

6071/0 bis /3 • Product description

www.liftequip.com

112

111

Safety Gears

6071/0 bis /3

EN81-

20/ -50

Product Description

-conform

s r a e G The safety device can be deployed y t e as a progressive safety gear or f a braking device. They are 2 iden S tical components but turned in their installation position by 180°, and depending on how they are deployed they have a set braking or gripping force. In everyday language, the safety device is also referred to as a jaw.

Functional description In the event of overspeed, the safety gear rope connected with the grip wedge on the safety gear frame is blocked. The grip wedge is held in place while the elevator car continues to move. A transport roller in the grip wedge draws the grip wedge in the direction opposing the moving direction of the elevator car on a chamfer on the jaw body between the rail and jaw body. In doing so, it expands the spring range of the jaw body. The jamming effect of the jaw body is congured in such a way that the fric tional forces between the grip wedge, counter wedge and rail decelerate the elevator car to a standstill. The jaw is released by moving the elevator car in the opposite direction. Here, the jaw body slips back over the chamfer on the counter wedge until the counter wedge is pressed by the return spring into its initial situation and thus releases the rail.

with rated load at the guide rails and to hold it there (this also applies in the event of failure of the suspension gear). The regulations of EN 81-1:98 are to be adhered to.

• Operating mode (dry, oiled) Distinction by deployment accor ding to the application

Safety device / progressive safety gear (AFV) for safety gear operation downwards. Safety device with function as bra - Progressive safety gears are type king system (ABV) approved safety devices with type On the elevator car, a safety braking approval marking and CE marking device is prescribed that takes effect in accordance with EN 81-1:98. in the upward direction as a protecThe progressive safety gear on the tion device against overspeed for elevator car may only take effect in the elevator car moving upwards. On a downward direction and must be reaching the tripping speed on the able to brake the loaded elevator car speed governor, this must be able to from the tripping speed of the speed brake the empty elevator car at the governor and hold it in place. guide rails. The regulations of EN 81-1:98 are to In country-specic certications you Safety device with function as pro- be adhered to. hesitate to contact us.. gressive safety gear (AFV) On the elevator car and when required on the counterweight, a safety braking system is prescribed that takes effect in the downward direction as a safety device against the risk of falling. On reaching the tripping speed on the speed governor, this must be able to brake the elevator car

112

Distinction by construction size In ascending ord er accordi ng to power output (0, 1, 2, 3), corre sponding to the characteristics:

• Mass of car and load • Speed • Guide rail dimension and surface (drawn, machined)

Issue 09/2015

Safety Gears

6071/0 bis /3 Product Description















It em Desi gnati on

 

 

It em Desi gnati on

1 Jaw body 3 Seal 5 Counter wedge 7 Guide plate 9 Guide bracket 11 Safety gear roller 13 Grip wedge 15 Spacer sleeve 17 Slotted nut 19 Mounting borehole

2 Seal wire 4 Threaded bolts 6 Fork element 8 Stop bolt 10 Flat countersunk nib bolt 12 Limit stop 14 Compression spring 16 Split pin 18 Spring plate 20 Name plate

s r a e G y t e f a S

  



 

  

2

g

h

1 f

Item Designation

1 Rail blade thickness 2 Guide blade width

e

k i m

l

n

Type 0, 1 2 3

a 50 50 60

b 64 64 82

c 31 31 40

d 106 106 132

e ~ 70 70 85

f 81 94 138

g 15 15 20

h 179 179 216

i 13 13 16,5

k Ø 22 22 28

l 4 4 11,5

m 170 170 195

n 192 192 233

Assignment of the safety devices to the rail blade thickness Type 6071/

Rail blade thickness [mm]

Safety gear

0 1 2 3

9 - 16 9 - 16 9 - 19 16 - 35

60 710 59 03 0 60 710 60 03 0 60 710 61 03 0 60 710 62 03 0

www.liftequip.com

Part number Braking System

60 710 63 03 0 60 710 64 03 0 60 710 65 03 0 60 710 66 03 0

113

114

Issue 09/2015

Overspeed Governor

GBTK 6023, 6023F, 6024 and Accessories r o n r e v o G d e e p s r e v O

www.liftequip.com

GBTK 6023

116

GBTK 6023 F

118

GBTK 6024 300S

119

Governor tensioning weight D200/D300

120

115

Overspeed Governor

GBTK 6023

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

r o n Technical data r e v Pulley diameter D mm 300 o G Rated speed vrated m/s 2.5 d e e Tripping speed vT m/s 0.6 - 3.13 p s r e *with test groove diameter 170 mm v O

250* 2.0 0.5 - 2.6

Standard version as shown side on Options: - Remote tripping (blockable rocker with voltage) - Blocking device (blockable rocker without voltage) - Bracket with nal limit switch OFF - Many other functions on request

1

2

3

vN ≤ 2,5 m/s

4

Version by EN 81-20/-50

11

10

5 6

9

7

8

116

1

Cam disc

7

Lever with rubber ring and locking plate

2

Governor pulley

8

Locking position switch

3

Captive-type adjusting screw

9

Limit stop

4

Cast-on lug

10 Latch on rocker

5

Cap spring

11 Non-locking position switch

6

Pulley with rubber ring on rocker

Issue 09/2015

Overspeed Governor

GBTK 6023 in EN81-A3

EN81-

20/ -50

-conform

Inductive sensor for monitoring the plunger position

Magnet 12V 100 % duty cycle

Rocker Blocking device - Blockable rocker without voltage

Safety contact - optional

r o n r e v o G d e e p s r e v O

Safety contact with preswitching and electrical reset - optional

Technical data

vN ≤ 2,5 m/s FHmax= 175 m Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. with EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009-9.11.

Pulley diameter D

mm

300

Rated speed vrated

m/s

≤ 2.5

Tripping speed vT

m/s

0.6 - 3.13

Max. engaging time of magnet

ms

39

Max. total travel

mm

310

GBTK 6023 in EN81-A3 compliant and EX version

EX

Explosion proved

vN= 1,0 m/s

Technical data Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. with EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009-9.11.

The EX evaluation of this component is conducted within the framework of the overall EX evaluation of the installation.

www.liftequip.com

Pulley diameter D

mm

300

Rated speed vrated

m/s

1.0

Tripping speed vT

m/s

1.2 - 1.3

Max. engaging time of magnet

ms

39

Max. total travel

mm

310

117

Overspeed Governor

GBTK 6023 F

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform


Standard version with electrical remote reset - Hardened groove (wear-resistant) - Finish-wired and tested - Connections to system plug connector - Specially developed for MRL installations Options: - Remote tripping (blockable rocker with voltage) - Blocking device (blockable rocker without voltage) - Many other functions on request

Technical data Pulley diameter D

mm

200

Rope diameter d

mm

6.5

Rated speed vrated

m/s

≤ 1.6

Tripping speed vT

m/s

0.7 - 2.09

GBTK 6023 in EN81-A3 compliant version

Inductive sensor for monitoring the plunger position

Magnet 12V 100 % duty cycle

Blocking device Blockable rocker without voltage Rocker Safety contact - optional

Safety switch with preswitching and electrical reset

Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc.

Bracket with integrated nal limit switch OFF

with EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009-9.11.

Max. engaging time of magnet Max. total travel

40 ms 205 mm

Technical details as for above version

118

Issue 09/2015

Overspeed Governor

GBTK 6024 300S

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform


vN = 2,00 - 4,00 m/s

300S: 379 mm

3 0 0 S : 4 8 8

m m

View with encoder mounting, left-hand version

300S: 102 mm

- Left- / right-hand version available - Encoder mounting optional

Technical data Type

300S

Pulley diameter D with 8 mm Drako 300T

mm

304

Axle load FA max

N

12.000

Rated speed vrated

m/s

2,0 - 8,0

Tripping speed vT

m/s

2,35 - 10,5

Braking force FB

N

400 - 2100

11 12

10 9

1 2 3

8 7 6

4

1

Cover for encoder

7

Rope slip-off guard

2

Shaft cover

8

Cam, downwards

3

Connection for encoder

9

Tripping wheel for rope brake

4

Type plate

10

Tripping wheel for pre-switching

5

Electr. connection

11 Cover plate

6

Cam, upwards

12 Governor pulley

5

www.liftequip.com

119

Overspeed Governor

Governor tensioning weight D200 Accessories r o n r e v o G d e e p s r e v O

Technical data Tension force

500 N

Governor rope diameter

6.5 mm

Governor tensioning pulley

D=200/ 6.5-PA

Rated speed vrated

≤ 1.6 m/s

Travel height, TH

≤ 100 m

Type of protection, rope breaking switch Rope engagement point (back of rail) Distance X Guide rail 150 mm 200 mm 250 mm

IP 54 (optional IP67) 40 mm

T70

T89 / T90

T125 / T127

●

---

---

●

●

●

●

●

●

- Galvanised sheet metal design - Mounting in left- and right-hand versions possible → On-site modication possible! - Bracket for mounting the overspeed governor to the guide rail available

120

Issue 09/2015

Overspeed Governor

Governor tensioning weight D300 Accessories Technical data

right

Tension force

648 N / 870 N

Governor rope diameter

6.5 mm / 8.0 mm

Governor tensioning pulley

D=300: 6.5-PA / 8.0-PA

Rated speed vrated

≤ 2.5 m/s

Travel height, TH

≤ 175 m

Type of protection, rope breaking switch

IP 67 or EEx d IIc T6


Rope engagement point (back 40 mm of rail)

150 mm

●

T89 / T90 ---

Distance X 200 mm

●

●

●

---

250 mm Distance X 300 mm with exten- 350 mm sion 400 mm

●

●

●

---

-------

-------

●

●

●

●

●

●

Rail width - Easy to install thanks to individual attached

weight plates

www.liftequip.com

T70

T125 / T127 ---

T140-1 / T140-2 ---

121

122

Issue 09/2015

Buffer

Oil and Spring Buffers r e f f u B

www.liftequip.com

Oil Buffers 01 - 03

124

Oil Buffers 04 - 05

125

Spring Buffers

126

Buffer Uprights

128

123

Buffer

Oil Buffers O1 - O3

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

r e f f u B

124

Issue 09/2015

Buffer

EN81-

20/ -50

Oil Buffers O4 - O5

-conform

r e f f u B

www.liftequip.com

125

Buffer

Spring Buffer

EN81-

20/ -50

-conform

r e f f u B

Spring Buffer Height Travel Buffer hub max. Diameter of Buffer Rated speed max. applied load Permissible total load (P+Q) min.-max.

H h hmax D

v m/s

mm mm mm mm m/s 1,0 0,7 0,63 0,4

Dimensions

P1 120 110 100

126

P2-SA1 220 200 180

140 0,7 kg -500 - 3200

1,0 500- 2600 500 - 2962

mm d d1 d2 L L1

Part No.

P2 210

60 219 02 03 0

--14 215 165 60 219 03 03 0

60 219 08 03 0

Issue 09/2015

Buffer

Spring Buffer

EN81-

20/ -50 -conform

r e f f u B

Spring Buffer Height Travel Buffer hub max. Diameter of Buffer Rated speed max. applied load Permissible total load (P+Q) min.-max.

H h hmax D

v m/s

mm mm mm mm m/s 1,0 0,7 0,63 0,4

Dimensions

100 * 80 A 85

www.liftequip.com

165 * 80 C-SA1 92

100

165 1,0

kg 190 - 1000 190 - 1344 190 - 751 112 - 996 mm

d d1 d2 L L1 Part No.

165 * 80 C 86 80 72

568 - 2534 568 - 3300 520 - 2978 434 - 3958 35 18 18 205 165

6021 000 0572

6021 000 0594

6021 000 0595

127

Buffer Uprights

Buffer Uprights r e f f u B

2 1

128

Part number.

Type

Spring buffer perm. Q+P 2600 kg L

Oil bufer perm. Q+P 3020kg L

d in mm

6010 000 9441

FK

715
315
82.5

6010 000 9440

GG

715
315
82.5

60 100 45 56 0

FK

73
73
76.1

60 100 46 56 0

GG

73
73
76.1

Issue 09/2015

Buffer Uprights

Telescopic Buffer Uprights r e f f u B

Heights Adjustable Range

Steel thickness Part No.

• • •

Telescopic Buffer Upright Buffer Upright 530 Buffer Upright 930 330 mm - 530 mm 570 mm - 930 mm 200 mm (40mm-steps) 360 mm (45mm-steps) 4 mm 4 mm 6010 000 9403 6010 000 9400

maximum load: 2600 kg (each buffer upright)

speeds of up to max. 1 m/s suitable for spring buffer P2 and P1

Mounting advantage The height can be adjusted to the shaft pit

• •

www.liftequip.com

to compensate tolerances to adjust the height when speed has changed

129

130

Issue 09/2015

Guides

Roller Guides and Sliding Guides s e d i u G

www.liftequip.com

Roller Guides ARO D60 / RTK 100

132

Roller Guides RT 18 / RTK 300

133

Roller Guides WRG

134

Sliding Guides I, PUR I, Eco, Ultramid, PUR II

136

Sliding Guides II, Nylon, Aclamid, GG-25I / II

138

Lubricators for Sliding Guides

140

131

Guides

Roller Guides AR ARO D60 / RTK 100 s e d i u G

AR AR0 D60 Roller Guide Counterweight Counterweight (GG)

Roller Guide AR0 D60

RTK 100 Roller Guide Car (FK) & Counterweight Counterweight (GG)

Roller Guide RTK 100

6073078010

60730002940

Speed vn max. -> FK

---

Speed vn max. -> FK

1,75 m/s

Speed vn max. -> GG

2,5 m/s

Speed vn max. -> GG

3,0 m/s

Width of guide blade SKB [mm] Counterweight Force G [kN] [kN]

5 - 16 35

Width of guide blade SKB [mm] Conterweight Force G [kN]

Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N]

132

9 - 16 50 1250 // 1350 500 // 600 Issue 09/2015

Guides

Roller Guides RT 18 / RT RTK K 300 s e d i u G

RT 18 Roller Guide Car (FK)

Roller GuideRT 18

RTK 300 Roller Guide Car (FK)

Roller Guide RTK 300

6073008010

60730002079

Speed vn max. -> FK

3,0 m/s

Speed vn max. -> FK

10 m/s

Speed vn max. -> GG

---

Speed vn max. -> GG

---

Width of guide blade SKB [mm]

16

Width of guide blade SKB [mm]


www.liftequip.com

2500 800

16 // 19 // 28,6

Guiding Force Pstat [N]

3000

Guiding Force Pdyn [N]

depends on spring calibrationg

133

Guides

Roller Guides WRG s e d i u G

WRG 125 125 Roller Guide Car (FK)

134

WRG 150 150 Roller Guide Car (FK) & Counterweight (GG)

Issue 09/2015

Guides

Roller Guides WRG s e d i u G

WRG 200 200 Roller Guide Car (FK)

WRG Roller Guides WRG 80 60730009208

WRG 100 60730009209

WRG 125 60730009210

WRG 150 60730009206

WRG 200 60730009211

Speed vn max. -> FK

---

---

---

3,5 m/s

5,0 m/s

Speed vn max. -> GG

2,5 m/s

3,5 m/s

7,0 m/s

7,0 m/s

---

Width of the guide blade SKB [mm]

9 16

9 16

9 16

16 19

16 19

Counterweight Force G [N]

100

100

100

100

---

Guiding Force Pstat [N]

---

---

---

3000

3000

Guiding Force Pdyn [N]

---

---

---

900

900

A [mm] [mm]

80

100

125

150

200

B [mm]

126

143,5

151

200

250

C [mm]

175

150

150

220

220

D [mm]

200

228

266

300+SKB

555

Dimensions

www.liftequip.com

135

Guides

Sliding Guides I PUR I, Eco s e d i u G Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Eco

Sliding Guide: Counterweight (GG) PUR I

Sliding Guides PUR I Speed vn max. -> FK Speed vn max. -> GG Width of guide blade SKB [mm] Counterweight Force G [kN

136

6073073010 --1,75 m/s 5 20

Sliding Guides Eco Speed vn max. -> FK Speed vn max. -> GG Width of guide blade SKB [mm]


6073 607300 0009 0922 222 2 1,0 m/s --9 1700 600

6073 607300 0009 0920 204 4 1,0 m/s --16 1700 600

Issue 09/2015

Guides

Sliding Guides I Ultramid, PUR II s e d i u G Sliding Guide: Car (FK) & Counterweight (GG) Ultramid

Sliding Guide: Car (FK) PUR II

Sliding Guides Ultramid Speed vn max. -> FK Speed vn max. -> GG Width of guide blade SKB [mm]

Counter Weight Force G [kN]

Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N] www.liftequip.com

6073069010 --3,5 m/s 5 50 -----

6073063010 1,75 m/s 3,5 m/s 9 100 1700 600

Sliding Guides PUR II 6073027010 1,75 m/s --16 --1700 600

Speed vn max. -> FK Speed vn max. -> GG Width of tguide blade SKB [mm]


6073066010 1,75 m/s --16 2000 800

137

Guides

Sliding Guides II Nylon, Aclamid s e d i u G Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Nylon

Sliding Guide Nylon Speed vn max. -> FK Width of guide blade SKB [mm]


6073047010* 2,0 // 2,5 m/s 16 2500 // 2000 1000 // 800

Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Aclamid

Sliding Guide Aclamid 6073046010 2,0 // 2,5 m/s 16 2500 // 2000 1000 // 800

6073068010 Speed vn max. -> FK Width of guide blade SKB [mm]


1,0 // 1,75 m/s 16 6000 // 5000 3000 // 2500

* inkl. Befestigungsteile für Schmierapparat 60 740 04 01 0

138

Issue 09/2015

Guides

Sliding Guides II GG-25I, GG25 II s e d i u G Sliding Guide: Car (FK) GG-25 I

Sliding Guide GG-25 I Speed vn max. -> FK Width of guide blade SKB [mm]


www.liftequip.com

6073214240 0,63 m/s 16 8000 3500

Sliding Guide: Car (FK) GG-25 II

06240

13242

a

205

280

b

250

480

c

200

400

l

280

300

n

92

130

Sliding Guide GG-25 II 6073206240 Speed vn max. -> FK 0,63 m/s Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 Guiding Force Pstat [N] 18000 Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 7000

6073213242 0,63 m/s 28,6 34000 13000

139

Guides

Lubricators for Sliding Guides s e d i u G Lubricator 60740009201 for Sliding Guides PUR I 6073073010 Ultramid 6073069010 Ultramid 6073063010 Ultramid 6073027010 GG-25 II 6073213242

140

Lubricator 6074004010 for Sliding Guides Nylon 6073046010 Nylon 6073047010 GG-25 I 6073214240 GG-25 II 6073206240

Issue 09/2015

Guides

Lubricators for Sliding Guides s e d i u G

Sliding Guide Car With guide shoe HSM 6073208250

Lubricator AK10 6074009010 For sliding guide car

Oil drip receptacle (SKB = 5-16 mm)

60160006205

And Aclathan inserts 6073217240 (9 mm) 6073216240 (16 mm) (Mounting on bottom beam)

OPTIONAL:

Mounting elbow for mounting the lubricator AK10 above/below the car sling 60748902980 (Lubricator AK10 is available for every type of sliding guide)

Sliding Guide 6073208250 (Guide shoe) inkl. insert

Speed vn max. -> FK Speed vn max. -> GG Width of guide blade SKB [mm]

www.liftequip.com

0,5 - 2,0 m/s --5-16

141

142

Issue 09/2015

Rope Pulleys

Rope Pulleys and Accessories s y e l l u P e p o R

www.liftequip.com

Cast iron-/Polyamid-Pulleys

144

Accessories

145

143

Rope Pulleys

Cast iron-/Polyamid-Pulleys Roller bearings s y e l l u P e p o R

• Highest precision and smoothness • Extremely resilient • Extremely attractive price / performance

ratio

D [mm]

Ropes z*Ø RA [mm]

Bp35 [mm] Axle

Bearing Type

Part number

150

7x6

12

110

X

6310 2RS

6072 000 9255

150

10x6

12

145

Y

6310 2RS

6072 000 9229

150

12x6

10

145

Y

6310 2RS

6072 000 9265

2401

12x6

10

132

Z

6310 2RS

6250 000 0057

1

260

6*6,5

11

82

0

6310 2RS

6072 000 7798

3201

8*8

14

130

1

NSK 6310

6072 000 9341

3601

7*8

14

127

1

6310 2RS

60 720 76 42 0

360

7*8

15

118

2

6310 2RS

6072 000 3603

360

7*8

18

140

3

6310 2RS

60 720 54 42 0

2

360

7*8

18

140

3

NJ 310 E

60 720 60 42 0

3

360

z*d

-

140

3

6310 2RS

60 720 71 42 0

3604

z*d

-

140

3

NJ 310 E

60 720 71 42 0

400

4*10

18

90

4

6310 2RS

60 720 67 42 0

4001

8*10

18

163

5

6312 2RS

6072 000 9342

4501

7*10

18

160

5

6312 2RS

6072 000 4885

450

7*10

20

160

5

6312 2RS

6072 000 4884

450

7*10

18

160

5

6312 2RS

60 720 68 42 0

450

7*10

20

160

5

6312 2RS

60 720 55 42 0

450

7*10

20

160

5

NJ 312 E

60 720 62 42 0

450

8*10

18

160

5

6312 2RS

60 720 58 42 0

4503

z*d

-

160

5

6312 2RS

60 720 72 42 0

450

z*d

-

160

5

NJ 312 E

60 720 72 42 0

540

7*8

18

160

6

6216 2RSR

60 720 69 42 0

540

7*13

20,5

160

6

6216 2RSR

60 720 65 42 0

540

7*13

20,5

160

6

NJ 216 E

60 720 44 42 0

5403

z*d

-

160

6

6216 2RSR

60 720 73 42 0

4

540

z*d

-

160

6

NJ 216 E

60 720 73 42 0

540

8*13

20,5

190

7

6216 2RSR

60 720 66 42 0

5402

1

2

4

2

8*13

20,5

190

7

NJ 216 E

60 720 59 42 0

3

540

z*d

-

190

7

6216 2RSR

60 720 73 42 0

5404

z*d

-

190

7

NJ 216 E

60 720 73 42 0

6404

z*d

-

240

8

NJ 2218

6072 000 0984

4

z*d

-

240

9

NJ 224

6072 000 0976

740

Specialty: 1Polyamide-pulley, 2High load, 3Variabele*, 4Variabele* and High load, 5Overall width of rope pulley, incl. bearing *Variabele with grooves (z), groove diameter (d), groove distance (RA) .

144

Issue 09/2015

Rope Pulleys

Accessories s y e l l u P e p o R Axles for Rope Pul leys

Axle1

Length

Part number

X

147 mm

6072 000 9240

Y

182 mm

6072 000 9234

Z

200 mm

6250 000 0058

0

111 mm

6072 000 8541

166 mm

60 723 53 32 0

2

135 mm

6072 000 3604

3.0

190 mm

60 723 34 32 0

3.1

240 mm

60 723 50 32 0

4

132 mm

60 723 37 32 0

216 mm

60 723 35 32 0

240 mm

60 723 51 32 0

230 mm

60 723 47 32 0

260 mm

60 723 32 32 0

1

5 6 7

Ø-Axle

50 mm

60 mm 80 mm

8

90 mm

305 mm

6072 000 0981

9

120 mm

310 mm

6072 000 0980

1)

relevant axle-numers see page before

Axle Brackes

For Rope Pulley Ø 240 mm

Part number 40x3x65

6250 000 0059

Ø 360 mm

00 981 03 61 0

Ø 400 mm

00 981 03 61 0

Ø 450 mm

00 981 03 61 0

Ø 540 mm

00 981 04 61 0

Ø 640 mm

00 981 04 61 0

Ø 740 mm

00 981 05 61 0

Pedestal Bearing for Deection Pulley Fixed on Concrete Foundation (including axle)

For Axle

Part number

3

61 720 07 25 0

5

61 720 08 25 0

6

60 720 64 25 2

8

60 720 65 25 2

www.liftequip.com

145

146

Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A s r o o D

www.liftequip.com

Product Benefts

148

General Notes

149

Landing Door S8A

150

Car Door K8A

151

Project planning

152

Steel sheet/stainless steel doors - surfaces

154

Steel sheet/stainless steel doors - fre protection

155

Glass Doors

156

Door Sills

158

Door safety lock system

159

F9 Door Drive

160

Technical Information

161

Special versions

162

Structure of the landing door

164

Layout of the car door

165


167

147

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A

EN81-

20/ -50

Product Benets

-conform

s r o o D Design

Flexibility

Very wide and nely graded range of

Panelling in numerous surface designs, glass door panels, aluminium and stainless-steel door sills and surrounding invisible sill guides enable individual adaptation to the design requirements in the building



Safety  Compliance with currently valid EU standards EN 81-1/2 and national safety regulations  High-quality door safety lock systems and short door reversal times for the safety of passengers and to protect the technology against damage



Efciency  Time-saving installation resulting from clever, installation-friendly mounting solutions for short downtimes  Short door opening and closing times reduce waiting periods and increase the handling capacity of the installation

Innovation  Optimum utilisation of space and short









options for door dimensions, with door widths from 700 to 2500 mm and door heights from 2000 to 2500 mm One-side opening, double-panel telescopic door (M2T) for optimum door width in a narrow shaft Centre-opening, double-panel door (M2Z) for short door running times and high handling capacity Centre-opening, four-panel telescopic door (M4TZ) for maximum door widths with good utilisation of space Comprehensive range of options and special versions for individual adaptation

oor-to-oor distances possible as a



result of compact design of the door header Stable, single-leaf landing door panels in sandwich design with low weight and without weld seams

S8A M2Z, stainless steel, leather surface

Comfort  

Low noise of ≤ 55 dB(A), measured one metre in front of the landing door Excellent smooth running properties and isolation from structure-borne sound as a result of mounts protected from vibration

on the elevator car (SA 79) 

Harmonious and smooth door movements as a result of frequency-controlled door drive with adjustable running characteristic curves

Reliability  Safe and robust mechanical construction with powerful door drive  Long service life as a result of the exclusive deployment of proven and tested materials and components  Ensuring a rapid and long lasting spare parts availability

Scope of Supply  Doors complete with required fastening material, basic body of the door

sill, guide rail prole of the door sill and 

toeguards Rasterising of the door height and door widths in increments of 50 mm possible (SA 20);

S8A M2T, glass door with frame, stainless steel grain 220

with door type M4TZ with DW ≥ 1400 mm in increments of 100 mm

SA – special version

148

Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A General Notes s r o o D Range of application

Fire protection safety standards

The S8A / K8A comfort elevator doors are used in passenger and freight elevators with high standards with regard to quiet running, handling capacity and comfort.

The landing doors are re-tested in line with DIN EN 81-58 with regard to re resis-

Door type M2T, opening to the left

Door type M2T, opening to the right

The 2-panel, side-opening telescopic sliding door (M2T) is used mainly in passenger elevators to achieve a door width that is as large as possible in relation to the shaft width.

The 4-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door (M4TZ) is mainly used in passenger and freight elevators with a high handling capacity and large door widths with small shaft dimensions.

Door type M4TZ, centre-opening

Mounting of the suspension gear with wall plugs

the majority of export markets if re protection safety standards are required for the landing doors. DIN EN 81-58 is included in building regulations list A, part 1 of the German Institute for Building Technology. This means that

the landing doors with this re resistance test can be deployed in Germany.

The 2-panel, centre-opening sliding door (M2Z) is conceived for passenger elevators with a short door running time and high handling capacity. Door type M2Z, centre-opening

tance. This means the door can be used in

Planning recommendation Elevators should be planned in such a way that they can also be used without difculty by elderly and disabled persons. The minimum dimensions for elevator doors stipulated in the standard DIN 18040 (formerly DIN 18024/18025) for barrier-free construction are 900 mm door width and 2000 mm door height. In the case of modernisation measures, these minimum dimensions should be complied with, circumstances in the building permitting.





The S8A landing doors in the corresponding special version (SA) also comply with

other re protection requirements such as BS476 (GB) and GOST (RU-UKR). The S8A glass doors are not available with

a re protection safety standard and are therefore not suitable for the partitioning of

re-protected zones.

Compliance with special requirements The comprehensive range of options

(SA – special versions) means the door is suitable for deployment with special requirements consisting of special standards and regulations, for example in accordance with  EN 81-70 Accessibility of elevators for persons, including disabled persons  DIN EN 81-71 Protective measures against wilful destruction (vandalism), categories 0 or 1 only after consultation  DIN EN 81-72 Fire service elevators Noise The noise characteristics of the door depend on the door dimensions, door panelling, installation conditions and door running times. At a distance of 1 metre to the landing door, an airborne noise level of

≤ 55 dB(A) can be assumed. SA – special version

Mounting of the base door sill support

Securing bracket with large adjustable ranges anchor rails  with wall plug xture (SA 38)

 for

www.liftequip.com

149

Comfort Door

S8A Landing Door s r o o D Door panels

The door panels are single-leaf, manufactured using noise-inhibiting sandwich design and offer outstanding corrosion protection. The basic body consists of 2 mm galvanised steel plate and is either laminated with 0.6 mm galvanised steel plate or with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate. Powder coating of the galvanised version is also possible. The lower door panel guide in the door sill for each door panel consists of two adjust-

able sliders. Rubber buffers are tted to the closing edge to buffer impacts and reduce noise. In the case of landing doors that lead out-doors, we recommend the use of door panels clad with stainless steel.

In the case of re resistant doors with heat insulation criterion, the door panels are

lled with an additional technical heat insulation.

Door frame

The door frame comprises:  the upper suspension gear made of folded 2.5 mm galvanised steel plate;  the side door posts made of folded 1.5 mm galvanised steel plate;  and the lower door sill made of folded 2 mm galvanised steel plate with bolted-

on aluminium or stainless steel prole S8A M2Z, hook lock with contacts

Suspension gear with stable,

proled guide rail

Flooring

The customer-tted ooring can be laid directly up to the outer door panel facing the hallway. Even more elegance is created with the door sill with surrounding guide of the

door panels (SA 18): the ooring can be laid up to the shaft edge. The same possibility applies to the car door (SA 18). Precisely adjustable gap of the door panels to one another

150

150

Sill with encompassing guide (SA 18)

Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door

K8A Car Door s r o o D Door panels

The structure of the door panels with the door panel guides corresponds to the highquality technical designs described for the landing door. In the case of elevator car doors, on the other hand, no door panels

with re protection safety standards and heat insulation are deployed. Door drive The door drive that is used is a highqality, gearless and frequency-controlled asynchronous motor with integrate control device. The power transmission to the door panels is low-noise by means of a belt drive that is highly resistant to wear. The machine is very compact and does not protrude beyond the projection area of the suspension gear. It is mounted on the suspension gear of the car door and protected from vibration.

Door mounting

The sheet metal casing of the suspension gear of the car door is bolted directly onto the car roof using brackets. Mounting that is protected from vibration is available as

an option (SA 79). The elevator car can be up to 300 mm higher than the door height (optionally up to 500 mm, SA 40). The car door portal is not included in the scope of delivery of the car door. The landing doors are coupled by means of a widening cam fastened to the car door. This is operated and moved by the toothed belt of the machine. The type of protection for the entire door is IP20. An IP54 version is available as an option (SA 13). Mounting of the suspension gear on the elevator car Non-insulated mounting using a number of brackets directly with the car roof.


Insulated mounting (SA 79) with rubber insulation to reduce the transmission of vibrations to the car roof.

www.liftequip.com

151

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Project Planning s r o o D Door type M2T (2-panel, one-sided telescopic opening) 68 (150 with SA 27)

≥ 30 + CDT BT

CDT ≥ 30 + BT

TB ++ 25 1,5 x DW 25 (1,5 x DW + 45 for SA 18)

DH 0 4 1 5 2 1

DW

2000 2100

5 9 2

2200 2300

T T D B C

700 - 750

800 - 850

900 - 1400

• • •

• • • • •

• • • • • •

2400 2500

DW TB

125

DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.

125

TB ++ 50 1,5 x DW 20

Door type M2Z (2-panel, centre-opening)

22xxDW TB + + 50 50

30++CDT BT ≥≥30

≥ 30 + CDT BT

DH 0 2 1 5 8

DW

2000

5 3 2

2100 2200

T T D B C

2300

700 - 750

800 - 850

900 - 1400

• • •

• • • • •

• • • • • •

2400

DW TB

125

2500

125


22xxDW TB + + 100 100

Door type M4TZ (4-panel, telescopic centre-opening)

≥ ≥3030 + CDT + BT

1,5 xx DW TB + 1,5 + 50 50 (1,5 x DW + 70 with DW < 900 mm)

≥ 30 + BT CDT

DH 0 4 1 5 2 1

5 9 2

DW TB

1,5 + 100 1,5 xx DW TB +

125

2000 2100 2200

T T B D C

125

DW

2300 2400

800 - 950 1000 - 11501200 - 13501400 - 15001800 - 2500

• •

• • •

• • • •

2500

• • • • •

DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 up to DW ≤ 1400 mm.

• • • • • •

All mass in mm; DH – door height, DW – door width; CDT – construction dimension tolerance / deection from plumb (± 25 mm); SA – special version

152

152

Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Project Planning s r o o D Installation options for the landing doors Detail A (M2T/M4TZ)

Detail A (M2Z) 85

FFL

FFL

UFL

125 ≤6 ≤6

UFL

(SA 19)

FFL

0 9 5 + H D = . n i m

6

0 0 1 0 0 3

) 2 1 A S r o f 0 5 4 + H D =

0 9 5 + H D = . n i m

. n i m

H W H H T S W D T S (

) 2 1 A S r o f 0 5 4 + H D =

36

40 x 40

40 x 40 (SA 19)

SD

0 0 1

Door architrave Türzarge

40 36 34

Door architrave

SD

≤6 40

0 9 1

FFL OFF

6

2 7

2 7

Sill prole

Schwellenprofil Sill prole

Basic body

Grundkörper Basic body

M16

Mounting bracket

M16

Mounting bracket Befestigungswinkel Toeguard Schürze

Toeguard

Detail B (M2Z)

Detail B (M2T/M4TZ)

. n i m

H W H H T S W D T S (

Door architrave

40

85

≤6

125 ≤6 ≤6 Door architrave Türzarge

36 34

40

36

40 x 40 40 x 40 (SA 19)

(SA 19)

FFL

FFL OFF

6

2 7 0 9

2 7 0 9 0 9 1

Recess

Sill prole

0 9 1

Nische

Sill prole Schwellenprofil Basic body Grundkörper

Basic body 0 9

6

M16

Mounting bracket Toeguard

M16

Befestigungswinkel Mounting bracket Toeguard Schürze

B

A

Recess

Installation in the shaft

Installation in recess / in the landing

The landing doors are fastened to the shaft wall by means of brackets. The brackets are secured to the wall optionally with wall plugs or with securing bolts on anchor rails (measurement in concrete in line with CEN/

In the interest of economical utilisation of space, the landing door can be installed in a recess. Recesses with greater depth are possible as an option (SA 60).

TS 1992-4:2009) that are cast into the

the table below.

If your requirements or wishes go beyond the range of options described, please contact our experienced sales team.

The different recess depths are specied in

shaft wall or welded onto a shaft scaffold.

Recess depth Door type

M2T S8A

Without recess

With recess

With deep recess

SA 11

Standard

SA 60

0 mm

55 mm

100 mm

M2Z S8A

0 mm

20 mm

60 mm

M4TZ S8A

0 mm

55 mm

100 mm

All mass in mm; DH – door height; STWH – oor height; SD – shaft depth; UFL – unnished oor level; FFL – nished oor level; SA – special version

www.liftequip.com

153

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Steel sheet / stainless steel doors – surfaces s r o o D Door panels Surface versions

The door panels of the landing and elevator car doors consist of 2 mm galvanised steel plate and are clad either with 0.6 mm galvanised steel plate or with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate. For the galvanised version, an additional powder coating is also possible. The same applies to the surface versions for the door frames and front walls of the elevator shaft. Standard version

Door panel, front / visible side

Door panel, back

Standard version

Stainless steel

Electrolytically galvanised steel plate surfaces for painting on site.

Electrolytically galvanised steel surface

Painting Different types of painting are possible with a high-quality powder coating method (60 µm):  Basic colour shade Mouse Grey RAL 7005 / powder coating 

Painting

Linen / stainless steel

Trafc White RAL 9016 / powder coating



White Aluminium RAL 9006 /



powder coating Colour RAL / powder coating

Leather / stainless steel

Mouse Grey RAL 9016 / powder coating

Rhombus / stainless steel, ferritic or austenitic, only available for landing door


Stainless steel Panelling with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate:  Leather / stainless steel  Linen / stainless steel  Rhombus / stainless steel, ferritic or austenitic, only available for landing door  Grain 220 / stainless steel, ferritic  Grain 220 / stainless steel, austenitic

Other versions available on request. 154

154

White Aluminium RAL 9006 /

Grain 220 / stainless steel, ferritic

powder coating

Colour RAL / powder coating

Grain 220 / stainless steel, austenitic

Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Steel sheet / stainless steel doors – re protection s r o o D Doors with re protection safety standards

The standard versions of the landing doors comply with the requirements of the type approval in accordance with EN 81-1/2. In addition to this, other criteria in line with

in part country-specic guidelines and regulations such as EN 81-58, BS 476 and

GOST apply to the special re protection versions. Door panel with re protection safety standards (back)

M2T

Fire protection classications for S8A landing door

E120

EN 81-58

Standard

EW30

EN 81-58

SA 104

EW60

EN 81-58

SA 105

EI60

EN 81-58

EI120

EN 81-58

EI120

GOST (RU and UKR)

2h-Integrity

E30

BS 476

GOST (only RU)

SA 106

SA 109

M2Z

M4TZ

DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm

DW 800 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm

galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel


DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm

DW 800 – 2000 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm



DW 700 – 1100 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm

DW 800 – 1100 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm

panelled with stainless steel

panelled with stainless steel

DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm

DW 800 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm

DW 800 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm




-

SA 101

SA 100

SA 100

DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel

-

DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm

DW 1400 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm



DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm

DW 800 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm



DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel

-

Not all combinations of door height / door width are available; d etails on request.


www.liftequip.com

155

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Glass Doors s r o o D Glass door panels

The S8A / K8A comfort glass door panels are designed with a surrounding door panel frame on all sides at a width of 50 mm.

Fully glazed door panels are also available on request (SA 41). The glass door panel frames have a basic

coating and can be given any surface nish which is available for sheet metal door pan-

els. The glass panes are tted ush with the door panel frame. The glass panes are made of composite safety glass (TVG and VSG-V) and are transparent. The gap between the glass door panel and door post or portal is limited to a maximum of 4 mm to safeguard against the danger of children's hands being drawn in.

Glass door panels with f rame (SA 31)

Fully glazed door panels (SA 41)

In the case of the centre-opening doors (M2Z, M4TZ), the closing edge is optionally designed as a 25-mm-wide frame (SA 33), so that the closed door visually has a frame width of 50 mm at the closing edge. The other three sides of the frame have also a width of 50 mm, giving the door an even more elegant appearance. In the case of glass doors, we recommend for reasons of visual appearance that the light grid be mounted as stationary on the car door at the end of the running rail and

Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side, optional

Panelling of the suspension gear on th e shaft side, optional

at the end of the guide rail prole. On glass door panels, the cam elbows of the widening cam of the elevator car door protrude into the visible area. If this is not visible, a shortened version of the widening cam (SA 30) can be selected. On this version, however, levelling with opening doors is not possible.


156

Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Glass Doors s r o o D Glass door panels with available dimensions Door width

Door width

50 0 5

100

t h g i e h r o o D

50

m m 6

Closing edge

0 5

Frame glass door panels (SA 31)

DH [mm]

DW [mm]

2000

700 - 1200

2100

700 - 1200

2200

700 - 1100

2300

700 - 1050

t h g i e h r o o D

Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)

0 5


m m 6

DH [mm]

DW [mm]

2000

700 - 1200

2100

700 - 1200


Closing edge

0 5

Door type M2T (2-panel, one-sided telescopic opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)

Door width

Door width

50 0 5

2x25 2x50

t h g i e h r o o D

1)

m m 6

2)

Closing edge

0 5


DH [mm]

DW [mm]

2000

700 - 1200

2100

700 - 1200

2200

700 - 1100

2300

700 - 1050

t h g i e h r o o D


m m 6

DW [mm]

2000

700 - 1200

2100

700 - 1200



Closing edge

0 5

DH [mm]

0 5

Door type M2Z (2-panel, centre-opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)

Door width

Door width 0 5


50 0 5

100

2x25 2x50

t h g i e h r o o D

1)

m m 6

2)

DH [mm]

DW [mm]

2000

1300 - 2200

2100

1300 - 2200

2200

1300 - 2200

2300

1300 - 2100

t h g i e h r o o D m m 6

DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm. Foe door sill without visible guide

Door type M4TZ

0 5

DH [mm]

DW [mm]

2000

1400 - 2200

2100

1400 - 2200


(SA 18) as of DW ≥ 1400 mm.

Closing edge


Closing edge

0 5

(4-panel, telescopic centre-opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)

1) For glass door panels (SA 31), combined with narrow frame (SA 33). 2) For glass door panels (SA 31). Edge protection with width 15 mm available as an option for solid glass doors (SA 47).

SA – special version. All specied dimensions in mm.

www.liftequip.com

157

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Door Sills s r o o D Door sills

The basic body of the shaft door sill is made of angled steel plate. As default, sill proles made of aluminium with permit ted wheel loads of 280 kg are mounted. Alongside these, stainless steel door sills for 500 kg (SA 15) and 1500 kg (SA 16) wheel loads are also available.

Aluminium door sill for permitted wheel loads up to 280 kg as standard version

Stainless steel door sill for permitted wheel loads up to 500 kg,

Stainless steel door sill (only for M4TZ) for permitted wheel loads up to 1,500 kg,

Door sill with surrounding guide

solid stainless steel prole (SA 16)

(SA 18);

proled stainless steel guide (SA 15)

Wheel load QRL on the door still Distance between wheels a

Door width DW

Door sill

Aluminium (standard) Stainless steel (SA 15)

Max. wheel load

Max. overall sill load

QRL

a < 400 mm a ≥ 400 mm

280 kg

280 kg

560 kg

500 kg

500 kg

1000 kg

Stainless steel (SA 16)

1500 kg

1500 kg

3000 kg

Surrounding guide (SA 18)

500 kg

optionally with at stainless steel prole (SA 17)

500 kg

DW – door width, QRL – wheel load, a – distance between wheels.

158

the ooring can be laid up to the shaft edge

1000 kg


Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Door Safety Lock System s r o o D Door safety lock systems The doors can be equipped with different, opto-electronic systems for door safety: - Standard light grid - High-resolution light grid (SA 26) - High-resolution 3D light grid with motion detection system (SA 45) - Motion detection system (SA 25) The systems are always equipped with the electronic evaluation system required in each case.

The standard light grid is a no-contact opto-electronic door safety system. Transmitter and receiver units are integrated in the door panels. Between the two, a light grid is created up to a height of 180 cm; this has 18 parallel and 84 crossed light beams. Interrupting one or more of the light beams triggers reversing of the door drive. The device works with invisible alternating light in the infrared range. Standard light grid

High-resolution light grid (SA 26)

A high-resolution light grid (SA 26) with particularly high protective effect is available

as an option: 40 parallel and 194 crossed beams up to a height of 180 cm guarantee the highest sensitivity (suitable for installations in accordance with EN 81-70). Even more comfort is provided by a highresolution light grid with integrated motion detection system (SA 45). The closing operation of the door then reversed when persons or objects approach the door. This light grid cannot be used for glass doors. Monitoring ranges of the high-resolution light grid with integrated motion detection system (SA 45)

In addition, a facility for monitoring the area in front of the door with body heat detection can be installed in the car door portal (SA 25). Only rapid changes in temperature are detected, which means that changes in the ambient temperature or

stationary persons have no inuence on the system.

SA – special version High-resolution light grid with integrated motion detection system (SA 45)

www.liftequip.com

Monitoring range of the motion detection system (SA 25)

159

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A F9 Door Drive s r o o D F9 door drive

The F9 door drive is a compact unit consisting of a gearless, frequency-controlled asynchronous motor with integrate control device. It is mounted vertically and protected from vibration on the suspension

gear of the car door. A horizontal arrangement is possible as an option. A high-resolution encoder supplies the drive with all the necessary information with regard to position and speed of the door panels at all times. This means that no limit switches are required to detect the door position. The power transmission to the door panels is linear and low-noise by means of a belt drive that is highly resistant to wear. The door panels of the landing door are moved by a widening cam without play.

Technical description  Motor: six-pole asynchronous motor  Control device: integrate frequency

Additional features / functions  Automatic commissioning as well as and functional test, including automatic learning of door mass, closing force limitation of 150 N, limitation of kinetic energy, door width, opening direction, running characteristic curve generation for door movement.  Approaching a detected obstacle: if the door strikes an obstacle on closing that was not detected by the light grid (e.g. due to a stone in the door sill), it is reopened. The previously determined rise in force causes the door drive to decelerate in the next closing operation even before the position of the obstacle. Conse-

inverter, clock frequency 16 kHz, V/f

quently, there is a signicant reduction in



characteristic Type of protection: IP54 EMC: in accordance with EN 12015/16 Interfaces: 24 V logic level, potential separation, programmable special output Parameterisation: via PC Diagnosis: event stack



Connection voltage: 230 V, 50/60 Hz



Ambient conditions

the levelling speed. If no other obstacle is detected, the door drive accelerates again to normal speed after reopening to the position of the obstacle. Partial opening: after reopening, the opening width of the door can be reduced if desired. The door drive has an event stack that stores errors and warnings in nonvolatile form with date and time. Other activation options, see operating manual.

Automatic commissioning takes place via a convenient teach-in function. At high ambient temperatures, the motor and control device can be placed in separate units (on request).

   

– 10 °C to + 50 °C  Dimensions: (as of ange area) W x H x D = 260 x 200 x 115 mm

160







Running characteristic curve setting / parameterisation  The control system electronics calculate the running characteristic curve depending on the path travelled.  The running characteristic curve con-

tains a special prole for operation of the 

door cam by the door drive. All the parameters of the running characteristic curve for opening, closing,

nudging and reopening can be dened 

independently. Learning the maximum possible closing force (moment teach-in). Running characteristic curves (over time t) 1

1 6

2

6

2

5 3

5

3

4

4

on opening 

on closing

Maximum speed v

 Deceleration  Approach

speed Widening cam operation (can be deactivated)  Widening cam speed  Acceleration 

Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Technical Information s r o o D Technical details M2T

M2Z

M4TZ

S8A landing door / K8A car door Permitted dimensions for steel plate doors 1)

Door width

DW

[mm]

Door height

DH

[mm]

700 – 1400 / 100 mm grid

800 – 2500 / 100 mm grid

2000 – 2500 / 100 mm grid

Materials for steel plate doors

Suspension gear

Steel plate 2.5 mm, galvanised

Door posts

Steel plate 1.5 mm, galvanised

Door sill

Door panels

Basic body:

folded steel plate 2.0 mm, galvanised

Guide rail prole:

made of aluminium or stainless steel (SA), bolted on

Structure:

single-leaf, manufactured using noise-inhibiting sandwich design

Basic body:

folded steel plate 2.0 mm, galvanised

Panelling:

steel plate 0.6 mm, galvanised or stainless steel plate 0.8 mm or steel plate 0.6 mm, galvanised with powder coating

K8A car door (technical details for selected combinations of door width x door height)

Door width x door height DW x DH

[mm]

Door running time s2)

t open / t close

[s]

galv./stainl. steel/glass

[kg]

Weight (with DH 2100)

3)

700 x 2000 - 2200

700 x 2000 - 2200

800 x 2000 - 2100

2.00 / 2.50

1.70 / 2.20

107 / 111 / 180

106 / 110 / 176

1.90 / 2.40 134 / 139 / -

Step-on area

2

[m ]

0.056

0.056

0.064


[mm]

800 x 2000 - 2400

800 x 2000 - 2400

900 x 2000 - 2100


t open / t close

[s]

2.30 / 2.80

1.80 / 2.30


[kg]

117 / 122 / 193

116 / 121 / 191

1.90 / 2.40 143 / 149 / -

[m2]

0.064

0.064

0.072


[mm]

900 x 2000 - 2500

900 x 2000 - 2500

1100 x 2000 - 2200

Door running time s

t open / t close

[s]

2.60 / 3.10

1.90 / 2.40

2.00 / 2.50


[kg]

127 / 132 / 207

125 / 131 / 205

163 / 170 / -

[m2]

0.072

0.072

0.088


[mm]

1000 x 2000 - 2500

1000 x 2000 - 2500

1200 x 2000 - 2300


t open / t close

[s]

2.80 / 3.30

2.00 / 2.50

2.00 / 2.50


[kg]

138 / 144 / 240

137 / 143 / 222

174 / 181 / -

2

[m ]

0.080

0.080

0.096


[mm]

1100 x 2000 - 2500

1100 x 2000 - 2500

1400 x 2000 - 2400

Door running time s

t open / t close

[s]

3.10 / 3.60

2.20 / 2.70

2.20 / 2.70


[kg]

148 / 155 / 254

147 / 154 / 237

194 / 202 / 304

[m2]

0.088

0.088

0.112

[mm]

1200 x 2000 - 2500

1200 x 2000 - 2500

1800 x 2000 - 2500

3.30 / 3.90

2.50 / 3.00

2.60 / 3.10

158 / 165 / 268

157 / 164 / 252

233 / 244 / 398


3)

Step-on area 2)


3)

Step-on area


3)

Step-on area 2)


3)

Step-on area Door width x door height DW x DH Door running time s

2)


3)

t open / t close

[s]


[kg]

Step-on area

2

[m ]

0.096

0.096

0.144


[mm]

1400 x 2000 - 2500

1400 x 2000 - 2500

2500 x 2000 - 2500


t open / t close

[s]

3.90 / 4.50

3.00 / 3.50

3.80 / 4.30


[kg]

178 / 186 / -

177 / 185 / -

304 / 318 / -

[m2]

0.112

0.112

0.200


3)

Step-on area 1)

Available combinations of door width / door height, see page 6. Available combinations of door width / door height for landing doors with re protection safety standard, see page 9.

Available combinations of door width / door height for glass doors, see page 10. Door dimensions (DW and DH) optional (SA 20) in the 50 mm grid, available as option with door type M4TZ up to DW 1400 mm. For door types M2T and M2Z, operating and indicator elements are only possible in the door frame up to DW 1300 mm. 2) The opening and closing speeds can be adjusted separately from each other. The specied values are the default settings where the noise development is ≤ 55 dB(A) and the door has very good running proper-ties. 3) Weight determination of car door with the following equipment: galvanised = door panels covered with 0.6 mm galvanised steel sheet, without special equipment; stainless steel = door panels

covered with 0.8 mm stainless steel, without special equipment; glass = glass door panels (SA 31 / frame door panels with 0.8 mm stainless steel panelling or SA 41 / fully glazed door panels), with special version 79 / insulated suspension gear mounting and insulated supports). SA – special version

www.liftequip.com

161

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Special Versions s r o o D Special versions Special versions SA 4 SA 5 SA 6 SA 7 SA 8 SA 11 SA 12 SA 13 SA 14 SA 15 SA 16 SA 17 SA 18 SA 19 SA 20 SA 21

S8A landing door

K8A car door

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

-

Display "No Entry" complying with DIN EN 81-73

-

Round opening (l 35.6 mm) for indicator elements

-

Round opening (l 35.6 mm) for control elements

-

Square opening ( Y 36.8 mm) for control elements; key switch not possible with M2Z and M4TZ

-

Square opening ( Y 36.8 mm) for indicator elements

-

Door installed in shaft without recess

-

Low height between oors STWH up to min. DH + 450 mm

•

Type of protection IP 54 (example of use: for door leading outdoor)

-

EX version (ATEX), explosion-proof version

• • • •

Stainless steel sill prole, proled, permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 500 kg

-

Prole between the door posts; material: aluminium or stainless steel

• • • • • • • •

Door dimensions in the 50 mm grid for door width (DW) and door height (DH), on M4TZ only up to DW ≤ 1400 mm

-

Mounting in the shaft scaf fold with M 16 screw, without anchor rails and without wall plugs

•

Glass door panels with door panel frame width at the closing edge of 25 mm, available for M2Z and M4TZ

-

Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side and door posts

-

Gap cover for plastering

-

Rubber strip at closing edge

-

Wall plug xture

• • •

Halogen-free cables for landing and elevator car door

-

Widened toeguard, up to outer edge of the suspension gear (suspension gear width)

-

Panelling for the entire suspension gear sheet metal casing, for glass shaft

• • •

S8A: delivery device, special toeguard of bottom landing door; K8A: folding toe guard

-

Widened toeguard up to outer edge of the door posts (width of door post)

-

Monitoring of emergency unlocking, locking, only with M2T

-

Type of protection IP x3 / re service elevator

-

Additional lock for second, faster door panel on M2Z and M4TZ

•

Vision panel in acc. with sample high-rise guideline and EN 81-1, no re protection with EN 81-58 included

SA 24

-

SA 25

-

SA 26

-

SA 27

•

SA 30

-

SA 31

• • • • • • • •

SA 32 SA 33 SA 34 SA 35 SA 37 SA 38 SA 39 SA 40

-

SA 41

• • • •

SA 42 SA 43 SA 44 SA 45

-

SA 47

• • • • • •

SA 49 SA 51 SA 52 SA 53 SA 54

Description

Stainless steel sill prole, solid, permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 1,500 kg, door sill cast in, only available for M4TZ Stainless steel prole for SA 18, if ooring us not to go all the way to the sill edge Door sill with surrounding guide of door panels, oor covering thickness up to 40 mm

Sill heating only in conjunction with door sill SA 18

Intermediate prole for control panel in the recess, only available with insulated mounting (SA 79) Motion detection system with infrared sensor, deployment in addition t o a light grid, installation in the c ar door portal High-resolution light grid with 40 parallel / 194 crossed beams, up to 1800 mm height, suitable for installation in acc. with EN 81-70

Mechanical car door lock complying with DIN EN 81-1/2, if distance between shaft wall and car door sill > 150 mm Short widening cam for panoramic elevators, cam base plate / c am bracket not visible, levelling with opening doors not possible

Glass door panels with surrounding door panel frame width of 50 mm, ush-tted glass panel, stationary mounting of light grid

Mount for 300 mm < (car height – door height) ≤ 500 mm Fully glazed door panels

High-resolution 3D light grid (height up to 1800 mm) with integrate motion detection system (door width u p to 1900 mm) Protection of closing edge for solid glass doors, U-prole made of stainless steel

For technical reasons, not all special versions can be combined with one another, details on request.

162

Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Special Versions s r o o D Special versions Special versions

S8A landing door

K8A car door

• • • • • • • • • •

•

Double-leaf door panels

-

Labyrinth at the closing edge, only in conjunction with SA 5 5 and only for M2Z and M4TZ

-

Recess in the door post for cover plate, not for M2Z with front wall of the elevator shaft

-

Deep recess of 100 mm (M2T, M4TZ) or 60 mm (M2Z), for aluminium door sill with permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 280 kg

-

Additional switch mounting for monitoring, protection type IP20

-

Version without shaft door toeguard; a clamping bracket is used instead

-

Cam mounting for SA 27 in conjunction with an elevator car door of another generation

-

Door suitable for instal. complying with DIN EN 81-71, (available from conversion to DIN EN 81-20/-50)

-

Hook lock with weight (version for example for China), available for M4TZ as of DW ≥ 1400 mm

-

Monitoring of emergency unlocking, scanning, only with M2T

SA 79

-

•

Insulated car installation, suspension gear on elevator car and supporting bracket with insulation element

SA 100

•

-

Fire protection class 2-h-Integrity complying with BS 476 (GB) and E30 complying with GOST (RU)

SA 55 SA 56 SA 57 SA 60 SA 65 SA 67 SA 69 SA 71 SA 74 SA 75

Description

Fire protection class EI60 complying with GOST for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus. SA 101

•

•

Fire protection class EI120 complying with GOST for Ukraine. Special version for Russia is available only in combination with SA 55 (in this case not possible with powder coating). Special version for Belarus is available only for door types M2T and M2Z.

SA 104

• • • •

-

Fire protection class E120, EW30 complying with DIN EN 81-58

-

Fire protection class E120, EW60 complying with DIN EN 81-58

-

Fire protection class EI60 complying with DIN EN 81-58

-

Fire protection class EI120 complying with DIN EN 81-58, door width DW = 800-1400 mm and door height DH = 2000-2700 mm

SA 105 SA 106 SA 109

For technical reasons, not all special versions can be combined with one another, details on request.

www.liftequip.com

163

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Structure of the Landing Door s r o o D

Suspension gear Shaft securing bracket, to anchor rail or secured with wall plugs Door post mounting, secured with wall plugs Carriage Hook lock, landing door lock (optional) Sheet metal casing Running rail Opening post Door panels Closing edge door post Basic body of shaft door sill, made of steel plate

Guide rail prole, made of aluminium or stainless steel Shaft securing bracket, to anchor rail or secured with wall plugs Lower door panel guides Shaft door toeguard

164

Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door

S8A / K8A Layout of the Car Door s r o o D

Suspension gear Door drive motor with control device,

F9 Car installation, rigid

or insulated (SA 79, not shown) V-groove belt Toothed belt Carriage Widening cam Sheet metal casing Running rail Supporting bracket

(SA 79, not shown) Door panels Light grids Basic body of car door sill, made of steel plate

Guide rail prole, made of aluminium or stainless steel Insulation for supporting bracket

(SA 79, not shown) Lower door panel guides Car door toeguard (not shown)


www.liftequip.com

165

166

Issue 09/2015

Door Drive


■ gearless, frequency-controlled asynchronous motor drive ■ quiet operation ■ maintenance-free and compact unit of motor and controller ■ Controller with clock frequency of 16 kHZ ■ high-resolution shaft encoder ■ high car heights ■ vibration-free drive ■ Protection type IP54 ■ Door width 700-2500 mm ■ after reserving, the width that opens the door

can be reduced if desired

■ programmable special output (virtual switch, clo-

sing force limitation, additional end positions signal)

s r o o D

■ Power limitation according to EN81 ■ Diagnostics and Parameterisation automatically

or via Laptop ■ Mains voltage: 230V (+10% / -15%) AC voltage,

50/60Hz signal voltage ■ ambient temperature range: -10°C to + 50°C ■ relative humidity max. 70% ■ EMV tested according to EN12015/16 ■ 24V logic level

Door-Modernisation Kits: ■ The modernisation solution has been specially designed for the different doors ■ Transmission from the drive to the door through a belt ■ The modernisationkits are independent from the doorwidth, as they can be adjusted on site ■ No necessity for limit switches

Haushahn, TSS72K: This modernisation kit consists of a console that can be adjusted accor ding to the door width and a special cam that ts to the old door.

Thyssen, M2TD4: This Modernisation Kit consists of the doordrive F9 which replaces the old telescopic arm by the belt. Furthermore it has a console that can be adjusted

according to the existing door width and an instruction manual with drawings.

Thyssen, M3TK/2: With this solution the old doordrive is replaced by the F9 door drive with a belt.

Thyssen, M2Z/ M2T/ M4TZ (D1,G1,D2,W1,W2,W3,W7): This Modernisation Kit consists of the F9 door motor, a simple bracket that ts to the above listed old door drives and a drawing

for the installation.

Further Modernisation Kits are available for: Schindler QKS6/QKS8/QKS9/QKS11

For more type of doors that can be modernised, please do not hesitate to contact our sales team.

www.liftequip.com

167

168

Issue 09/2015

LEA

®

LEA - Family ®

The Lift Family s t i K

Functionality at its nest

LEA

®

The Kits of LiftEquip

MRL, 450 – 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s Standardized dimensions PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR

Variabel and functional

LEA

®

• Well thought solut ion

Flexible • Individually for your application

MRL, 450 – 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s Adaptable dimensions PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR

The allrounder

LEA

®

• Secure and reliable quality products

Comfort

• Perfectly coordinated components

LEA

MRL, 450 – 5000 kg, 0,5 – 2,0 m/s Custom applications DAF210 / DAF270, MFC / MFR

Robust and reliable ®

Cargo • Competent advice

MR, 1800 – 6000 kg, up to 1,0 m/s Planning according to customer requirements Door width up to 3000 mm

Personally and individually

LEA

®

Home

www.liftequip.com

Gulliver and Orion, accord. to 2006/42/EG

Up to 5 stops, 0,15 m/s, 15 m TH Over 70 platform variants and design options

LEA®

173

LEA® Flexible

185

LEA® Comfort

189

LEA® Cargo

193

LEA® Home

209

169

Technical Report

LEA - Family ®

The Lift Family y i l i m a F A E L

t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T

PRODUKTE UND FACHBERICHTE / PRODUCTS AND TECHNICAL REPORTS

LEA – die Aufzugfamilie LEA – the lift family LiftEquip ist seit vielen Jahren erfolgreich in Wohn- und Geschäftsgebäuden. Die mit Aufzugkomponenten und Komponen- Fahrkörbe in Edelstahldesign, verschiedene ten-Sets weltweit im Markt vertreten. Mit Beleuchtungsoptionen und die Möglichkeit der LEA Familie (LiftEquip Aufzug) möchte die Rückwand in Glas auszuführen und das Unternehmen einen noch stärkeren auch Glastüren einzusetzen, machen den Fokus auf den Bereich der Bausätze und Aufzug zu einem attraktiven Produkt für Systeme legen, da der Markt in den ver- jeden Aufzugsbauer. Wirtschaftlichkeit und schiedenen Segmenten wie Neuanlage und Qualität werden nicht nur bei der HerModernisierung nach Komplettlösungen stellung großgeschrieben, optimierte fragt. Hier ist nicht nur die Lösung aus einer Montageabläufe reduzieren die Kosten Hand wichtig, hier ist auch die kompetente bei Einbau und Inbetriebnahme. In Bezug Beratung bei schwierigen Einsatzbedin- auf die Energieeffizienz können hier – in Abhängigkeit von der Nutzungskategogungen gefragt.

rie – Aufzüge nach Energieeffizienzklasse Das Spektrum der Aufzugsfamilie LEA A nach VDI 4707 gebaut werden. Einen reicht vom Standard MRL Bausatz für die wichtigen Beitrag zur Energieeffizienz leisunterschiedlichen Marktsegmente bis hin zu den Systemen im Bereich der Sonderanlagen und Lastenaufzüge sowohl als MRL Systeme als auch als konventionelle Anlage mit Triebwerksraum. Hier gibt es nicht die Lösung von der Stange, hier sind Engineering und individuelle Planung gefragt. Bei diesen Bausätzen liefern wir alle mechanischen Baugruppen mit Antriebstechnik und Umrichter sowie allen Sicherheitsbauteilen. Die Schnittstellen zu den am Markt verfügbaren Steuerungen sind klar definiert, damit hat der Aufzugbauer die freie Auswahl und kann nach seinen Anforderungen die elektrischen Komponenten für das Gesamtsystem auswählen. Eine Sonderstellung nimmt in dieser Reihe der LEA Home, als Gulliver und Orion nach Maschinenrichtlinie, ein. Das Komplettsystem kann wahlweise komplett mit Schachtgerüst oder zum Einbau in einem bestehenden Schacht angeboten werden. Die Übersicht der LEA Familie zeigt die Einsatzbedingungen der unterschiedlichen Systeme. Mit dem LEA in seiner Standardversion bietet das Unternehmen einen Bausatz für einen MRL Aufzug, der im Leistungsbereich von 450 kg, 630 kg und 1000 kg und 1 m/s einsetzbar ist. Lösungen mit reduzierten Schutzräumen für eine optimale Ausnutzung des Schachtes sind hier realisierbar. Ab 63 0 kg ist au ch Durchlad un g machbar. Dieser LEA ist damit besonders geeignet für den Einsatz L i f t E q u i p ( 2 )

LiftEquip has for many years been successfully represented on the market worldwide with lift components and component sets. The company intends to emphasise the area of construction sets and systems even more with the LEA family (‘LiftEquip Aufzug’ = lift), since the market in the various segments such as new lifts and modernisation, demands complete solutions. Here what counts is not just having solution from one source, but also expert advice in the event of difficult conditions of use. The spectrum of the LEA lift family ranges from the standard construction kit for lifts without machine rooms for the various market segments to the area of special lifts and cargo lifts as well as lifts without machine rooms and conventional lifts with a machine room. Here there are no off-thepeg solutions, what is called for are engineering and individual planning. When it comes to these construction sets, we supply all mechanical modules together with the drive technology and converter as well as all safety components. The interfaces for the controls available on the market are clearly defined, as a result of which lift builders can choose freely and select the electrical components for overall system according to their requirements. The LEA Home occupies a special position in this series, as Gulliver and Orion according to the Machinery Directive. The complete system is available optionally complete with shaft framework or for installation in an existing shaft. The overview of the LEA family shows the conditions of use of the different systems. In its standard version the company provides the LEA as a construction kit for a lift without machine room, which can be used in the performance range 450 kg, 630 kg and 1000 kg and 1 m/s. Solutions with reduced protective spaces for optimal exploitation of the shaft can be realised here. Through-loading is also possible from 630 kg upwards. Consequently, this LEA is especially suitable for use in residential and business buildings. Lift cars in stainless steel design, different lighting options and the option to produce the back wall in glass as well as with glass doors, make the lift an attractive product for any lift builder. Economic efficiency

LEA: Das System auch mit reduzierten Schutzräumen LEA: The system with reduced protective spaces

18 LIFT journal 2/2015

170

Issue 09/2015

Technical Report

LEA - Family ®

The Lift Family PRODUKTE UND FACHBERICHTE / PRODUCTS AND TECHNICAL REPORTS

and quality are not just priorities in production; optimised assembly processes reduce the costs during installation and start-up. With regard to energy efficiency - depending on the use category – it is possible here to build as energy efficiency class A according to VDI 4707. The gearless drive PMC145-2 and MFR frequency converter with integrated regenerative braking make an important contribution to energy efficiency. The LEA is based on a type-tested system and can be put into operation in the version with a free control based on the tested system by individual inspection and acceptance. LiftEquip has an extremely economic solution for the volume market with the LEA. If individual solutions are needed, the LEA Flex and LEA Comfort are available as additional construction sets for lifts without machine rooms. Since all the components used on the market are freely available, maximum flexibility and durability of the lift with regard to future modernisations are also available to the operator. Volker Lenzner Technical Director LiftEquip GmbH

tet hier der Gearlessantrieb PMC145-2 sowie der Frequenzumrichter MFR mit integrierter Rückspeisung. Der LEA basiert auf einem baumustergeprüften System und kann in der Abwandlung mit einer freien Steuerung auf Basis des geprüften Systems durch Einzelabnahme in Verkehr gebracht werden. Mit dem LEA bietet LiftEquip eine äußerst wirtschaftliche Lösung für den Volumenmarkt an. Sollten individuelle Lösungen gefordert sein, stehen der LEA Flex und der LEA Comfort als weitere MRL Bausätze zur Verfügung. Da alle verwendeten Komponenten am Markt frei zugänglich sind, ist auch für den Betreiber die maximale Flexibilität und Langlebigkeit der Anlage in Bezug auf zukünftige Modernisierung gegeben. Volker Lenzner Technischer Leiter LiftEquip GmbH www.liftequip.de

Die LEA Familie / The LEA family

y i l i m a F A E L

t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T

www.liftequip.de

.

www.liftequip.com

171

172

Issue 09/2015

LEA

®

LEA

®

s t i K

Functionality at its nest MRL, 450 – 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s Standardized dimensions PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR

www.liftequip.com

System description and advantages

174

Technical overview

175

Technical Details

176

Car Design

178

Main components

180

Scope of supply and planning information

181

Performance programme and options

182

173

LEA

®

System Description and Advantages s t i K LEA ® for your customers With the LEA® elevator kit, LiftEquip offers you a future oriented system solution for

Safety  System corresponds to DIN EN 81-1:

1998+A3, for commencement of operation per individual inspection with

residential and ofce buildings. As a functional machine-room-less passenger elevator, it has an elaborate layout with optimal shaft usage and proven, high quality components.

EC Type Test Certicate as basis Efciency  

Use a control system of your choice! You can congure LEA® into a bespoke product from your company by combining it with a control system of your choice. It is also possible to integrate further options of operating and indicator elements that are freely available on the market. LEA® provides maximum exibility for the shaft height dimensions, you can design the type-approved system optionally with reduced headroom and/or reduced pit depth. If there is more space available, simply plan with conventional shaft height dimensions – some additional safety measures can then be omitted. As of 630 kg, an open through entrance is also possible.

The elevator car design of LEA ® is highly presentable as you can choose from a wide range of ceiling lightings, wall versions,

ooring materials and hand-rails. The LED lighting systems are very appealing and economical. Further options such as glass doors and a glass rear wall are also possible in the elevator car. In all cases, LEA® is a very economical system. The initial purchase offers a very good price-performance ratio and it is optimised for rapid installation. The deployment of a modern, gearless machine

makes it highly energy efcient during



Modern, highly efcient gearless machine (PMC Gearless) Variable frequency control (V3F) with power regeneration as an option Energy saving LED lighting

Economic efciency  Excellent price/performance ratio 

Efcient maintenance options

Reliability  High reliability resulting from deployment of proven components (e.g. doors)  High quality materials Design  Modern elevator car design with many equipment options  Glass doors and glass rear wall in the elevator car as an option Comfort  Low-noise  Gentle ride quality and precise stops Innovation  Machine-Room-Less  With / without reduced headroom and pit depths Scope of supply  Short delivery times  Common options available Flexibility 

Congurable into an elevator system from your company by deploying your preferred control system and the operating and indicator elements you wish to have.

Not included in the scope of supply of the LEA ® are: Control system, control box with measures for rescue of passengers, operating and indicator elements, external control panels, mounted control panels in the elevator car, emergency call system, travelling cable, shaft selector, shaft wiring, shaft lighting, inspection control and emergency stop switch.

operation. LEA provides you with a modern, attractive elevator system with all the advantages of series manufacturing. ®

Energy efciency With LEA®, you can congure an elevator system

that achieves a high energy efciency class. You thereby make a signicant contribution to the

A B

reduction of ongoing operating and energy costs and lowering CO 2 emissions. On an installation with 6 30 kg, 4 landings, 8.6 m travel height, LED lighting, automatic shutdown of the car lighting and power

regeneration, it has been possible to verify energy efcienc y class "A" in the usage category 1 in accordanc e with VDI 4707.

174

Issue 09/2015

LEA

®

Technical Overview s t i K Two-panel telescopic sliding door (M2T) [kg]

Rated Load

Speed Max. travel height

1)

450

630

1000 (deep)

[m/s]

1.0

[m]

45

Number of passengers

6

Dual entrance

no

8

13

no

yes

no

yes

16

Max. number of landings Car width CW

[mm]

1000

Car depth CD

[mm]

1250

1100

Car height CH [DH+100] or [DH+200]

[mm]

Door width DW

[mm]

Door height DH

[mm]

Shaft width SW with DW 800

[mm]

1500

1600


[mm]

–

1600

Shaft depth ECD/D11 door in shaft

[mm]

1650

1785

2010

2485

2710

Shaft depth ECD/D11 door in recess (recess = 80 mm)

[mm]

1580

1715

1870

2415

2570

Shaft depth ECD/D11 door on landing (recess = 100 mm)

[mm]

1550

1685

1810

2385

2510

Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in shaft

[mm]

1655

1790

2020

2490

2720

Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in recess (recess = 55 mm)

[mm]

1600

1735

1910

2435

2610

Shaft head height – red. shaft head [CH+500] with ECD

[mm]

2600 / 2700 / 2800 / 3000

Shaft head height – red. shaft head [DH+800] with S8A or glass door

[mm]

2800 / 2900 / 3100

Conventional shaft head height [CH+1300]

[mm]

3400 / 3500 / 3600 / 3800

Schaft pit depth with reduced shaft pit 2)

[mm]

400

Conventional shaft pit depth

[mm]

1100 – 1850

1400

2100

2100 / 2200 / 2300 / 2500

800 / 900

800

2000 / 2100 / 2300

Min. oor-to-oor-distance [DH+550]; (min. 200 with of fset dual entrance) [mm]

2550 (with ECD) / 2590 (with S8A)

Two-panel central opening door (M2Z ) Rated load

Speed Max. travel height 1)

[kg]

450

630

1000 (deep)

[m/s]

1.0

[m]

45


6

Dual entrance

no

8

13

no

yes

no

yes

16

Max. number of landings Car width CW

[mm]

1000

1100

Car depth CD

[mm]

1250

Car height CH [DH+100]

[mm]

Door width DW

[mm]

Door height DH

[mm]

2000 / 2100 / 2300


[mm]

1800


[mm]

–

Shaft depth S11/D11 door in shaft

[mm]

1610

1745

1930

2445

2630

Shaft depth S11/D11 door in recess (recess = 80 mm)

[mm]

1540

1675

1790

2375

2490

1400

2100

2100 / 2200 / 2300 / 2500

800 / 900

800

2000

Shaft depth S11/D11 door on landing (recess = 100 mm)

[mm]

1510

1645

1730

2345

2430

Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in shaft

[mm]

1575

1710

1860

2410

2560

Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in recess (recess = 20 mm)

[mm]

1560

1695

1830

2395

2530

Conventional shaft head height [CH+1300]

[mm]

3400 / 3500 / 3600 / 3800

Conventional shaft pit depth

[mm]

1100 – 1850

Min. oor-to-oor-distance [DH+550]; (min. 200 with of fset dual entrance) [mm]

2550 (with S11) / 2590 (with S8A)

With a travel height from 33 m to 45 m, no reduced shaft pit possible.

1)

With elevator car ooring material thickness of up to 3.5 mm, shaft pit depth of 425 mm with ooring material thickness of up to 25 mm.

2)

www.liftequip.com

175

LEA

®

Technical Details s t i K Technical and electric data [kg]

Q

Rated load

450

630

1000

Synchronous gearless machine

type

PMC145-2S

PMC145-2M

PMC145-2L

Frequency controller (V3F)

type

MFC 21/31

MFC 21/31

MFC 21/31

MFR 5.5

MFR 5.5

MFR 7.5

with energy recovery (optional)

type

Number of travel per hour max.

[s/h]

180

Rated output of motor

[kW]

2.8

3.9

6.0

Operating input power 1), 2)

[kVA]

3.6

4.7

7.2

Nominal operating current

[A]

5.1

6.7

10.4

Starting current 1), 2)

[A]

7.8

10.0

15.1

1), 2)

Rope suspension

2:1

Diameter of traction sheave Suspension rope (steel) Guide rails

D T

[mm]

n x d s

[mm]

240 5/6 x 6

9/10 x 6

6/7 x 6

Elevator car

T70

Counterweight

T-50/A

Counterweight with safety gear

T70

At 400 Volt / 50 Hz.2) Data for the elevator control unit have t o be added. During the planning phase, please consider all applicable regulations stipulated by the relevant notied body and all applicable national regulations. 1)

Specied loads in the shaft pit Rated load

Q

[kg]

450

630

1000

Load points / elevator car guide rails

P7 [kN]

16

20

29

Load points / elevator car buffer

P8 [kN]

48

59

86

Load points / counterweight buffer

P9 [kN]

37

44

62

Load points / counterweight guide rails

P10 [kN]

16

19

27

P10 ½ x P8* P9 P7

P7

P8

Extraordinary loads: - Load points / machine base frame

P11 [kN]

- Load points / rope xing points

P12 [k N]

4 x 3.5

4 x 4.5

D S

P10

4x6

½ x P8*

4 x 2.5 – 4 x 6.5 4 x 3.5 – 4 x 9.0 4 x 6.0 – 4 x 13.5

The loads P7 to P10 never occur simultaneously. * Two buffers in the case of reduced shaft pit depth. With a conventional shaft pit depth, only one buffer, central between the elevator car guide rails. DW + 240 1040 (DW = 800)

70 (DW = 800) 50 (DW = 900)

1140 (DW = 900) SW

Shaft layout with central opening door (M2Z)

Shaft layout with side-opening door (M2T)

D D C S

DW CW SW

) l s a s n e o c i e t R p o (

D D C S

DW CW


SW

D D C S

DW CW SW


D D C S

DW CW


SW

Shaft layout is also possible as mirror-inverted, with position of the counterweight on the opposite shaft side.

176

Issue 09/2015

LEA

®

Technical Details s t i K Door installed in shaft The landing doors are fastened to the shaft wall by means of brackets and drill

xings. Door type S8A can optionally be

Shaft vertical section with reduced headroom and / or conventional headroom and or reduced pit depth conventional pit depth (only available with telescopic door)

mounted with securing bolts on anchor rails (measurement in concrete according

to CEN/TS 1992-4:2009) that are cast into the shaft wall or welded onto a shaf t steel structure. CW D D C S

m m 0 0 0 3 / 0 0 8 2 / 0 0 7 2 / 0 0 6 2 = H S

DW SW

FFL

UFL

FFL

UFL

m m 0 0 3 2 / 0 0 1 2 / 0 0 0 2 = H D

m m 0 0 5 2 / 0 0 3 2 / 0 0 2 2 / 0 0 1 2 = H C

m m 0 0 8 3 / 0 0 6 3 / 0 0 5 3 / 0 0 4 3 = H S

Door installation in recess In the interest of optimal utilisation of space, the landing door can be installed in a recess. CW D D C S

UFL FFL ) ) T Z 2 2 M / M / A A 8 8 S ( S (

DW SW

Door installation in the story with shaft front wall Installation of the landing door on the story with the shaft front wall is also possible. This stretches across the entire shaft width. From the point of view of construction, this means no special door opening is required. CW

D D C S

DW SW Front wall of elevator shaft

m m 0 0 1 = s s e c e R

DH - door height

TH - travel height

DW - door width

HST - oor-to-oor-distance

CH - car height CW - car width

SH - shaft headroom SP - shaft pit depth

CD - car depth SW - shaft width

FFL - nished oor level UFL - unnished oor level

SD -

) A 8 S h t i w ( m m 0 9 5 2 / m m 0 5 5 2 =

m m m m m m 0 5 0 8 5 2 = = = s s s s s s e e e c c c e e e R R R

UFL FFL

m 5 4 = . x a m H T

. n i m 1

m T S m H 0 0 T S 2 H = . n i m 2

FFL m m 0 0 4 = P S

UFL

m m 0 0 1 1 = P S

SD

LEA® with reduced dimension for headroom and/or pit depth Ideal for very narrow space available and for reduction of the construction costs. With LEA®, there is the choice of only the headroom, only the pit depth or both dimensions reduced. The reduced dimensions for head room and pit depth are only possible in conjunction with the telescopic door (M2T). Please observe all applicable

LEA® with conventional dimension for headroom and pit depth In the basic version, LEA ® is designed with conventional headroom and conventional shaft pit. Even then, the space requirement is very low. In this case, no add itional protective measures need to be implemented.

regulations stipulated by the relevant notied body and all applicable national regulations.

shaft depth

www.liftequip.com

177

LEA

®

Car Design s t i K Equipment features of the design lines Colours / materials Available colours

colour-line

Electrolytically galvanised

Trafc White (RAL 9016)

White Aluminium Sand Yellow

Ocean Blue

Pastel Green

Pa st el Grey

(RAL 9006)

wood-line

stainless-line

Kiruna Bird (beech)

Rich Cherry (dark cherry)

Natural Oak (light oak)

Erable Chocolat (black ash)

Stainless Steel, grain 220, Ground and Brushed

Stainless Steel Linen

Stainless Steel Elephant Skin

False ceilings and lighting

Honeycomb

Spot LED lighting possible

Constellation LED lighting possible

Domino LED lighting possible

SlimLED PANEL* Lighting directly in the car ceiling

Imola (l=320 mm) with energy-saving lighting

Polymero (l=310 mm) with energy-saving lighting

* on request

Flooring material

Light Grey (6525, Natural Rubber)

Dark Grey (6527, Natural Rubber)

Handrails

Stainless Steel, grain 220, l 40 mm

178

Trafc Wood (3391, Vinyl)

Trafc Attila (2691, Vinyl)

Without ooring material – lowered by 3.5 or 25 mm for customer-tted ooring material

Bumber rails

Stainless Steel, grain 220 , l 40 mm Curved ends (acc. to EN 81-70)

Skirting

Stainless Steel, grain 220

Black Blue (6530, Natural Rubber)

Stainless Steel, grain 220, 140 x 18 mm

Mirror

Aluminium

On rear wall of car, with aluminium strips

PVC 127 x 27 mm

Glass rear wall

In Stainless Steel, frame

prole with aluminium

Wood 120 x 30 mm

Glass door

Glass door panels with frame

Issue 09/2015

LEA

®

Car Design s t i K Elevator cars

colour-line

wood-line

stainless-line

Glass versions (optional)

m m 0 2 1 – H D

H D

0.5 x DW – 62 mm

DW

Glass door panels with frame (telescopic door, opening to the right)

www.liftequip.com

Glass surface in the glass door panel

Glass rear wall

179

LEA

®

Main Components s t i K Gearless machine

Gearless PMC145 The synchronous gearless PMC145-2 is one of the most compact machines worldwide and is perfectly suited for deployment in the LEA ® elevator system without a machine room.





High efciency





Low noise as there is no forced ventilation and very smooth running Safe and comfortable electromagnetic brake release Anti-friction bearings with life-time lubrication Ideally suited for energy recovery



  



Type-approved safety brake in accordance with EN 81-1 Section 9.10 and protective device against unintended movement of the elevator car in accordance with EN 81-1: 1998+A3:2009 EN 81-A3 compliant UCM verication using the safety brake of the machine and considering the switching times of the control system Rope guard in accordance with EN 81-77 up to earthquake category 3

PMC145-2

Frequency inverter

MFC 21/31 Inverter The power-vector-controlled LiftEquip frequency inverter is optimised for the PMC145-2 synchronous machine. 

Inverter with brake activation, power

lter and power choke     



MFC 31

MFR (optional)

Doors

Landing door with stainless steel panelling (telescopic door, opening to the left)

180



With travel contactor (MFC 31) Brake resistor in the separate housing Motor parameters stored Rapid commissioning via Plug&Play Emergency power mode possible in the event of a power failure via UPS (uninterrupted power supply) Integrated speed monitoring for compliance with EN81-A3 (for MFC 31) in conjunction with suitable control system Parallel interface and DCP03

Door Type ECD/D11 and/or S11/D11 Landing door ECD and/or S11  Fire-tested in compliance with DIN EN 81-58  Door panels at top with rollers and counterrollers, two gliding felt strips  Telescopic door (M2T): door type ECD  Central door (M2Z): door type S11 Car door D11 (door drive RT301)  Voltage-controlled machine with toothed belt drive  Automatic learning function  Adjustable opening / closing times  Collision detection

MFR Inverter (optional) The MFR frequency inverter with energy recovery capability is the optimal technology for the creation of an energy

efcient elevator. In addition to features of the MFC 21/31: 

Inverter with electronic brake activation,

power lter, power choke and electronic  

travel contactors Integrated power regeneration, which means no brake resistor is required Possibility for activation of a standby and

sleep mode to improve energy efciency 

Possibility for remote parameterisation via parallel interface, DCP03/04 and CANopen

Door Type S8A /D11 (optional / on request) Landing door S8A  Fire-tested in compliance with DIN EN 81-58  Door panels at top with large rollers and counterrollers, adjustable sliders  The door panels are single-leaf and made in noise-inhibiting sandwich design  Comprehensive range of options Car door D11 (door drive VF400)  Frequency-controlled machine with toothed belt drive  Automatic learning function  Adjustable opening / closing times  Collision detection Issue 09/2015

LEA

®

Scope of Supply and Planning Information s t i K Scope of supply LEA® elevator system Machine  Gearless machine PMC145-2, with motor cable  BSV4 for brake activation  Encoder (BISS-C, NDAT, etc.) with cables  Positioned on drive bracket in the shaft headroom, supported by bearings and protected from vibration Frequency inverter  MFC21 / MFC31 inverter without power regeneration, with chopper resistor  MFR inverter (optional) with power regeneration Elevator car  Self-supporting elevator car, two plastic diverter pulleys ( l 240 mm) on the bottom, suspension 2:1, car railing  Vibration insulation with steel springs  Ventilation in the door portal Counterweight  Steel plate frame with diverter pulley  Filler weights: steel, Gussolith (type 3.8 / 5.0), concrete, in variable ratio  Counterweight compensation 40 % Guides on elevator car / counterweight  Moving plastic guides  Optional pulley guides Guide rails  For elevator car: T70  For counterweight T50/A, with safety gear on counterweight: T70 Rope system  Steel ropes l 6.0 mm (1770 N/mm²) 



Rope xing points in the shaft headroom, suspensions insulated with rubber / steel springs Compensation chain as of travel height > 33 m

Shaft equipment  Two-part sliding shackles made of powder-coated, painted or galvanised steel plate Painting/priming  Steel parts mainly with powder coating (similar to RAL 7005) or priming (RAL 7031 and/or RAL 7005), layer thickness approx. 60 µm; galvanised parts remain galvanised

www.liftequip.com

Landing door (ECD and/or S11) / car door (D11)  Door panels and door architraves made of electrolytically galvanised sheet metal with primed front (RAL 7005)  Car door panels single-leaf, made of austenitic stainless steel, grain 220  Door drive with DC-current control, power transmission with toothed belt, closing force limitation  Light curtain  Aluminium shaft door sills Progressive safety gear  Progressive safety gear for downwards

direction, integrated in the car oor 

Protection in upward direction: monitored operational brake according

to EN 81-1, 9.10 Speed governor  l 200 mm, with remote tripping, positioned in the shaft headroom at the rail end  Governor rope l 6.5 mm  Tensioner device Buffer  Counterweight: driving on the frame  Elevator car: in the shaft pit With reduced shaf t headroom (optional)  Opening monitoring for all landing doors with reset for normal travel   

Speed governor with “positive effect” * of control system Monitored, automatic pivot stops on the car roof and step protection monitoring Monitored, pivoting railing

With reduced shaft pit (optional)  Opening monitoring for the landing doors

in top and bottom oors with reset for normal travel   

Speed governor with “positive effect” * of control system Monitored telescopic car door toeguard with electrical operation Monitored buffer support for connection in the shaft pit

Not included in the scope of supply are:  Control system with control box and measures for the rescue of passengers  Operating and indicator elements  External control panels  Mounted control panel in the elevator car  Emergency call system  Car distributor box  Travelling cable  Shaft selector  Shaft wiring and lighting  Inspection control, emergency stop switch  Integration of the inverter  Connection of the elevator car lighting, of the elevator car fan and of the overload sensor  Load measurement system (occupied, full load, overload) All of the above components must be

provided by the installation rm and/or a control system supplier. Control box of the control system The control box with control system is not included in the scope of supply. It must

be provided by the installation rm. The control box is mounted preferably in the top landing of the entrance area. Installation in the landings below this is possible. The nearest landing door must be located within calling distance of the control box and be visible from the control box. If the control box is installed in an adjoining room, the room must be equipped with an intercom system in accordance with

EN 81-1:1998+A3, Section 14.2.3.4. Legal information The LEA® elevator system has been

granted an EC Type Test Certicate in accordance with Point 5, Paragraph B, Appendix V (Module B) of the 95/16/ EC Directive. Before the commencement

of operation, the installation rm must have the elevator system per inspected / approved in an individual inspection with danger analysis. The existing EC Type Test

Certicate can be used as the basis for this. During the planning phase, please consider all applicable regulations stipulated by the

relevant notied body and all applicable

* "Positive effect" means that the speed g overnor is in the pre-triggered position in the event of a power failure. System is to be safeguarded with a battery.

national regulations. Patents have been granted for the LEA® elevator system. On an order-related, LiftEquip will issue a quota licence.

181

LEA

®

Performance Programme and Options s t i K LEA ®: technical data, landing door Design lines

colour-line

wood-line

stainless-line

Technical data

Rated load Q = 450 / 630 / 1000 kg

(with 1 entrance)

Q = 675 / 1050 kg

(with open through entrance)

•/•/• /

• • •

Speed v = 1.0 m/s Travel height TH max. = 45 m Max. number of landings 16

•/

Car height CH = 2100 / 2200 / 2300 / 2500 mm

/

/

Door types M2T

Side-opening, double-panel telescopic opening door

M2Z

Centre-opening, double-panel sliding door

•

Door width DW = 800 / 900 mm

/

•/

Door height DH = 2000 / 2100 / 2300 mm

• /

Shaft headroom SH

•

Min. 3400 mm (CH + 1300 mm) Reduced: min. 2800 mm (DH + 800 mm, with door type S8A (M2T) with VF400) Reduced: min. 2600 mm (CH + 500 mm, with door type ECD (M2T)) Shaft pit depth SP

•

Min. 1100 mm

1100 – 1850 mm Reduced: min. 400 mm + ooring material thickness (available up to TH < 33 m), only available with telescopic door (M2T)

Reduced: 450 – 1100 mm (available up to TH < 33 m), only available with telescopic door (M2T)

Rail bracket xing with drill xing to anchor rails Compatible supports for calcium silicate walls (not for Germany)

Safety gear on the counterweight Pulley guide on the elevator car Roller guide on counterweight Halogen-free wiring Landing door

Installation in shaft / in recess (80 mm) / in landing (recess = 100 mm) [ECD and/or S11]

•/

/

Installation in the shaft / in recess (with M2T = 55 mm; with M2Z = 20 mm) [S8A]

/

Installation in landing with shaft front wall, shaft width = 1600 – 1800 mm

•

Fire protection safety standard E120 / EW60 in accordance with EN 81-58 Fire protection safety standard EI60 acc. to EN 81-58 Fire protection safety standard E30 acc. to GOST Fire protection safety standard EI120 acc. to GOST Design of door panels and door frame Primed (RAL 7005) / electrolytically galvanised

•/•

Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin

/

/

•/

/

Aluminium door sill (max. wheel load 190 kg) / Stainless Steel (max. wheel load 350 kg) Prole between the door frames made of aluminium Gap cover – primed (RAL 7005) / electrolytically galvanised Gap cover – Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin Wall plug xture Floor-to-oor-distance landing min. = DH + 360 mm

•

/

/ /

/

/

•

Glass door panels with frame (door type ECD/D11 and/or S11/D11) l

182

in the standard,

¡

optional, – not available. Please contact our sales consultants regarding the availability of options.

Issue 09/2015

LEA

®

Performance Programme and Options s t i K LEA ®: car door, elevator car equipment Design lines

colour-line

wood-line

stainless-line

Car door

Door security system (closing-edge monitoring)

•

Light curtain (94 crossed beams) Door panel design

•

Electrolytically galvanised Primed (RAL 7005)

–

Painted Trafc White 1) / White Aluminium 2)

/

•

Stainless Steel, grain 220 Stainless Steel, Linen Stainless Steel, Elephant Skin Car opening panel

Electrolytically galvanised / Trafc White 1) / White Aluminium 2)

•

Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin Aluminium door sill Mechanical car door locking, acc. to EN 81-1/2

/

/

/

/

•

Elevator car equipment

Wall panels

•

Electrolytically galvanised

Trafc White 1) / White Aluminium 2) / Sand Yellow / Ocean Blue 3)

4)

5)

/

/

–

/

–

6)

Rich Cherry / Natural Oak / Kiruna Bird / Erable Chocolate Pastel Green / Pastel Grey

/

–

•/

•

Car ceiling in Trafc White

1)

Elevator car lighting Honeycomb / Spot / Constellation / Domino / Imola / Polymero

•/

– –

/

Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin

/

– – –

/

/

/

/

/

•

SlimLED PANEL 7) / LED-Beleuchtung (bei Spot / Constellation / Domino)

/

•/

/

/

•/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

Hand-rail Type Stainless Steel, grain 220, diameter 40 mm with curved ends Type Stainless Steel, grain 220, diameter 40 mm Bumper rails Skirting (Aluminium / Stainless Steel, grain 220)

•/

/

Flooring material Light Grey 6525 / Dark Grey 6527 / Black Blue 6530 (all natural rubber)

Trafc Wood 3391 / Trafc Attila 2691 (all vinyl) Floor recessed by 3.5 mm / 25 mm (ooring material supplied by the customer)

/

•/

Mirror on side wall of car opposite car operating panel / on rear wall of car

•/

/

/ / /

Glass rear wall (basic) Folding seat (surface-mounted version) Fan in car ceiling with automatic switching on/off as well as after-run function 1)

RAL 9016,2)

l

in the standard,

RAL 9006,3) Cherry dark, 4) Oak Bright, 5) Beech, 6) Ash Black, 7) on request – not available. Please contact our sales consultants regarding the availability of options. ¡ optional,

www.liftequip.com

183

LEA

®

Reducing energy consumption This well balanced system and LED lighting option enables LEA ® to make an obvious contribution to reducing regular operating costs and CO 2 emissions.

Energy recovery The deployment of the MFR frequency inverter with integrated power regeneration can

further enhance the overall efciency of the installation. By taking account of the usage category in accordance with VDI 4707, energy efciency class "A" can be achieved.

Technology with a secur e future

Quality Made in Germany – Quality Made by "LiftEquip": on a level with international standards and appreciated worldwide.

Low-noise ride quality The deployment of our high-quality and perfectly balanced components make LEA ® a very quiet and comfortable elevator system.

Environmentally friendly production Throughout the production of LEA ®, we ensure that the environment is protected.

184

Issue 09/2015

LEA Flexible ®

LEA Flexible ®

s t i K

Variabel and functional MRL, 450 – 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s Adaptable dimensions PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR

www.liftequip.com

Basic package

186

Technical Data

187

Floor Plans

188

185

LEA Flexible ®

Basic Package s t i K

Your Choice: Basic package (independent of travel height): • • • • • • • • • •

Gearless PMC145-2 Frequency inverter MFC or MFR Machine frame Ropefixing frame Overspeed governor Counterweight Rope anchorages Panelling of counterweight in liftshaft Governor tension pulley Buffer supports

Optionen: • • • • • • • • • • •

186

Car beams Counterweight beams Car guide rails Counterweight guide rails Fishplates Traction ropes Governor ropes Counterweights inserts Cabin Shaft doors Cabin doors

Issue 09/2015

LEA Flexible ®

Technical Data s t i K

Technical Data Rated load

Q

[kg]

Rated speed max.

v

[m/s]

Suspension

r

400

450

630

800

1000

1,0 2:1

Car internal dimensions (CW x CD)

[mm]

Cabin height clear

[mm]

Door width (M2T)

DW [mm]

Door height

DH

Clear shaft (W x D) without dual entrance

320

900 x 1000

1100 x 1000

1000 x 1200

1000 x 1250

1350 x 1400

700

800

1750 x 1300

900

1600 x 1400

2100 x 1100

1100

1200

2150 x 1800

2650 x 1600

2000 1450 x 1500

1650 x 1500

1550 x 1600

1650 x 1800

1900 x 1800

Shaft pit

SP

[mm]

1350

Headroom

HR

[mm]

3500 (KH + 1300)

Travel height

TH

[m]

www.liftequip.com

1100 x 2100

2200

[mm] [mm]

1100 x 1400

1650 x 2500

2300 x 1700

45

187

LEA Flexible ®

Floor Plans s t i K

Headroom

Shaft pit

Shaft layout

T S β

.

-

• Load specifications Px are determined during configuration. • For dual entrance will change the shaft depth, depending on the type of door.

188

Issue 09/2015

LEA Comfort ®

LEA Comfort ®

s t i K

The allrounder MRL, 450 – 5000 kg, 0,5 – 2 m/s Custom applications DAF210 / DAF270, MFC / MFR

www.liftequip.com

Product description

190

Project planning data

191

189

LEA Comfort ®

Product Description s t i Machine-room-less gearless t echnology w ith cen K

trally suspended car (2:1) precisely adapted to your requirements is also available for solutions with front and rear entrance. With suspension (4:1) load capacities up to 5000 kg are possible. We assist you in your project planning works and provide the tech nical calculation for your special requirements. Installations with speeds less than 1 m/s can be also designed with reduced shaft pit. • Drive package MINI-Gearless machines DAF210 to DAF270 equipped with safety brake acc. to EN 81-1/9.10 and frequency inverter MFC21 or MFC31 (Plug & Play). The drive package is designed adapted to your installation parameters. The machine has isolated supports for wall mounting and rope suspensions. Optional MFR inverter with integrated regeneration.

• Sling / safety gear TCS25 and TCS40 with gauge KB + 50 mm or TCS40 or TCS60 with gauge KB + 110 mm including safety gear, overload sensor, car isolation and sliding or roller guides.

• Governor With remote tripping and electrical remote reset as well as tensioning weight and fastenings.

• Car and landing door Comfort S8A/K8A as telescopic or center-closing door

• Counterweight With llers and safety gears with sliding or roller guides and travel path cladding, if necessary.

• Buffer Plastic and oil buffers acc. to calculation and design drawings.

• Shaft equipment Rail brackets for car and counterweight including fastenings, car and counterweight rails with shplates and rail

• Ropes Suspension ropes with

clips.

attachments and governor rope.

Performance data with 2:1 suspension and center-guided rails Q [kg]

v [m/s]

450 kg / 475 kg

0,50 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s

630 kg / 675 kg

0,50 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s

1.000 kg / 1.050 kg

0,50 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s

1.600 kg / 1.650 kg

0,63 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s

2.000 kg / 2.250 kg

0,63 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s

2500 kg

0,63 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s

5000 kg (4:1)

190

≤ 0,5 m/s

Issue 09/2015

LEA Comfort ®

Project Planning Data s t i K

) 1

Shaft head

Shaft plan

We offer: •

Assistance in planning

•

Technical planning works for approval drawings and documentation

•

Documentation and operating manuals for all components

•

Information for your risk analysis

•

A3 detection (UCM) for your conguration

•

By Piece license to use the patents of the system

•

Legal certainty

Machine base frame

Technical data for selected performance levels Suspension Bearing force [kg] Cruise [m/s] Shaftdepth [mm] Shaftwidth 1) [mm] Shafthead [mm] Shaftmine [mm] Car width [mm] [mm] Car depth

450 1,0 1500 1650 3550 1150* 1100 1100

630 1,0 1800 1650 3550 1150* 1100 1400

2:1 1000 1600 1600 1,0 1,0 1,6 2500 2800 2800 1650 2150 2150 3550 4000 4150 1150* 1150* 1250 1100 1400 1400 2100 2400 2400

1600 2,0 2800 2150 4200 1400 1400 2400

2000 2000 1,0 1,6 3100 3100 2250 2250 4100 4250 1250* 1250 1500 1500 2400 2700

2000 2,0 3100 2250 4300 1400 1500 2700

2500 1,0 3100 2700 3850 1250 1800 2700

4:12) 5000 0,5 3900 3900 4000 1500 2500 3500

TB = 900 mm; TH = 2100 mm; KH = 2200 mm; * reduced shaft pit design available 1)

Sheet metal frame Q ≤ 1050 kg; Distance wall to c enter counter weight 130 mm Please contact us for an individual planning

2)

www.liftequip.com

191

192

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Cargo

LEA Cargo ®

s t i K

Robust and reliable MR, 1800 – 6000 kg, up to 1,0 m/s Planning according to customer requirements Door width up to 3000 mm

www.liftequip.com

System Description and Advantages

194

Technical Overview

195

Planning Drawings: Elevator Shaft

197

Planning Drawings: Doors

198

Planning Data: Doors

199

Robust Elevator Car Equipment

200

Main Components

201

Scope of Supply an Planning Information

203

Range of Geared Machines

204

Range of Gearless Machines

206

Options

207

193

LEA® Cargo

System Description and Advantages s t i K LEA ® Cargo elevator system LiftEquip offers you with the LEA ® Cargo elevator assembly kit a modern, adaptable solution for demanding transport operations in shopping centres and in industry applications. It is a robust passenger and freight elevator with machine room of fering either a proven geared machine or an

efcient gearless machine. The choice of machine type depends on the rated load and speed. Only proven and high-quality components are used. Use a control system of your choice! In order to be able to offer LEA ® Cargo to your customers, combine it with a control system freely available on the market and with operating and indicator elements of your choice. This ensures that you can congure LEA® Cargo for your customers into a product from your company. LEA® Cargo exhibits the ultimate in exi bility when it comes to the doors: you can use two-, four- or six-panel centre-opening doors or one side-opening three-panel door. All the door systems are suitable for operation in the freight elevator under heavy-duty conditions. The modular system is offered with an entrance and open through entrance. The door width can be designed to extend up to the car width. This provides the perfect conditions for loading and unloa-

ding. The complete range of wall and oor materials or the optional use of additional bumper rails prevents damage to the functionally elegant elevator car. LEA® Cargo is a highly variable, economical and durable elevator system with a modern machine. By using a frequency inverter with optional power regeneration it provides the

perfect preconditions for energy-efcient operation.

194

Safety 

System complies with DIN EN 81-1: 1998+A3

Efciency  Variable frequency control (VVVF) with power regeneration as an option  Energy-saving LED lighting as an option Economic efciency  Equipped either with a robust geared machine or with a highly efcient ge arless machine Reliability  High reliability resulting from the use of robust components (e.g. solid doors)  High-quality materials Design  Functional, durable car design  Robust wall materials and load-bearing

ooring materials, bumper rails optional Comfort  Door width can be designed up to the car width for easy loading and unloading Scope of supply  Wide range of door types and door dimensions from ThyssenKrupp or Meiller; further door makes can be used on request  Common options available  Safety components in IP54, Teil-Ex (partial explosion protection) and Ex (explosion protection) available on request Flexibility 

Congurable into an elevator system from your company by deploying your preferred control system and the operating and indicator elements you wish to have Engineering ser vices At your request LiftEquip also offers engineering services in the planning of elevator systems: Conguration and selection of components, preparation of the general arrangement drawing (GAD). This enables you to circumvent capacity bottlenecks or resort to additional areas of competence.

The following are not included in the LEA ® Cargo scope of supply: Control system with control cabinet, operating and indicator elements, external control panels, built-in control panel in the car, emergency call system, car distribution box, travelling cable, shaft selector, shaft wiring, shaft lighting, inspection control, emergency stop switch , integration of the inverter, connection of the car lighting and the overload sensor, load measurement system and electrical installat ions in the machine room. Energy efciency With LEA® Cargo you can congure an elevator

system that achieves a high energy efciency class. You thereby make a signicant contribution to the reduction of ongoing operating and energy costs and lowering CO2 emissions.

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Cargo

Technical Overview s t i K Project planning (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft – 1:1 suspension) Rated load

Q

[kg]

1600

2000

Rope suspension

1:1

2500

2800

1600 – 2550

1600 – 2600

1:1

Speed

v

Travel height min. – max. 2)

TH

[m/s]

1) 0.63 – 1.0

[m]

2.5 – 40

Machine

Geared

Standard

Gearless

–

Open through entrance

optional

Car width

CW

[mm]

1400

1400 – 2150

Car depth

CD

[mm]

2400

1900 – 2950

CH

[mm]

Car height

1900 – 3000 2000 – 2500

800 – 1400

800 – 2150

Door width

DW

[mm]

Door height 3)

DH

[mm]

Distance, shaft wall - car (cw side)

B1

[mm]

Distance, shaft wall - car

B2

[mm]

300 – 850

Shaft headroom height min.

Min. SH

[mm]

5) CH + 1300 4) / CH + 1900

3)

Shaft pit depth min.

800 – 2550

800 – 2500

585 – 850

700 – 1000

2000 – 2500 570 – 850

1250 – 1400

300 – 1000 5) CH + 1450 4) / CH + 1900

6)

1650 6)

Min. SP

[mm]

P1 – P5

[kN]

120

159

192

227

P1 – P5

[kN]

382

474

614

724

P7 – P10 [kN]

169

210

274

309

Specied loads

Forces on the machine room oor During normal operation 7)

Unusual load

Forces in the shaft pit Max. forces in the shaft pit 1)

Speed v = 1.6 m/s available on request.

2)

The travel height decisively determines the elevator and shaft parameters. Exact planning specications depend on the conguration of the elevator system in each case. Deviating dimensions are possible on request. Our sales advisers will be glad to provide information regarding the creation of exact planning data for your specic system conguration.

Standard dimensions DW and DH in increments of 100 mm. 4) Car roof/guard rail height of 700 mm. 5) Car roof/guard rail height of 1100 mm. Shaft pit depth increases at v > 1.0 m/s. 7) These loads occur at least once a year during the annual check of the installation (safety gear test). Details on determining the shaft depth dependent on the door type, see page 7. 3) 6)

www.liftequip.com

195

LEA® Cargo

Technical Overview s t i K Project planning (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft – 2:1 suspension) Rated load

Q

[kg]

1600

2000

2:1

2500

Rope suspension

3000

3500

2:1

Speed

v

Travel height min. – max. 2)

TH

Machine

Geared

Gearless

[m/s]

0.63 – 1.0 1)

[m]

2.5 – 40 Standard

–

optional


optional

Car width

CW

[mm]

1400

1400 – 2150

Car depth

CD

[mm]

2400

1900 – 2950

CH

[mm]

Door width

DW

[mm]

Door height

Car height 3)

1600 – 2550

1900 – 2500

1600 – 3000

1900 – 3000

2150 – 4050

2000 – 2500 800 – 1400

800 – 2150

2000 – 2800

800 – 2550

800 – 2500

800 – 3000

2000 – 2500

DH

[mm]


B1

[mm]


B2

[mm]

300 – 850

300 – 1000


Min. SH

[mm]

5) CH + 1300 4) / CH + 1900

5) CH + 1450 4) / CH + 1900


Min. SP

[mm]

1250 – 1400 6)

1650 6)

During normal operation

P1 – P5

[kN]

120

159

192

227

220

Unusual load 7)

P1 – P5

[kN]

382

474

614

724

703

P7 – P10 [kN]

169

210

274

309

337

4000

4500

5000

5500

6000

3)

570 – 850

585 – 850

700 – 1000

Specied loads

Forces on the machine room oor

Forces in the shaft pit Max. forces in the shaft pit Rated load

Q

[kg]

Rope suspension

2:1

Speed

v

Travel height min. – max.

2)

TH

0.63 – 1.0

[m/s]

0.3 – 0.5 2.5 – 30

[m]

Machine

Geared

Standard

Gearless

–


optional

Car width

CW

[mm]

1600 – 3000

1600 – 2750

1800 – 2500

Car depth

CD

[mm]

2400 – 4550

2400 – 5000

2550 – 4950

CH

[mm]

Door width

DW

[mm]

3)

DH

[mm]

B1

[mm]


B2

[mm]


Min. SH

[mm]


Min. SP

[mm]

During normal operation

P1 – P5

[kN]

241

264

290

360

380

Unusual load 7)

P1 – P5

[kN]

673

735

808

994

1037

P7 – P10 [kN]

380

417

460

570

620

Car height 3)

Door height


2000 – 2300 4100 – 4800

4500 – 5250

2000 – 2800 800 – 3000

800 – 2750

800 – 2500 2000 – 2800

700 – 1000

850 – 1000

300 – 1000

400 – 1000

5) CH + 1450 4) / CH + 1900

5) CH + 1500 4) / CH + 1900

1650

Specied loads

Forces on the machine room oor

Forces in the shaft pit Max. forces in the shaft pit 1)

Speed v = 1.6 m/s available on request.

2)

The travel height decisively determines the elevator and shaft parameters. Exact planning specications depend on the conguration of the elevator system in each case. Deviating dimensions are possible on request. Our sales advisers will be glad to provide information regarding the creation of exact planning data for your specic system conguration.

Standard dimensions DW and DH in increments of 100 mm. 4) Car roof/guard rail height of 700 mm. 5) Car roof/guard rail height of 1100 mm. Shaft pit depth increases at v > 1.0 m/s. 7) These loads occur at least once a year during the annual check of the installation (safety gear test). Details on determining the shaft depth dependent on the door type, see page 7. 3) 6)

196

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Cargo

Planning Drawings: Elevator Shaft

With 1 entrance

s t i K

Shaf t ver tical section

MRD

D C

D S H R M

P1 to P5 *

DW B1

CW

(B2)

SW

With open through entrance

H S

DW H D

H C

FFL UFL

D C

D S

UFL FFL

FFL UFL

H T

DW B1

(B2)

CW

1

T S H

SW

UFL FFL 2

FFL UFL Key: DH DW CH CW

-

CD SW

- Car depth - Shaft width

SD MRH MRD P1.. B1 B2

-

Door height Door width Car height Car width

TH HST SH SP

-

FFL UFL -

Travel height Floor clearance Shaf t headroom height Shaft pit depth

Finished oor level Unnished oor level

Shaft depth Machine room height Machine room depth Loads in the machine room or in the shaft pit Distance, shaft wall - car (counterweight side) Distance, shaft wall - car

www.liftequip.com

P7 to P10 *

T S H

P S

SD

* The exact positions of the load point s in the machine room and in the shaft pit are entere d in the general arrangement drawing. The shaft layouts are examples and may also be shown mirr or-inverted.

197

LEA® Cargo

Planning Drawings: Doors s t i K Landing and elevator car doors fr om ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M2Z (min. W)

1)

0 6 2

0 0 0 2 6 s s e c e R

S8A/K8A M4TZ (min. W)

CW

(min. W)

1)

1)

0 2 3

Entrance side min. 1/2 DW +85 1)

DW = 700 - 1400 SW

5 5 s s e c e R

CW

(min. W) 1)

5 6 2

min. 1/2 DW +85 1)

Entrance side min. 1/4 DW +85 1)

DW = 800 - 2500 SW

min. 1/4 DW +85 1)

Landing and elevator car doors f rom Meiller TTS/TTK 31 EvoS 2) (min. W) 1)

0 8 3

CW

TTS/TTK 31 EvoN 2) (min. W) 1)

(min. W) 1)

0 6 3

0 3 1 s s e c e R

Entrance side 20

DW = 700 - 1400 SW

0 1 1 s s e c e R

min. 1/3 DW +70

Entrance side 20

0 0 3

0 9 s s e c e R

CW

(min. W) 1)

(min. W) 1)

5 8 2

Entrance side min. 1/4

DW = 700 - 3200

0 1 5 2 7 s s e c e R

min. 1/4

min. 1/4

DW+70 1)

DW+70 1)

SW

0 6 3

198

(min. W) 1)

Entrance side DW = 1100 - CW max. SW

(min. W) 1)

DW = 700 - 3000 SW

min. 1/4

DW+70 1)

TTS/ TTK 32 EvoN (min. W) 1)

0 6 3

0 3 1 s s e c e R

min. 1/6 DW+70 1)

1)

CW

CW

Entrance side

TTS/ TTK 32 EvoS (min. W) 1)

min. 1/3 DW +70

TTS/TTK 28 EvoN

0 1 2

DW+70 1)

DW = 700 - 1400 SW

TTS/TTK 28 EvoS (min. W) 1)

(min. W) 1)

CW

min. 1/6 DW+70 1)

0 1 1 s s e c e R

CW

(min. W) 1)

Entrance side min. 1/6 DW+70 1)

DW = 1100 - CW max. SW

min. 1/6 DW+70 1)

The higher value in each case is valid. 2) Door opening to the right pictured; version opening to the left also available. Key to the abbreviat ions used, see page 5.

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Cargo

Planning Data: Doors s t i K Determining the shaft depth Manufacturer

Door type

Shaft depth w/out open through entrance [mm]

Shaft depth w/ open through entrance [mm]

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M2Z

SD = CD + 260 + 85 – 60 (recess*)

SD = CD + 2 x 260 – 2 x 60 (recess*)

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M4TZ

SD = CD + 320 + 85 – 55 (recess*)

SD = CD + 2 x 320 – 2 x 55 (recess*)

Meiller

TTS/TTK 31 EvoS

SD = CD + 380 + 85 – 130 (recess*)

SD = CD + 2 x 380 – 2 x 130 (recess*)

Meiller

TTS/ TTK 31 EvoN

SD = CD + 360 + 85 – 110 (recess*)

SD = CD + 2 x 360 – 2 x 110 (recess*)

Meiller

TTS/TTK 28 EvoS

SD = CD + 300 + 85 – 95 (recess*)

SD = CD + 2 x 300 – 2 x 95 (recess*)

Meiller

TTS/TTK 28 EvoN

SD = CD + 285 + 85 – 75 (recess*)

SD = CD + 2 x 285 – 2 x 75 (recess*)

Meiller

TTS/ TTK 32 EvoS

SD = CD + 380 + 85 – 130 (recess*)

SD = CD + 2 x 380 – 2 x 130 (recess*)

Meiller

TTS/ TTK 32 EvoN

SD = CD + 360 + 85 – 110 (recess*)

SD = CD + 2 x 360 – 2 x 110 (recess*)

* Subtract depth for the recess(es) only if planned with recess(es).

Fire protection approval for landing doors Manufacturer

Door type

Fire protection

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M2Z

BS 476 [SA100]

70

120

≤90

300

90

60

60

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M2Z

EN 81-58 (E120, EW30/60) [SA104/105]

120

120

≤90

300

90

60

60

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M2Z

EN 81-58 (EI60) [SA106]

120

120

≤90

300

90

60

60

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M2Z

EN 81-58 (EI120) [SA109]

70

70

≤90

300

90

60

60

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M2Z

DIN 18091 [SA105]

120

120

≤90

300

90

60

60

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M2Z

[SA16]

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M4TZ

BS 476 [SA100]

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M4TZ

EN 81-58 (E120, EW30/60) [SA104/105]

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M4TZ

EN 81-58 (EI60) [SA106]

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M4TZ

EN 81-58 (EI120) [SA109]

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M4TZ

DIN 18091 [SA105]

ThyssenKrupp

S8A/K8A M4TZ

[SA16]

Meiller

TTS/TTK 31 EvoS

EN 81-58

50

50

≤90

500

300

130

130

Meiller

TTS/ TTK 31 EvoN

DIN 18091

120

120

≤90

500

300

110

110

Meiller

TTS/TTK 28 EvoS

EN 81-58

50

50

≤90

500

300

90

90

Meiller

TTS/TTK 28 EvoN

DIN 18091

120

120

≤90

500

300

75

75

Meiller

TTS/ TTK 32 EvoS

EN 81-58

50

50

≤90

500

300

130

130

Meiller

TTS/ TTK 32 EvoN

DIN 18091

120

120

≤90

500

300

110

110

140 120

≤90

300

90

55

55

120

120

≤90

300

90

55

55

120

120

≤90

300

90

55

55

70

70

≤90

300

90

55

55

120

120

≤90

300

90

55

55

70

140

SA – Special version; dimensions in mm. Key to the abbreviations used, see page 5. TTS/TTK 31 to right pictured, to left possible d

3-panel, side-opening telescopic sliding door

b

f

S8A/K8A M2Z

2-panel, centre-opening sliding door H D

S8A/K8A M4TZ TTS/TTK 28 g UFL e

c

FFL

4-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door f

TTS/TTK 32 a

DW

a

6-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door

www.liftequip.com

199

LEA® Cargo

Robust Elevator Car Equipment s t i K LEA® Cargo as an elevator assembly kit for carrying passengers and freight is characterised by an attractive and yet very robust

car. The horizontal projection, the choice of materials and the layout of all the elements are designed for easy, rapid loading and unloading and for a long service life.

Car operating panel / internal pushbutton box (not included in the scope of supply) 

For installation ush with the car wall, in a recess for a control box or for a high operating panel Car lighting



Let in ush or very at structural shapes

Bright lighting * optionally with LED light source 

  

 

 

200

Fluorescent tubes let into main ceiling

Halogen spotlight ceiling Pure White / stainless steel optionally LED spotlight

Indirect lighting Pure White / stainless steel

Coffered ceiling Pure White / stainless steel

SlimLED PANEL with LED light source

Mouse Grey (RAL 7005)

White Aluminium (RAL 9006)

Pure White (RAL 9016)

Stainless steel Grain 220

Stainless steel Linen

Hand-rail stainless steel l 40 mm

Bumper rail hardwood

Bulb plate stainless steel (4 mm)

Bulb plate aluminium (3 mm)

Ice rubber

Dove Grey vinyl

Wall panels Sheet steel, impact-resistant and structurally stiffened High-quality powder coating Stainless steel versions

Hand-rail and bumper rail Hand-rail stainless steel 40 mm Bumper rail to protect the car walls (can be designed in 1 to 3 rows), height of sections approx. 200 mm Bumper rail stainless steel

Flooring material Bulb plate 6 mm, primed as standard Materials made of rubber or vinyl Without ooring material – lowered by 25 mm for customer-tted ooring material

Black Stone rubber

Kayar Grey rubber

Kayar Black rubber

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Cargo

Main Components s t i K Geared machines TW130 with emergency brake system Horizontal motor position, traction sheave on the left

The range of machines from LiftEquip has

an excellent reputation and covers a nely



graduated performance range.    



Gears TW63B, TW130, TW160, W263C and W332C Single-stage worm gear Type-approved protective device (optionally with emergency brake system NBS) and thus EN 81-A3 compliant (TW63B, TW130, TW160)

Flexible erection thanks to horizontal or

 

 

vertical motor position (TW63B, TW130) W332C



Traction sheave on the right

VVVF motors, type B5, with exible clutch

Use of synthetic oil for long oil change intervals Wide range of traction sheave diameters, positioned on the left or right Low-wear traction sheave thanks to hardened traction sheave grooves Different designs on the machine base frame with and without diverter pulley for 2:1 or 1:1 rope suspensions Gear in accordance with ATEX Many options available: partial explosion protection / explosion protection versions, extended shaft, etc.

Gearless machines

The SC300 and SC400 synchronous gearless machines are the workhorses of the range and are suitable for deployment in freight elevators: 

High efciency



Low noise Stable, compact monoblock housing Anti-friction bearings with life-time lubrication Ideally suited for power regeneration

  



Type-approved safety brake in ac-

cordance with EN 81-1 Section 9.10 and protective device against unintended movement of the elevator car in accordance

with EN 81-1: 1998+A3:2009  



EN 81-A3 compliant Different designs on the machine base frame with and without diverter pulley for 2:1 rope suspension Optionally with counter-pulley suitable for double rope wrap

SC300 on base frame with counter-pulley for double rope wrap

Frequency inverters

MFC 20/21 and MFC 30/31 inverters The vector-controlled frequency inverters from LiftEquip are matched to the geared (asynchronous) and gearless (synchronous) machines.      



MFC 30/31

www.liftequip.com

MFR (optional)



Inverter with brake activation, power lter and power choke With travel contactor (MFC 30/31) Brake resistor in a separate housing Motor parameters stored Rapid commissioning via Plug&Play Emergency power mode possible in the event of a power failure via UPS (uninterruptible power supply) Integrated speed monitoring for compliance with EN81-A3 (for MFC 30/31) in conjunction with suitable control system Parallel interface and DCP03

Inverters with power regeneration The MFC-R and MFR frequency inverters with power regeneration capability have the optimum technologies for an energy-efcient elevator. In addition to the attributes of MFC units: 

Inverter with electronic brake activation,

power lter, power choke and electronic  

travel contactors Integrated power regeneration, which means no brake resistor is required Possibility for activation of a standby and

sleep mode to improve energy efciency 

Possibility for remote parameterisation via parallel interface, DCP03/04 and CANopen

201

LEA® Cargo

Main Components s t i K Doors from ThyssenKrupp

The S8A/K8A door series is characterised by very high robustness, durability and an extensive range of options. In a freight elevator we recommend:  2-panel, centre-opening sliding door (M2Z)  4-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door (M4TZ)  Safe and robust mechanical construction with powerful door drive  Long service life as a result of the exclusive deployment of proven and tested materials and components



The heavy industrial doors are specically





 

Robust sill substructure with solid stainless steel sills up to the encompassing, concealed sill guide designed for heavyduty loading and unloading High-quality door safety lock systems and short door reversal times to prevent collision with the freight and to protect the technology against damage Ensuring a rapid and long-lasting spare parts availability Elegant and convenient door, ideally suitable for use in prestigious surroundings, such as shopping centres

S8A M2Z landing door

Doors from Meiller

designed for heavy-duty use in industrial and commercial applications. In a freight elevator subject to heavy loads or with door widths > 2500 mm we recommend:  3-panel, side-opening telescopic sliding door (TTS/K 31)  4-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door (TTS/K 28)  6-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door (TTS/K 32)



Sturdy designs of door frame, track rails, track rollers and sill Sturdy, secure lower door panel guide,

innitely variable, where necessary can be exchanged without removing the door panels

TTS 32 landing door

Reference examples

202

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Cargo

Scope of Supply and Planning Information s t i K LEA ® Cargo scope of supply

Not included in the scope of supply are:

Machine  Gear with motor or gearless machine, with brake, motor cable and rotary transducer with cable  Traction sheave with rope guard cover  Machine base frame with diverter or guide pulley (with 2:1 suspension)  Insulated elements to prevent transmission of structure-borne noise (rubber blocks)  Optionally with gear: emergency brake system (NBS)



Frequency inverter  MFC 20 / 30 (for geared) or MFC 21 / 31 (for gearless), without power regeneration, with regeneration resistor  Optionally MFC 21-R / MFR with power regeneration (for gearless only)

Rope system  Steel ropes  Rope anchor points with insulation for positioning in the machine room for 2:1 suspension  Compensation chain from travel height > 33 m (depending on the design) Shaft equipment  Sliding bracket with mounting parts Painting/priming  Steel parts mainly with powder coating (similar to RAL 7005) or priming (RAL 7031 and/or RAL 7005), layer thickness approx. 60 µm; galvanised parts remain galvanised Landing and car doors  Different door makes and door types for installation in the shaft or recess  Different designs: colours in RAL or stainless steel  Door drive with closing force limiter  Different sill designs: steel or stainless steel  Optionally concealed sill guide  Light curtain

Counterweight  Steel frame with sheet metal cladding  Guide pulley for 2:1 suspension  Weight inserts: steel and Gussolith in variable proportions

Progressive safety gear  Safety gear for downward travel integrated in the sling and braking device for upward travel  Optional: protection in upward travel by emergency brake system (geared) or monitored service brake in acc. with EN

Guide rails  Steel rails (T-section) for car and counterweight with butt straps

ded by the installation rm and/or a control system supplier.

Elevator car  Car with individual dimensions  Car type P1000 or P4000 with car guard rail  TCS series sling (depending on rated load)  Guide pulleys for 2:1 suspension  Optionally vibration isolation with steel springs or rubber elements  Ventilation via door gap and vents in the door recess, ventilation via openings in the car ceiling

Guides on elevator car / counterweight  Moving plastic sliding guides with lubricating units  Optional pulley guides

Control system with control cabinet  Operating and indicator elements  External control panels  Built-in control panel in the car  Emergency call system  Car distribution box  Travelling cable  Shaft selector  Shaft wiring and lighting  Inspection control, emergency stop switch  Integration of the inverter  Connection of the car lighting and the overload sensor  Load measurement system (occupied, full load, overload)  Electrical installations in the machine room All of the above components must be provi-

81-1, 9.10 (gearless) Overspeed governor  For installation in the machine room, without test groove  Governor rope 6.5 mm  Tensioning device for shaft pit Buffer 

Polyurethane buffer (v ≤ 1.0 m/s)

Installations with enhanced safet y classes LiftEquip offers a wide range of elevator and safety components of special designs for installations in IP54, partial explosion protection (Part-Ex) and explosion protection (Ex):    

Geared and gearless machines with brake system Overspeed governor Door with door lock, door drive and light curtain Elevator car lighting

This gives you the opportunity also to design installations for use in the highly demanding cement, chemical and petrochemical industries.

with pit element for installation in the shaft pit

www.liftequip.com

203

LEA® Cargo

Range of Geared Machines s t i K

The following overviews of specimen congurations show the wide performance range of our machines with matching frequency inverters. From these tables you can choose the drive technology conguration that is perfectly suited to your requirements. Naturally we can on request implement an individual conguration with your specic installation data.

1:1

Geared machines (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft – 1:1 suspension) Travel height

25 m

Speed

0.63 m/s

0.8 m/s

1 m/s

1.2 m/s

1.6 m/s

2 m/s

Q = 1600 kg F = 1800 kg

TW130, 52:1, TS 540

TW130, 42:1, TS 540 10563 kJ/h, 15.2 kW

TW130, 35:1, TS 540

TW130, 35:1, TS 540 14244 kJ/h, 20.5 kW

26.8 A/39.2 A

31.3 A/46.1 A 1238 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

36.9 A/49.9 A

TW130, 45:2, TS 540 18007 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 45.8 A/68.2 A 1273 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1


TW1301), 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 17041 kJ/h, 18.5 kW 20881 kJ/h, 26.8 kW 38.3 A/53.3 A 52.9 A/78.8 A 1218 rpm, (NBS) 955 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-60 V1

*TW160, 45:2, TS 640 23805 kJ/h, 33.5 kW

1188 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

TW130, 35:1, TS 540 14086 kJ/h, 15.8 kW 35 A/50.7 A 1238 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

TW130, 35:1, TS 540 13544 kJ/h, 18.5 kW

TW160, 41:1, TS 640 16063 kJ/h, 20.1 kW

TW160, 51:2, TS 640 23266 kJ/h, 26.8 kW

30 A/39.7 A 990 rpm, (NBS)

39.1 A/57.6 A

936 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

MFC 20-32 V1

TW160, 35:1, TS 640 18412 kJ/h, 20.5 kW 44.7A/66.8 A 1253 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

W263C, 41:2, TS 640 31384 kJ/h, 36.2 kW 73.7 A/113.2 A 1224 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

TW160, 50:1, TS 640 12777 kJ/h, 18.5 kW

TW160, 50:1, TS 640 14737 kJ/h, 15.3 kW 36.4 A/51.1 A

TW160, 41:1, TS 640 17637 kJ/h, 20.1 kW

TW160, 35:1, TS 640

W263C, 41:2, TS 540 31658 kJ/h, 42.0 kW

42.9 A/62.4 A

1194 rpm, (NBS)

1224 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

46.7 A/70 A 1253 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1



W263C, 40:1, TS 640 22661 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 57.3 A/82 A 1432 rpm MFC 20-60 V1

W263C, 41:2, TS 540

W332C, 46:2, TS 700 36143 kJ/h, 45.4 kW

1160 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

1255 rpm MFC 20-105 V1


W332C, 47:1, TS 800 26872 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 65.1 A/121 A 1347 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

W332C, 59:2, TS 700 34660 kJ/h, 42 kW 82 A/166.7 A 1288 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

*W332C, 46:2, TS 640 36445 kJ/h, 45.4 kW

W332C, 47:1, TS 640 23550 kJ/h, 33.5 kW

W332C, 47:1, TS 800 28833 kJ/h, 33.5 kW

W332C, 46:2, TS 640

58.1 A/101.9 A

69.7 A/126.6 A

1403 rpm MFC 20-60 V1

1347 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

W332C, 59:2, TS 700 37186 kJ/h, 42 kW 87.8 A/175.8 A 1288 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

Q = 1800 kg F = 2000 kg

9737 kJ/h, 10.4 kW 23.9 A/34.2 A 1159 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

1188 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

TW130, 52:1, TS 540

TW130, 42:1, TS 540

10891 kJ/h, 10.4 kW

11791 kJ/h, 15.2 kW 29.9 A/43 A

26.6 A/37.4 A

1159 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

Q = 2000 kg F = 2200 kg

Q = 2200 kg F = 2400 kg

Q = 2400 kg F = 2600 kg

Q = 2600 kg F = 2800 kg

Q = 2800 kg F = 3000 kg

TW130, 42:1, TS 540 11336 kJ/h, 18.5 kW 24.3 A/33.6 A

26.9 A/36.6 A 940 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

MFC 20-48 V1

TW160, 50:1, TS 640 13885 kJ/h, 18.5 kW

TW160, 41:1, TS 640 16545 kJ/h, 18.5 kW

29.2 A/39.2 A 940 rpm, (NBS)

36.1 A/46.9 A 979 rpm, (NBS)

MFC 20-32 V1

MFC 20-48 V1

W332C, 63:1,TS 640 16046 kJ/h, 26.1 kW 38.3 A/87.4 A 1184 rpm MFC 20-60 V1

W263C, 40:1, TS 540

*W332C, 63:1,TS 640 16622 kJ/h, 26.1 kW

W332C, 63:1, TS 700

18431 kJ/h, 24.9 kW 46.5 A/70.5 A 1132 rpm MFC 20-48 V1

37.9 A/87.9 A

19808 kJ/h, 33.5 KW 47.9 A/101.2 A

1184 rpm MFC 20-60 V1

1375 rpm MFC 20-60 V1

Specimen congurations, changes possible

204

40 m

12597 kJ/h, 15.8 kW

1485 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

1225 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

* 50 % load capacity compensation Machine type, gear ratio, traction sheave l [mm] Heat to be dissip. [kJ/h], motor output [kW] at rpm Req. motor current [A] / req. starting current [A] Motor speed [rpm], (NBS possible) Inverter type.

18903 kJ/h, 27.5 kW

Q F TS NBS

= = = =

59 A/87 A 1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1

29694 kJ/h, 34.3 kW 71.3 A/107.9 A

59.8 A/87.9 A 1343 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1

80.6 A/130.9 A 1450 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

93.6 A/176.7 A

95.3 A/173.6 A 1373 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

38059 kJ/h, 45.4 kW 97.2 A/178.3 A 1373 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

Load capacity, Car weight max., Traction sheave diameter, Emergency brake system.

Stronger brake

1)

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Cargo

Range of Geared Machines s t i K Geared machines (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft – 2:1 suspension)

2:1

Travel height

25 m

Speed

0.63 m/s

0.8 m/s

1 m/s

1.2 m/s

1.6 m/s

Q = 1600 kg F = 1800 kg

TW63B, 33:1, TS 590 7744 kJ/h, 10 kW 23.7 A/31.8 A 1346 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

TW63B, 48:2, TS 590

TW63B, 43:3, TS 450 11577 kJ/h, 12.7 kW 31.1 A/45.1 A 1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

TW130, 43:3, TS 540 14134 kJ/h, 15.6 kW

TW130, 43:3, TS 4640

36.9 A/53.4 A

46.8 A/65.6 A

1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

1369 rpm, (NBS)

TW63B, 48:2, TS 450

TW130, 45:2, TS 540 11736 kJ/h, 16 kW

*TW130, 45:2, TS 640 13668 kJ/h, 16 kW 34 A/48.1 A 1343 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

TW130, 43:3, TS 540 17425 kJ/h, 20 kW

TW1301), 43:3, TS 640

43.9 A/65.2 A

56.8 A/77.8 A

1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

1369 rpm, (NBS)


*TW1301), 43:3, TS 540

TW1301), 43:3, TS 540 25128 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 67 A/80.3 A 1622 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1

TW1301), 43:3, TS 540 23444 kJ/h, 32.6 kW

Q = 2000 kg F = 2200 kg

Q = 2500 kg F = 2500 kg

Q = 3000 kg F = 2800 kg

Q = 3500 kg F = 3200 kg

Q = 4000 kg F = 3500 kg

9333 kJ/h, 10 kW

Q = 5000 kg F = 4500 kg

Q = 5500 kg F = 5000 kg

Q = 6000 kg F = 5500 kg

9716 kJ/h, 12.9 kW 25.6 A/37.4 A 1243 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

28 A/38.1 A 1283 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

29.3 A/42.1 A

TW130, 35:1, TS 640 12048 kJ/h, 16 kW 30.2 A/40.8 A 1316 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

TW130, 45:2, TS 540 14447 kJ/h, 16 kW

TW130, 35:1, TS 640 14468 kJ/h, 16 kW 36.2 A/47 A 1316 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1


TW130, 45:2, TS 540

TW130, 45:2, TS 540

TW160, 57:2, TS 640

16973 kJ/h, 18.5 kW

19171 kJ/h, 27.5 kW

38.6 A/46.4 A 1003 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

1273 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1

36 A/49.4 A 1273 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

47.2 A/71.3 A 1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

MFC 20-48 V1

21916 kJ/h, 27.5 kW MFC 20-60 V1

TW160, 41:3, TS 640

31911 kJ/h, 42 kW 79.4 A/129 A

MFC 20-60 V1

1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1

1305 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1


*W332C, 57:3, TS 800 36107 kJ/h, 45.4 kW

48.2 A/63.6 A 1361 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1


TW160, 35:1, TS 640

TW160, 51:2, TS 640

TW160, 45:2, TS 640

18719 kJ/h, 20.5 kW 45.8 A/59.2 A

22169 kJ/h, 26.8 kW

25900 kJ/h, 33.5 kW

55.4 A/75 A 1218 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1

64.7 A/85.7 A 1343 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1

W263C, 41:2, TS 640 34038 kJ/h, 42 kW 86.6 A/131.6 A 1468 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

W263C, 50:2, TS 540 25747 kJ/h, 33.5 kW

TW160, 35:1, TS 640

19078 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 50.9 A/61.1 A 1592 rpm, (NBS)

18859 kJ/h, 26.8 kW

17993 kJ/h, 27.5 kW

59.5 A/86.1 A

1316 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1

Q = 4500 kg F = 4000 kg

40 m

1316 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1

1415 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

W263C, 41:2, TS 540 31046 kJ/h, 42 kW 78 A/120 A 1450 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

W263C, 50:2, TS 540

W263C, 41:2, TS 540 30548 kJ/h, 34.3 kW

W332C, 46:2, TS 640 37725 kJ/h, 45.4 kW

63.4 A/88.6 A 1114 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

72.9 A/101.1 A

95.8 A/177.5 A

1160 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

1373 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

W332C, 47:1, TS 800 28731 kJ/h, 33.5 kW

W332C, 59:2, TS 640

*W332C, 46:2, TS 640

34694 kJ/h, 42 kW

70.8 A/123.9 A

85 A/163.1 A

37993 kJ/h, 45.4 kW 98.7 A/176.3 A

1414 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

1409 rpm

W332C, 47:1, TS 800

W332C, 59:2, TS 640 36111 kJ/h, 45.4 kW

19722 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 49.2 A/64.3 A

24781 kJ/h, 29.9 kW

31916 kJ/h, 37 kW 74.6 A/124.8 A 1414 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

64.8 A/87.9 A

MFC 20-105 V1

97 A/175.3 A 1409 rpm

97.9 A/179.1 A 1452 rpm MFC 20-105 V1

*W332C, 57:3, TS 640

36192 kJ/h, 42 kW 86.3 A/172.4 A 1361 rpm MFC 20-105 V1 * 50 % load capacity compensation Machine type, gear ratio, traction sheave l [mm] Heat to be dissip. [kJ/h], motor output [kW] at rpm Req. motor current [A] / req. starting current [A] Motor speed [rpm], (NBS possible) Inverter type.

1373 rpm MFC 20-105 V1 Q F TS NBS

= = = =

Load capacity, Car weight max., Traction sheave diameter, Emergency brake system.

MFC 20-105 V1 Stronger brake

1)

Specimen congurations, changes possible

www.liftequip.com

205

LEA® Cargo

Range of Gearless Machines s t i K Gearless machines (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft – 2:1 suspension)

2:1

Without power regeneration

2:1 suspension Travel height

80 m

110 m

Speed

1 m/s

1.6 m/s

1.75 m/s

2 m/s

Q = 1600 kg F = 2300 kg

SC 300 M 000 10.7 kW, 87 rpm TS 440, MFC 21-32 V1

SC 300 M 002 TS 440, MFC 21-48 V1

SC 300 M 002 16.3 kW, 152 rpm TS 440, MFC 21-48 V1

SC 300 M 005 18.2 kW, 174 rpm TS 440, MFC 21-48 V1

Q = 2000 kg F = 2500 kg

SC 400 S 001 11.2 kW, 68 rpm TS 560, MFC 21-48 V1

SC 400 S 001

SC 400 S 001

17.2 kW, 109 rpm

18.8 kW, 119 rpm

TS 560, MFC 21-60 V1

TS 560, MFC 21-60 V1

SC 400 S 007 21.6 kW, 136 rpm TS 560, MFC 21-105 V1

Q = 2500 kg F = 2800 kg

SC 400 M 008 13.3 kW, 68 rpm TS 560, MFC 21-60 V1

SC 400 M 008

SC 400 M 012

SC 400 M 009

21.3 kW, 109 rpm

23.3 kW, 119 rpm

TS 560, MFC 21-105 V1

TS 560, MFC 21-105 V1

26.8 kW, 136 rpm TS 560, MFC 21-105 V1

14.9 kW, 139 rpm

Q = Load capacity, F = Car weight max., TS = Traction sheave diameter. COMPACT gearless with 1:1 suspension on request.

With power regeneration

2:1 suspension Travel height

80 m

Speed

1.6 m/s

1.75 m/s

2 m/s

Q = 1600 kg F = 2300 kg

SC 300 M 001 TS 440, MFC 21-50R V3

SC 300 M 001 16.7 kW, 152 rpm TS 440, MFC 21-50R V3

SC 300 M 001 18.2 kW, 174 rpm TS 440, MFC 21-50R V3

Q = 2000 kg F = 2500 kg

SC 400 S 004

SC 400 S 004

17.9 kW, 109 rpm

18.5 kW, 119 rpm

TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3

TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3

SC 400 S 004 21.3 kW, 136 rpm TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3

Q = 2500 kg F = 2800 kg

SC 400 M 011

SC 400 M 011

SC 400 M 011

21.3 kW, 109 rpm

21.3 kW, 109 rpm

21.3 kW, 109 rpm

TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3

TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3

TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3

15.3 kW, 139 rpm

110 m

Q = Load capacity, F = Car weight max., TS = Traction sheave diameter. COMPACT gearless with 1:1 suspension on request.

206

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Cargo

Options s t i K LEA ® Cargo: car equipment LEA® Cargo

Car elements Car ceiling

•

Powder-coated in Mouse Grey RAL 7005

Powder-coated in Pure White RAL 9016 Stainless steel, grain 220 Stainless steel, Linen Emergency trap in the car ceiling Car lighting

•

Let-in uorescent tubes (type C4), let in ush in the main ceiling, degree of protection IP20 Let-in uorescent tubes (type C4), let in ush in the main ceiling, degree of protection IP54 Halogen spotlight ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI2), Pure White RAL 9016 (for Q < 3000 kg) Halogen spotlight ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI2), stainless steel grain 220 (for Q < 3000 kg) Indirect lighting (false ceiling, type CEI5), without screen, Pure White RAL 9016 (for Q < 3000 kg) Indirect lighting (false ceiling, type CEI5), without screen, stainless steel grain 220 (for Q < 3000 kg) Coffered ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI4), Pure White RAL 9016 (for Q < 3000 kg) Coffered ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI4), stainless steel grain 220 (for Q < 3000 kg) Panel light SlimLED PANEL, dimensions 300 x 300 x 16 mm, mounted on the main ceiling Panel light SlimLED PANEL, dimensions 620 x 620 x 16 mm, mounted on the main ceiling Wall design / car door portal

•

Powder-coated in Mouse Grey RAL 7005

Powder-coated in Aluminium White RAL 9006 Powder-coated in Pure White RAL 9016 Grain 220 stainless steel Stainless Steel, Linen Hand-rail and bumper rail

Hand-rail stainless steel grain 220, diameter 40 mm with straight closure

Bumper rail made of wood (beech), 200 x 19 mm, surrounding or with open through entrance on both side walls: 1-row / 2-row / 3-row

/

/

Bumper rail aluminium section clad with stainless steel grain 220, 100 x 10 mm, surrounding or with open through entrance on both side walls: 1-row / 2-row / 3-row

/

/

Flooring material

Bulb plate, primed, 6 mm

•

Bulb plate, aluminium Duett W2, 3 mm Bulb plate stainless steel, 4 mm Ice / rubber Dove Grey / vinyl Black Stone / rubber Kayar Grey / rubber Kayar Black / rubber

Without ooring material, lowered by 25 mm for customer-tted ooring material Skirting

Skirting 30 x 6 mm, aluminium Skirting 30 x 6 mm, aluminium, clad with stainless steel grain 220 Skirting 50 x 5 mm, aluminium, clad with stainless steel grain 220 Skirting 100 x 10 mm, aluminium, clad with stainless steel grain 220 Accessories

Ladder panel without door / with door

• standard,

/

optional, – not available. Please contact our sales consultants regarding the availability of options.

www.liftequip.com

207

LEA® Cargo

Reducing energy consumption The optimally balanced system components and optionally available LED lighting enable the LEA® Cargo elevator system to make a decisive contribution to reducing regular operating costs and CO2 emissions.

Power regeneration The deployment of the MFR frequency inverter with integrated power regeneration can

further enhance the overall efciency of the installation. Taking account of the usage cate gory in accordance with VDI 4707, a high energy efciency class can be achieved.

Technology with a secur e future

Quality Made in Germany – quality made by "LiftEquip": on a level with international standards and appreciated worldwide.

Low-noise ride quality The deployment of our high-quality and perfectly balanced components makes the LEA ® Cargo from LiftEquip a very quiet and therefore comfortable elevator system.

Environmentally friendly production Even during the production of our LEA ® Cargo we ensure that the environment is protected.

208

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Home

Gulliver/Orion s m e t s y S

Personally and individ ully Gulliver and Orion, accord. to 2006/42/EG

Up to 5 stops, 0,15 m/s, 15 m FH Over 70 platform variants and design options

www.liftequip.com

Your Benefts

210

Installation examples

211

Design Versions

212

Car Doors/Landing Doors

213

Equipment

214

Operating and comfort features - equipment

215

209

LEA® Home

Your Benefts s m e t s y S

Gulliver

Orion

Drive system

Hydraulics

Hydraulics

Rated speed v

0.15 m/s

0.15 m/s

Can be used in indoor areas

●

●

Can be used in outdoor areas

●

○

15 m

15 m

300 kg / 400 kg

300 kg / 400 kg

Operation via domestic power supply 230V/AC

●

●

Maximum number of landings

5

5

Different platform lengths/widths

●

●

hout the need for complex work. Whether

As an option with classic, 4-side closed car

○

○

indoors or outdoors – both models can be

Door arrangement of 3 sides possible

○

○

adapted to your personal living s ituation. Select the lift according to your individual requirements and wishes. The Gulliver provides you with a very special type of transport. It not only increases your quality of living, but also upgrades

Doors in different versions (shaft and car)

○

○

Ceiling lighting, two spots

●

●

The LiftEquip home lifts, manufactured according to Machinery Directive 2006/42/ CE and EN81-41 with a speed of 0.15 m/s, are available in different versions: 

The Gulliver model, a stand-alone vertical installation with a shaft and a travel height of up to 15 metres, offers you high

exibility. 

The Orion model can be built into an already existing shaft.

The Gulliver can also be retrotted wit-

your domestic environment. Customized furnishing options provide an ideal supplement to your very own spatial concept.

All models t perfectly into both private surroundings as well as a commercial environment. The property becomes more comfortable and the value increases. Our positive features:



Made-to-measure solutions Increased living comfort



Retrotting of platform lift also possible



Installation in indoor and outdoor areas Well thought-out design Impressive quality



 

Qualities

Maximum travel height Rated load

Standby function, autom. light shutdown

●

●

Installation

Retrot solution

●

●

Customer-provided shaft required

─

●

100 mm

100 mm

Technical expert report (TÜV-certied)

●

●

Automatic closing doors

○

○

Emergency operation

●

●

Signal in case of overload

●

●

Shaft cladding

●

─

Key operated switch

○

○

Emergency phone on operator panel

●

●

Control via operator panel

●

●

Radio remote control

○

○

○

○

Shaft cladding (safety glass, sheet metal, laminate)

○

─

Ceiling lighting, four spots

○

○

Folding seat

○

○

Mirrors

○

○

Shaft pit Safety

Operation

Further equipment features

Customized selection of an extremely wide variety of equipment congurations, materials and car colours

standard; ○ optional; ─ not possible

●

210

210

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Home

Installation Examples s m e t s y S

Steel shaft (Gulliver) Feature of the Gulliver system

Interior and exterior:   

Material: powder coated, galvanized sheet metal, RAL 7001 A further 200 colours as per RAL can be selected Dimensions: Minimum width 730 mm Minimum depth 1150 mm

Various shaft sizes with over 70 standard 

concepts Panels: High-quality galvanized sheet metal, dif



ferent versions of safety glass, laminate Doors: installed on shaft

Interior:  Panels: additional MDF wood panels 

Closed shaft (Orion)

Roof: at

Exterior:  Material: as above, plus surface-treated for use in outdoor areas  Joints sealed with silicone  Roof: inclined, rainproof

Features of the Orion system

As Gulliver, but for installation in an existing shaft.

With telescopic door (left illustration) With hinged door (right illustration)

www.liftequip.com

211

LEA® Home

Design Versions s m e t s y S

Car Car with rear wall mirror; mirror also available only above the hand-rail.

Car with glass element made of transparent safety glass. Two ceiling spots, aluminium

Four ceiling spots, PVC oor,

oor, stainless steel panel and

stainless steel panel and colour-coated wall panels.

colour-coated wall panels.

Platform

Platform with hinged door opening on left

212

Platform with hinged door opening on right in masoned shaft.

Platform with ramp (if a shaft pit cannot be implemented on site). Made of stainless steel, chequer plate.

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Home

Car Doors/Landing Doors Car doors Manually operated folding doors for a closed solution with low space requirements. Folding doors at the access areas (max. 2) made of steel, coated in RAL colour or made of stainless steel.

s m e t s y S

Automatic telescopic door for a classic lift solution.

Telescopic door on the oor made of steel or stainless steel, including special versions for use outdoors. Here, access diagonally.

Landing doors

STEEL DOOR Doors (elevator type) made of sheet metal, undercoat in RAL 7001.

GLASS DOOR Doors (elevator type) made of safety glass with aluminium frame,

Made of galvanized steel

anodized natural. Coat-

and/or coating in RAL colour at an additional charge. With standard handle, buttons and closing spring.

ing in RAL colours at an additional charge. With standard handle, buttons and closing spring.

GLASS DOOR Doors (elevator type) with safety glass with stainless steel frame, manufactured from stainless or standard steel with stainless steel cladding. With standard handle, buttons and closing spring.

SOLID GLASS DOOR Fully transparent glass door with steel frame, hasps and handle made of stainless steel. Semi-automatic with arm integrated in frame, damping device integrated in cross brace.

FIRE RESISTANT DOOR Doors (elevator type) made of sheet metal, undercoat in RAL 7001.

Certied in acc. with EN 81-58. Fire resistant doors available upon request in compliance

AUTOMATIC TELESCOPIC DOOR Doors (elevator type), manufactured completely from stainless steel, or standard steel and stainless steel cladding.

with specic national standards (as special version). With handle and intercom unit for wall mounting, closing spring.

Door handles TECHNO Matching stainless steel handles and buttons (standard).

www.liftequip.com

CLASSIC Matching handles and buttons: Bright brass, shiny brass, chrome plated, bright chrome (optional).

MODERN Matching handles and buttons: satin-nished stainless steel, glossy stainless steel (optional).

213

LEA® Home

Equipment s m e t s y S

Central cover Made of stainless steel or coated in RAL colour in acc. with RAL colour table.

Side cover Made of stainless steel or coated in RAL colour in acc. with RAL colour table. Special paint upon request.

Flooring material Made of hard-wearing PVC as standard.

Further ooring materials made of solid stone, parquet or aluminium available at an additional charge.

Standard powder coating silver-grey RAL 7001. Further colour selections in acc. with RAL colour table (optional).

214

214

Issue 09/2015

LEA® Home

Operating and Comfort Features - Equipment

Control panel Including display, control buttons with braille lettering, integrated plastic handrail and telephone unit (instead of the telephone, an intercom system can be supplied on request).

s m e t s y S

Landing pushbutton Standard: manual travel, embossed lettering Optional: automatic travel

Remote control (optional) Allows users to control the lift and the automatic doors (optional).

Ceiling lights With two ceiling spots (standard) or four ceiling spots (optional).

Hand-rails (optional) Painted or stainless steel.

Folding seat (optional) For safe and comfortable travel (max. 120 kg).

Car with mirror (optional) One side wall with mirror element (full surface or only above the hand-rail).

www.liftequip.com

215

LEA® Home

s m e t s y S

Overview of advantages: • • • • • • • •

216

Retention of mobility and independence

Retrotting possible, simple and fast installation Increased living comfort Made-to-measure solutions Installation in indoor and outdoor areas

Optimum space utilization Reliable technology

Energy-efcient

Issue 09/2015

Technical Report

Technical Report Gulliver - The Home Lift TITELSTORY / TITLE STORY

Gulliver – Der Home Lift Gulliver – the home lift Vor dem Hintergrund des demographischen Wandels, den gesetzlichen Anforderungen an behindertengerechte Zugänglichkeit von Gebäuden im öffentlichen Bereich und dem Wunsch des Einzelnen nach mehr Komfort – auch im privaten Umfeld – werden vermehrt Systeme zur Personenbeförderung im privaten und öffentlichen Bereich nachgefragt. Hier kommen sowohl Aufzüge nach Aufzugsrichtlinie als auch nach Maschinenrichtlinie – sogenannte Home Lifts – zum Einsatz.

In diesem Anwendungsfall steht die Förderleistung nicht an erster Stelle, sondern die flexible Anpassung an die Kundenanforderungen und bestehende Umgebungsbedingungen sowie einfache Installation, Inbetriebnahme und Wartung, Bedienbarkeit und Sicherheit. Diesem Trend folgend waren auf der interlift 2013 unterschiedlichste Systeme bei diversen System- und Komponentenherstellern zu sehen. Aufgrund der n ormativen Einschrän kungen bei Home Lifts mit einer Betriebsgeschwindigkeiten von max. 0,15 m/s sind deren Einsatzbedingungen auch in Bezug auf Förderhöhe und Förderleistung begrenzt. Ein wesentlicher Vorteil dieser Fördersysteme ist dabei die Flexibilität, bezogen auf die Einbauabmessungen, sowie die niedrigen Schachtgruben und Schachköpfe, was im Bereich der Nachrüstung in bestehenden

Gebäuden oft eine wesentliche Rolle spielt. Die meisten Home Lifts werden komplett mit Schachtgerüst geliefert. Durch diese Komplettlieferung aus einer Hand reduzieren sich die Schnittstellen bei Planung und Konstruktion und damit auch der Aufwand für Einbau und Inbetriebnahme. In den meisten Fällen wird nur ein 230 V Anschlus s benötigt . Mit EG Baumust erprüfung und CE-Kennzeichen kann das System einfach in Verkehr gebracht werden. Bei der Systementscheidung, ob ein Home Lift nach Maschinenrichtlinie oder ein Aufzug nach Aufzugsrichtlinie zum Einsatz kommt, müssen die Nutzungsanforderungen an die Anlage betrachtet werden. Je nach Ausführung und Ausstattung kann damit ein Home Lift von der Kostensituation auch in den Bereich eines Aufzuges nach Aufzugsrichlinie kommen. Daher L i f t E q u i p ( 3 )

Home Lift, modernes Schachtgerüst mit Glaselementen und Drehtüren home lift, modern shaft frame with glass elements and hinged doors 6 LIFT journal 2/2014

www.liftequip.com

Factors like demographic change, the legal requirements for handicappedfriendly accessibility of buildings in the public sector and the desire of individuals for greater convenience – including in their private surroundings – have led to an increased demand for personal conveyance systems in the private and public spheres. Here both lifts according to the Lifts Directive as well as according to the Machinery Directive – so-called home lifts – are in use.

t f i L e m o H e h T r e v i l l u G t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T

The pri mar y fact or here is not conv eyan ce performance, but rather flexible adjustment to customer requirements and existing environmental conditions, plus simple installation, start-up, maintenance, operability and safety. In line with this trend, all kinds of systems from various system and component manufacturers could be seen at the interlift 2013. Due to normative restrictions in home lifts with operating speeds of a maximum of 0.15 m/s, their operating conditions are also restricted with regard to conveyance height and conveyance performance. A significant advantage of these conveyance systems is their flexibility in terms of installation dimensions as well as the low shaft pits and shaft heads. The latter often play a major role in the field of retrofitting in existing buildings. Most home lifts are supplied complete with shaft frame. Thanks to this complete delivery from one source, interfaces in planning and design are reduced and as a result likewise the expense for installation and start-up. In most cases all that is needed is a 230 V connection. Such systems are easy to distribute thanks to the EC type examination and CE mark. When a system decision has to be made as to whether to use a home lift according to the Machinery Directive or a lift according to the Lifts Directive, one has to consider the usage requirements on the system. Hence, depending on the model and equipment, a home lift can also fall within the scope of a lift according to the Lifts Directive. Consequently, it is important for a component or system supplier to provide the customer / operator or installation company with expert advice to ensure that the best solution for the case in hand is found. LiftEquip provides tailor-made solutions for a high degree of residential convenience in the home lift product segment in the form of the Gulliver / Orion system from ThyssenKrupp. These systems are especially quiet and very energyefficient. They are optionally available complete with shaft frame for indoors and outdoors or for installation in an existing shaft. The illustrations

Verlagssonderveröffentlichung

217

Technical Report

Technical Report Gulliver - The Home Lift t f i L e m o H e h T r e v i l l u G t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T

TITELSTORY / TITLE STORY

Home Lift, integriert im gemauerten Schacht mit automatischen Schiebetüren home lift, integrated in masonry shaft with automatic sliding doors

Je nac h Kundenw uns ch und Anwendungsfall kann zwischen vielen Optionen gewählt werden, wie: • Individuelle Ausstattungsmöglichkeiten und Farbgestaltungen • Drehtüren wahlweise mit automatischem Türöffner • Lichtgitter oder Fahrkorbabschlusstüren • Automatische Fahrkorb- und Schachtabschlusstüren • Unterschiedliche Plattformabmessungen (Fahrkorb) und Tragfähigkeiten • Fernbedienung oder Kommandotaster sowie Ruftaster in der Haltstelle und Schüsselschalter • Notruftelefon • Schachtgerüst mit Stahlblechverkleidung oder mit Glaselementen • Unterschiedliche Beleuchtungsvarianten Im Bereich der Normung werden diese Home Lifts zukünftig in einer eigenen Norm EN 81-42 betrachtet. Die Systeme werden dort als LSPE – Low Speed Passenger Elevator – benannt. Ziel dieser Norm ist es, die Sicherheit für den Benutzer auf ein vergleichbares Niveau eines Aufzuges nach Aufzugsrichtlinie zu bringen. Das System Gulliver / Orion von LiftEquip erfüllt mit den Optionen wie Schachtabschlusstüren, Lichtgittern und Kommandotastern im Fahrkorb und anderen Ausstattungsvarianten bereits heute wesentliche Anforderungen aus der geplanten EN 81-42.

show examples for both situations with shaft frame and in the masonry shaft. Depending on the installation situation, various shaft designs are available – sketch with hinged doors - or with mechanically operated doors, shaft and lift car dimensions available. Since these systems are configured process-optimised, the complete system can be delivered at short notice. In the course of making an offer the installation situation can be checked with existing shaft sketches. A system drawing is provided with the order confirmation. Depending on the customers’ preferences, one can choose between many options, such as: • individual equipment options and colour schemes • hinged doors with automatic door opener • light grid or lift car doors • automatic lift car- and landing doors • dierent platform dimensions (lift car) and load-bearing capacities • remote control or command switch and call button at the stop and key switch • emergency call telephone • shaft frame with steel plate cladding or glass elements • dierent lighting versions In the field of standards these home lifts will in future be considered in their own standard EN81-42. The systems will be referred to there as LSPE – low speed passenger elevator. The goal of this standard is to put safety for the user on a level comparable to lifts according to the Lifts Directive. The Gulliver / Orion system from LiftEquip already meets major requirements from the planned EN 81-42 with options like lift car doors, light grids and command switches in the lift car and other equipment versions.

ist es wichtig, dass ein Komponenten- oder Systemlieferant den Kunden / Betreiber bzw. die Montagefirma kompetent berät, damit die beste Lösung für seinen Anwendungsfall gefunden wird. Volker Lenzner LiftEquip bietet im Produktbereich der Volker Lenzner Technische Leitung Home Lifts mit dem System Gulliver / Technical Director LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components Orion aus dem Hause ThyssenKrupp LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components maßgeschneiderte Lösungen für einen www.liftequip.de hohen Wohnkomfort an. Die Systeme www.liftequip.de sind besonders leise und haben eine hohe Energieeffizienz. Wahlweise lieferbar komplett mit Schachtgerüst für den Innen- und Aussenbereich oder zum Einbau in einem bestehenden Schacht. Die Bilder zeigen Beispiele für beide Situationen mit Schachtgerüst und im gemauerten Schacht. Je nach Einb ausi tuat ion steh en unte rschiedliche Schachtausführungen – Skizze mit Drehtüren – oder mit mechanisch betätigten Türen, Schacht- und Fahrkorbabmessungen zur Verfügung. Da diese Systeme prozessoptimiert konfiguriert werden, ist eine kurze Lieferzeit des kompletten Systems möglich. Im Rahmen der Angebotserstellung kann mit vorhandenen Schachtskizzen die Einbausituation überprüft werden. Bereits mit der Auftragsbestätigung wird eine Anlagenzeichung Schachtgrundrisse mit unterschiedlichen Zugangssituationen (Schacht oder Schachtgerüst) geliefert. Shaft floor plan with differing access situations (shaft or shaft frame) Verlagssonderveröffentlichung

218

LIFT journal 2/2014

7

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

LEMoS

®

The Modular Modernisation Solution n o i t a s i n r e d o M

• Variable modernisation cabin • 320 - 1050 kg • Congurable in millimeter increments • Flexible adaptation of various door

manufacturers

www.liftequip.com

System advantages

220

System advantages / Elevator car P450SV/ P1000SV

221

Modernisation

222

Project planning and performance data

226

Project planning data (without dual entrance)

233

Project planning data (with dual entrance)

234

Project planning data (door mountings)

235

Technical Data

237

Elevator Car Design

238

Car Design Options

240

Lighting system

241

219

LEMoS

®

System Advantages n o i t a s i n r e d o M

Flexible degree of modernisation With LEMoS, you can individually modernise by using single components in your elevator installation or perform a complete

Optimisation possibilities The LEMoS elevator system is specially tailored to the high, individual requirements in modernisation.

modernisation. The limits are uid. What is special about this system is that you can also leave parts in your installation for which replacement would not be technically necessary or make economic sense.

Regardless of which aspects are important to you during modernisation, with LEMoS you can optimise and combine them with one another unlike with any other system.

This exibility is unique and carves out a

We will work together with you to nd the

distinct place for LEMoS! LEMoS opens the possibility of a dust-free conversion process and shortening of the conversion time. LEMoS can provide all the mechanical components that can be combined with any control systems available on the market.

optimal solution for your elevator installation, individually tailored to your requirements and wishes.

Flexibility in the drive solution At LEMoS we use cutting-edge drive solutions which are matched to the particular requirements in modernisation. The optimum solution for your installation is chosen from a wide range of gearless and geared drives to suit the application.

LEMoS with gearless drive

LEMoS with geared drive

With the exible LEMoS system, you can –

All components used by LEMoS are designed so that your modernised installation

depending on the scope of the modernised

achieves high levels of energy efciency in

components – considerably improve energy efciency compared to your existing instal-

accordance with VDI 4707.

lation.

You can thereby make a considerable contribution to the reduction of ongoing operating and energy costs and the lowering of CO2 emissions.

Energy efciency

y S c o n M e E i c L  h f t e i y w g n r o e i n t a e l l e a t h t s i e n s r a u e r o c y f n I o

220

You can make signicant savings for exam ple with the use of standby operation mode or by using frequency inverters with energy recovery capability. Modern LED lighting also increases your energy savings.

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

System Advantages / Elevator Car P450SV/P1000SV

System perspective The existing installation is adapted using state of the art technology to provide the very best technical solution within the framework of a modernisation.

The customers requirements with regard to his installation and compliance with all current regulations are also considered during planning, project implementation. For a comprehensive modernisation the elevator car component is of central importance. Important aspects here are:

  

Safety requirements in acc. with EN81-1 Requirements from the German regulation for operational safety of machinery Requirements in acc. with EN 81-70 regarding access for persons with disabilities



Energy efciency in acc. with VDI 4707



Sound insulation requirements

 



n o i t a s i n r e d o M

Improved comfort and design with of space utilisation Reusing as many non-value existing components as possible, such as rails, counterweight and possibly door frame, i. e. dust-free conversion and a reduction of costs to the customer. Rapid conversion and short down times

Scope of supply and performance  Project planning base on the existing shaft dimensions provide the best shaft utilisation thanks to variable elevator car dimensions  Modular modernisation in various stages as an option  Drive technology, safety components, elevator car, doors as per customer requirements, shaft equipment (rails, bracket, counterweight)



Combination with any control systems and operating and elements available on the market

The elevator car, exible for modernisation In modernisation there are many constraints that must be taken into consideration in the complex planning of a lift modernisation. From

the customer perspective the elevator car is one of the main visible components that must satisfy the requirements with regard to size – disability friendly requirements and design.

With the P450SV and P1000SV elevator car series we offer an elevator car that is exible and adaptable to modernisation needs. The elevator car is a self-supporting construction with integrated car sling for 1:1 suspension. The shaft width and depth dimensions can be adapted in millimetre increments to the existing site conditions ensuring all available area is used. Different elevator car heights are available, together with doors of different manufacturers. As a result of planning the shaf t cross-section we can prepared the offer precisely meeting the customers needs.

Innovation  Specially developed for modernisation  Enlarged elevator car thanks to optimum shaft utilisation     

Efciency  Self-supporting elevator car without car sling with 1:1 suspension  Compact and variable elevator car

Variable concept with exible width,



depth and height dimensions Integrated ventilation slots in the car front wall Flexible door mountings Fast and simple assembly (thanks to integrated positioning aids) Adaptable off-centre suspension during assembly (for subsequent alignment of the installed elevator car in the shaft)



www.liftequip.com

Largest possible available car oor area Elevator car congurable in millimetre

increments Reliability  Strict quality inspection ensures high quality of all installed components  Guarantee of the long term supply of spare parts  Reduced down times and faults

Variability  From the basic model (galvanised elevator car) to individual full equipment

specication – everything is possible Large number of interfaces (e.g. doors of different manufacturers)  Different materials possible Environment 

   

Energy-efcient production with cuttingedge manufacturing technologies Use of recyclable materials Optimised use of materials Energy-saving LED lighting

221

LEMoS

®

Modernisation – Optimised to your Requirements n o i t a s i n r Space optimisation e d o M Older elevator installations frequently have smaller car dimensions which fail to meet today's demands for comfort and legal requirements. In existing buildings you cannot however, change the shaft dimensions. With the LEMoS system, we offer you the unique possibility to make better use of the existing shaft and use the largest possible elevator car. The new, self-supporting elevator car has a compact, load-bearing structure and

can be adjusted to t the existing shaft in millimetre increments. In addition, spaceoptimised shaft equipment and doors with reduced depth can be used.

All measures serve to offer the passengers a more spacious elevator car and to improve the handling capacity of the installation. Older people and people with disabilities will, in particular, be very much appreciate the additional freedom of movement.

With the exible LEMoS system you can if you wish naturally use your existing elevator car or retain the car dimensions.

Cost optimisation Investment costs

In the development of the LEMoS system, we have placed special emphasis on the aspect of economic efciency in modernisation. This applies both to the investment for the modernisation itself as well as to the ongoing running costs.

a "less exible" new installation

Reduction in investment costs

Modernisation as complete replacement of the entire installation

The LEMoS components have such exible interfaces that all parts which are exposed to little wear and do not need to be replaced, such are for example guide rails and counterweights. This reduces the modernisation costs as well as the installation time. Parts of the shaft equipment, landing doors or door frames can frequently be re used. The LEMoS components represent the latest state of the art equipment and manufacturing techniques. They are optimised for long service life and low power consumption.

222

Services provided by the customer for adapting to t he requirements of

Demand-based component modernisation with LEMoS

The ongoing operating expenses are signi cantly reduced.

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

Modernisation – Optimised to your Requirements

Budget optimisation 'Step by Step' modernisation

Scope of modernisation (degree of modernisation)

Modernisation of all required components in one step

Depending on scope, the modernisation of your elevator installation may represent a larger investment. If you prefer to spread these costs over several budget periods or years, we can prepare a modernisation plan work within your budget. This takes into account both the technical necessities as well as your budget. The modernisation of individual components then takes place over a longer period of time, spread over several stages. The down time is, of course, kept to a minimum during the work. Between the individual stages of the modernisation, you will always have available a safe and fully functional elevator installation.


Modular modernisation of individual components spread over a longer period of time

Period of time 1 (e.g. 1st year)

Period of time 2 Period of time 3 (e.g. 2nd year) (e.g. 3rd year)

The scope and features of the individual modernisation packets can be freely selected and can be adapted to the available budget. The matched LEMoS system

Time / budget periods

ensures that all components go together perfectly. When all measures have been completed, you get a modernised elevator that represents the latest state of the art equipment.

Optimisation of the conversion time

During extensive modernisation, down times of your elevator installation cannot be completely avoided. With the LEMoS system, we can, however, keep this to a minimum with concern for the passengers. Parts of the system which are exposed to minimal wear or which would require considerable time to replace, such as the shaft equipment (rails, bracket, counterweight), can be integrated in your modernised elevator and continue to be used due to the

Demand-based, modular modernisation with LEMoS

Conversion time = down time

Conversion time = down time

Time

high exibility of the components. Compared to a complete replacement, this eliminates time-intensive and costly measures. In addition, with the modular LEMoS system, we can prepare a phased modernisation schedule for you in which the modernisation measures are performed during times of low use.

www.liftequip.com

Modernisation as complete replacement of the entire installation

A shortened conversion time and fewer measures performed by the customer also reduce stress for the building tenants caused by noise and dirt. Less additional work is necessary for adapting the doors on the landing.

223

LEMoS

®

Modernisation according to Individual Requirements n o i t a s i n r e d o M

Control system -

Our components are tested with all the control systems available on the market

-

Energy efciency options such as standby and sleep mode can be activated in our components

Drive and control -

Very smooth running Reduction of operating costs through energy savings Increase in safety level

-

Maximum efciency

-

Energy recovery optional

Safety technology -

Increase in the safety level to the current state of the art

Fullment of the obligations of the installation operator Reliable increase in the availability of the installation

Shaft equipment -

Optimal utilisation of space in the shaft Larger dimensions of the elevator car possible Flexible components, such as counterweight, rail bracket ... Reduction of running noise Pictured: - with gearless drive in the machine room

224

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

Modernisation according to Individual Requirements

Landing and car door -

-


Reduction of door operating times Increase in safety level Designed to accommodate disabled passengers by means of light grid Increase in installation availability Modern, attractive appearance Doors with different door mounting dimensions

Elevator car -

Maximization of car dimensions

-

possible Increase in the rated load possible Modern, attractive design Positive effect on image & increase in building value

Lighting -

-

Design possibilities through light for a relaxing atmosphere Energy- and cost-saving LED lighting Integrable emergency light function Long working life, considerably reduced maintenance expenses

Operating and indicator elements -

-

The choice can be made with all the elements combinable for the selected control system Elderly- and disabled-friendly design in acc. with EN 81-70

Pictured: - with geared drive in the machine room

www.liftequip.com

225

LEMoS

®

Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight) Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg n o i t a s i n r Shaft layout with side-opening door e d o EC STM M CWD

01

3 C W

M T S W C

1

Gearless / Geared

m m 0 0 0 2 = H R M . n i M

D C D S

D D

R1 WC1 1)

DW

R2 WC2 1)

CW SW

FFL ORF

m m 0 2 3 1 + m m H m m C 0 0 = 0 5 R 1 2 2 2 H . – – n i 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 2 2 = = H H T C

Shaft layout with centre- opening door EC STM CWD 3 C W

M T S W C

H T

D C D S

FFL ORF m m 0 5 1 1 = P S . n i M

D D

R1 WC1 1)

DW

R2

CW

WC2 1)

SW

Machine room CW/2+CWD/2+85 mm

Shaft pit

m m 5 4 1 + 2 / M T S W C

P9

P7

P7

P8

SW

226

226

D S

R1 - door recess, left R2 - door recess, right 1) The larger value is valid. For the values C1 and C2 see table on Pages 17/18. Pictured load points in the machine room for gearless drive.

dia. 200R C D

Middle elevator car

CW/2+60mm 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 6 G e 1 a

PGG dia. 200

dia. 80 dia. 80

r l e s s / G e a r e d

m m D 0 S 0 6 + D S = D R M

PEC

SW

MRW = SW+800 mm

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

Project Planning and Performance Data(side counterweight) Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg

Performance data and principal dimensions with side counterweight without dual entrance (rope suspension 1:1) Rated load 1

Q

[kg]

Speed

v

[m/s]

Max. travel height

TH

[m]

320

350

375

400

425

450

500

550

1.0 40

25

Dual entrance


No


4

(in 1 mm

Min. CW

[mm]

steps)

Max. CW

[mm]

(in 1 mm

Min. CD

[mm]

steps)

Max. CD

[mm]

Car height

CH

[mm]

Side wall clearance, side GG

WC1

[mm]

WC2

[mm]

Min. SW 2

[mm]

Car width Car depth

Shaft width

Max. SW Rear wall clearance

6

850

900

950

1000

1100

1200

1300

1350

1100

1150

1250

1350

1450

1500

1550

1650

2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 225 (for counterweight depth 100 mm)

140 – 300 1165 1375

1425

1475

1215 1525

1625

1675

1775

[mm]

70

[mm]

155 – 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18)

Door packet thickness

Min. WC3 DD

Shaft depth

Min. SD

[mm]

Max. SD

[mm]

Headroom height

Min. HR

[mm]

1740 1840 1690 1890 3320 – 3570 (Min. HR = CH + 1320 mm)

Pit depth

Min. SP

[mm]

1150 / 1550 4

Clearance - rail bracket

Max. l

[mm]

3

7 850

1050

[mm]

2

5 800

1875

1300

1490

1590

2500

2450

2400

2200

1940

2040

2150

2100

2000

2000

Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM

[mm]

CW + 40


RCD

[mm]

variable

Load point in machine room

PGG

[kN]

35.7

36.8

37.5

38.5

39.9

40.9

43.0

48.4


PEC

[kN]

19.2

19.9

20.3

20.8

21.5

22.1

23.2

26.1

Installation eye in machine room

E1

[kN]

Load point in the shaft pit

P7

[kN]

13.1

13.6

13.9

14.3

13.7

14.1

16.0

17.4


P8

[kN]

40.5

42.2

43.8

45.3

43.1

44.8

52.3

58.7


P9

[kN]

32.3

33.4

34.1

34.9

36.4

36.9

39.4

44.1

5.0

The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Page 15. 2) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and shaft rear wall must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances). The specied dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side. 4) The minimum pit depth is 1550 mm for CW x CD = 800 x 1100 - 1200 mm and for CW x CD = 850 x 1150 - 1200 mm. 1)

Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with side counterweight (rope suspension 1:1) Car width

=

Shaft width

–

Wall clearance, left

–

Wall clearance, right

CW

=

SW

–

WC1

–

WC2

CW

=

SW

–

CW

=

SW

–

(C1 - R1 + IT + "air") (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm)

Max. CW

=

SW

–

225 mm

– –

(C2 - R2 + IT + "air") (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 140 mm

–

Car width

=

Car gauge between rails

–

2 x distance from elevator car to rail

CW

=

CGBR

–

2 x 20 mm

Without dual entrance Car depth

=

CD

=

CD Max. CD

Shaft depth – Door packet thickness – SD

–

DD

–

=

SD

–

(155 to 295 mm)

=

SD

–

155 mm

Rear wall clearance

– Installation tolerance, door side

WC3

–

IT

–

70 mm

–

25 mm

–

70 mm

–

25 mm

IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.

www.liftequip.com

227

LEMoS

®

Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight) Rated load 630 kg ≤ Q ≤ 1050 kg n o i t a s i n r Shaft layout with side-opening door e d o M

R3

DW2

R4

1)

1)

(WC1)

(WC2)

01

EC STM CWD

GGT

t r o p p u s t e k c a r B

3 C W

M T S W C

2 D D

CWD Gearless / Geared

EC STM D C D S

m m 0 0 0 2 = H R M . n i M

D D C S

M T S

W C

1 D D

D D

DW

R1 WC11)

R2

R1

WC2 1)

CW

WC11)

SW

DW1

R2 WC2

CW

1)

SW FFL ORF

m m 0 2 3 1 + m m H m m C = 0 0 0 5 R 1 2 2 2 H – . – n i 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 2 2 = = H H D C

Shaft layout with centre- opening door R3

DW2

(WC1)1)

EC STM

R4 (WC2) 1)

CWD 3 C W

2 D D

EC STM M T S W C

M T S W C

D D C S

D C D S

m m 0 0 1 2 – 0 0 0 2 = H D

ORF FFL

FFL ORF

R1

DW

R2

WC11)

CW

WC2 1)

1 D D

R1 WC1 1)

DW1

R2

CW

WC2 1)

Machine room

SW

SW

Shaft pit

) t r o p m p m u s 5 t 4 e k 1 c + a r 2 b / h M t i T w S ( m W C m

P9

CW/2 + CWD/2 + 160 mm (with bracket support) CW/2 + CWD/2 + 85 mm Middle elevator car

R

dia. 200 C D

PGG

0

P7

P7

P8

SW

D S

Prerequisites for version with dual entrance:

dia. 200

Door recess dimension R1 or R2 >= 90 mm on main entrance side and R3 or R4 >= 90 mm on rear side; dual entrance is not otherwise possible. R1 - door recess, left R2 - door recess, right 1) The larger value is valid. For the values C1 and C2 see table on Pages 17/18. Pictured load points in the machine room for gearless drive.

H T

m m 0 5 1 1 = P S . n i M

CWD

D D

m m 0 0 1 2 – 0 0 0 2 = H D

CW/2+60mm 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 6 G e a 1

dia. 80 dia. 80

r l e s s / G e a r e d

m m D 0 S 0 6 + D S = D R M

PEC

SW

MRW = SW+800 mm

228

228

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight) Rated load 630 kg ≤ Q ≤ 1050 kg n o i t a s i n r e d o M

Perfo rmance data and principal dimensio ns with si de counterw eight with out / with du al entrance (rope suspensio n 1:1) Rated load 1

Q v TH

Speed Max. travel height Dual entrance Number of passengers (in 1 mm Car width

630

[kg] [m/s] [m]

750

8

Min. CW Max. CW steps) (in 1 mm Car depth Min. CD Max. CD steps) Car height CH Side wall clearance, side GG WC1 WC2 Shaft width Min. SW 3 Max. SW 3 Rear wall clearance Min. WC3 4 Door packet thickness DD Shaft depth (without dual entrance) Min. SD (without dual entrance) Max. SD Max. SD (with dual entrance) Headroom height Min. HR Min. SP Pit depth Clearance - rail bracket Max. l Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM Rope clearance dimension RCD PGG Load point in machine room Load point in machine room PEC Installation eye in machine room E1 Load point in the shaft pit P7 Load point in the shaft pit P8 Load point in the shaft pit P9

825

1.0 40 possible Yes/No 11

10

900

[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]

1500 1050 1750

1150 2000

1200

900

1000

1050

12 1000 1600 1300

13

Yes 14 1100 1450

2100

2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 255 (without bracket support); 330 (with bracket support) 2

140 – 300 1295

1395

2130

1495

2230 70 (without dual entrance)


[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN]

1300 2140

1400

2390

1450

1550

2490

1700

2390

2640

2740

3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm) 1150 2750

2500

2200

CW + 40 variable

63.9 34.4

68.2 36.7

70.9

73.6

38.2

39.7

25.5 81.5 62.5

26.5 86.0 65.5

77.4 41.7

on request on request

29.0 97.0 69.0

30.5 101.5 72.5

10.0 24.0 75.0

59.0

27.5

90.5 68.0

The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Pages 15/16. 2) Without dual entrance: WC1 = 255 mm (without bracket support) with min. CD >= 1520 mm, otherwise WC1 = 330 mm (with bracket support). With dual entrance: WC1 = 255 mm (without bracket support) with min. CD >= 1680 mm, otherwise WC1 = 330 mm (with bracket support). 3) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaf t width must b e determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 4) The horizontal, free clearance between outer 1)

edge of the elevator car and shaft rear wall must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances). The specied dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side.

Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with side counterweight (rope suspension 1:1) Car width

CW CW CW Max. CW Car width CW

= = = = =

Shaft width SW SW SW SW

=

Wall clearance, left WC1

– –

– –

–

(C1 - R1 + IT + "air") (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm)

–

255 mm

–

–

Car gauge between rails CGBR

=

–

– –

–

Wall clearance, right WC2

(C2 - R2 + IT + "Luft") (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 140 mm

2 x distance from elevator car to rail 2 x 20 mm


=

CD CD Max. CD

= = =

Shaft depth SD SD SD

–


–

–

DD

–

–

(155 to 295 mm)

–

–

155 mm

–

Rear wall clearance WC3 70 mm 70 mm

– Installation tolerance, door side – – –

IT 25 mm 25 mm

With dual entrance Car depth

=

CD CD Max. CD

= = =

Shaft depth SD SD SD

IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in

shaft width; R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.

– Thickness of door packet (2nd entrance)

–

Thickness of door packet (1st entrance)

–

DD (1st entrance)

–

DD (2nd entrance)

–

–

(155 to 295 mm)

–

(155 to 295 mm)

–

–

155 mm

–

155 mm

–

–

2 x installation t olerance, door sides 2 x IT 2 x 25 mm 50 mm

229

www.liftequip.com

229

LEMoS

®

Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight) Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg n o i t a s Shaft layout with side-opening doo r i n r e EC STM d o CW STM M D W C

01 m m 0 0 0 2 = H R M . n i M

3 C W

Gearless / Geared

D D C S m m 0 2 3 1 + m m H m m C 0 0 = . 0 5 R 1 2 H 2 2 . – – N I 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 2 2 = = H H D C

D D

R1

DW

WC11)

CW

R2 WC2 1) FFL ORF

SW

Shaft layout with centre- opening door EC STM CW STM

D W C

H T

3 C W

OFF ORF

D D C S

m m 0 5 1 1 = P S . n i M

D D

R1 WC11)

DW CW SW

R2 WC21)

Machine room dia. 200

Shaft pit PGG dia. 80 CW/2+60 mm

dia. 80 dia. 200

P9

PEC

P7

P7

P8

SW

230

D S

0 0 2 0 0 2 0 6 1

D C R m m D 0 S 0 5 + D S = D R M

Gearless / Geared

R1 - door recess, left R2 - door recess, right 1) The larger value is valid. For the values C1 and C2 see table on Pages 17/18. Pictured load points in the machine room for gearless drive.

=

=

SW

MRW = SW+550 mm

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight) Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg n o i t a s i n r e d o M

Perfo rmance data and principal dimensio ns with rear count erweight wi thou t dual entrance (rope suspension 1.1) Rated load 1

Q

[kg]

Speed

v

[m/s]

Max. travel height

TH

[m]

320

350

375

400

425

450

500

550

1.0 40

25

Dual entrance

No 4

Number of passengers (in 1 mm

Min. CW

[mm]

steps)

Max. CW

[mm]

(in 1 mm

Min. CD

[mm]

steps)

Max. CD

[mm]

Car height

CH

[mm]

Side wall clearance, side GG

WC1/WC2 [mm]

Shaft width

Min. SW 2

Car width Car depth

5

6

7

800

850

1050

1100

1200

1300

1100

1200

1300

1350

1350

1400

950

850 1450

1500

1550

2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 140 – 300 1080

[mm] 1650

Max. SW 2 [mm]

1700

1130

1900

1800

1950

2000

Rear wall clearance

WC3 3

[mm]

225 (for counterweight 100 mm)


DD

[mm]


Shaft depth

Min. SD

[mm]

Max. SD

[mm]

Headroom height

Min. HR

[mm]

Pit depth

Min. SP

[mm]

Clearance - rail bracket

Max. l

[mm]

1650

1255 4 1645

1355

2045 1895 1945 3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm)

1745

1845

2095

2195

1150 / 1550 5 2500

2450

2400

2200

2150

2100

2000

2000

39.9

40.9

43.0

48.4

21.5

22.1

23.2

26.1

CW + 40

Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM

[mm]


RCD

[mm]


PGG

[kN]

35.7

36.8

37.5

38.5


PEC

[kN]

19.2

19.9

20.3

20.8

Installation eye in machine room

E1

[kN]


P7

[kN]

13.1

13.6

13.9

14.3

13.7

14.1

16.0

17.4


P8

[kN]

40.5

42.2

43.8

45.3

43.1

44.8

52.3

58.7


P9

[kN]

32.3

33.4

34.1

34.9

36.4

36.9

39.4

44.1

variable

5.0

1)

The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Page 15. 2) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and outer edge of the counterweight must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances). The specied dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side. 4) Smaller shaft depths are possible on request and after the project planning has been technically reviewed. 5) The minimum pit depth is 1550 mm for CW x CD = 800 x 1100 - 1200 mm and for CD = 850 to 950 mm.

Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with rear counterweight (rope suspension 1:1) Car width

=

Shaft width

–


–


CW

=

SW

–

WC1

–

WC2

CW

=

SW

–

CW

=

SW

–

Max. CW

=

SW

–

Car width

=


CW

=

CGBR

– (C1 - R1 + IT + "air") (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm) –

140 mm

(C2 - R2 + IT + "air") (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 140 mm

–

– –



= Shaft depth – Door packet thickness –

Rear wall clearance


CD

=

SD

–

DD

–

WC3

–

IT

CD

=

SD

–

(155 to 295 mm)

–

225 mm

–

25 mm

Max. CD

=

SD

–

155 mm

–

225 mm

–

25 mm


www.liftequip.com

231

LEMoS

®

Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight) Rated load 630 kg ≤ Q ≤ 1000 kg n o i t a s Perfo rmance data and principal dimensio ns with rear count erweight wi thou t dual entrance (rope suspension 1.1) i n r e 630 750 825 900 Q [kg] d Rated load 1 o Speed 1.0 v [m/s] M Max. travel height 40 [m] TH Dual entrance Number of passengers (in 1 mm Car width

8

Min. CW Max. CW steps) (in 1 mm Car depth Min. CD Max. CD steps) Car height CH Side wall clearance, side GG WC1 WC2 Shaft width Min. SW 2 Max. SW 2 Rear wall clearance WC3 3 Door packet thickness DD Shaft depth Min. SD Max. SD Min. HR Headroom height Pit depth Min. SP Clearance - rail bracket Max. l Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM Rope clearance dimension RCD PGG Load point in machine room Load point in machine room PEC Installation eye in machine room E1 P7 Load point in the shaft pit Load point in the shaft pit P8 Load point in the shaft pit P9

No 11

10

900

[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN]

1500 1050 1750

1000

12 1000

13 1100

1300 2100

1450

1600 1150 2000

1200

2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 255 (without bracket support); 330 (with bracket support) 2

140 – 300 1180

1280

2100

1380

2200 255 (for counterweight 135 mm)

155 – 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18) 1485 2325

1585 2575

1635

1735 2675

1885

3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm) 1150 2750

2500

CW + 40 variable

63.9

68.2 36.7

34.4 24.0 75.0

25.5 81.5 62.5

59.0

70.9

73.6

38.2 10.0 26.5 86.0 65.5

39.7 27.5

90.5 68.0

77.4 41.7

29.0 97.0 69.0

The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Page 15. 2) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for pro ject planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and outer edge of the counterweight must be at least 50 mm (including installation 1)

tolerances). The specied dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side.

Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with rear counterweight (rope suspension 1:1) Car width

=

Shaft width

–


–


CW

=

SW

–

WC1

–

WC2

CW

=

SW

–

CW

=

SW

–

(C1 - R1 + IT + "air") (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm)

Max. CW

=

SW

–

140 mm

Car width

=


CW

=

CGBR

– –

–

(C2 - R2 + IT + "air") (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm)

–

140 mm

–



=

CD

=

SD

–

DD

–

WC3

–

IT

CD

=

SD

–

(155 to 295 mm)

–

255 mm

–

25 mm

Max. CD

=

SD

–

155 mm

–

255 mm

–

25 mm

Shaft depth – Door packet thickness –

Rear wall clearance



232

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

Project Planning Data (without dual entrance)

Rated load depending on c ar width and car depth Rated loads Q [kg]

Car width CW [mm] 800

850

900

950

1000

1050

1100

1150

1200

1250

1300

1350

1400

1450

1500

1550

1600

320

350

350

375

375

400

425

425

450

475

500

500

525

320

350

350

375

400

400

425

450

450

475

500

525

550

575

320

350

350

375

400

425

425

450

475

500

525

550

575

600

600

320

350

350

375

400

425

425

450

475

500

525

550

575

600

630

650

475

500

525

550

575

630

630

675

700

850

900 950 1000

] m m [ D C h t p e d r a C

1050

320

350

350

375

400

425

425

450

1100

320

350

375

400

425

425

475

475

500

550

575

600

630

650

675

700

725

1150

350

375

400

425

425

450

475

525

550

575

600

630

650

675

725

750

775

1200

350

375

400

425

450

475

500

550

575

600

630

650

700

725

750

775

800

1250

375

400

425

450

475

500

550

575

600

630

675

700

725

750

800

825

850

1300

400

425

450

475

500

525

575

600

630

675

700

725

750

800

825

850

900

1350

400

425

450

500

525

550

600

630

650

700

725

775

800

825

875

900

925

1400

425

450

475

525

550

575

630

650

700

725

750

800

825

875

900

925

975

1450

425

475

500

550

575

630

650

675

725

750

800

825

875

900

950

975

1000

1500

450

475

525

575

600

630

675

725

750

800

825

875

900

950

975

1550

475

500

550

600

630

675

700

750

775

825

850

900

925

975

1600

475

525

575

600

650

700

725

775

800

850

900

925

975

1000

1650

500

550

600

630

675

725

750

800

850

875

925

975

1000

1700

525

575

630

650

700

750

775

825

875

925

950

1000

1750

550

600

630

675

725

775

825

850

900

950

1000

1800

575

600

650

700

750

800

850

875

925

975

1850

575

630

675

725

775

825

875

925

950

1000

1900

600

650

700

750

800

850

900

850

1000

1950

630

675

725

775

825

875

925

975

2000

650

700

750

800

850

900

950

1000

2050

675

725

775

825

875

925

975

2100

675

750

800

850

900

950

1000


Determination of the rated loads in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.1, table 1.1 for passenger elevators, with consideration given to an available area in the entrance area with closed door of 0.072 m2 (door model ThyssenKrupp K8A, door type M2T / dual panel, one-sided telescoping, side-opening, door width DW = 900 mm). When using other door models and door types, rated loads may vary from these values.

Number of persons depending on rated load Q Rated loads

Q

[kg]

100

180

225

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

[m ]

0.28

0.49

0.60

0.79

0.98

1.17

1.31

[kg]

630

675

750

8

9 1.59

Number of persons 2

Min. available area in elevator car

Rated loads

Q

Number of persons Min. available area in elevator car

2

[m ]

1.45

320

800

350

375

400

425

975

1000

450

825

900

10

11

12

13

14

1.73

1.87

2.01

2.15

2.29

500

525

1050

Determination of the number of persons in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.3 (person weight 75 kg) or table 1.2.

www.liftequip.com

233

LEMoS

®

Project Planning Data (with dual entrance) n o i t a s Rated load depending on c ar width and car depth i n r e Rated loads d o Q [kg] 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 M

Car width CW [mm] 1100

1150

1200

1250

1300

1350

1400

1450

1500

1550

1600

575

600

630

630

675

700

575

600

630

650

675

700

725

850

900 950 1000 1050

575

600

630

650

700

725

750

775

575

600

630

675

700

725

750

775

800

1100 1150

575

600

630

675

700

725

750

800

825

850

575

600

630

675

700

725

775

800

825

850

575

600

630

675

700

725

775

800

825

875

900 950 975

900 925 975 1000 1050

1200 1250 1300 ] m m [ D C h t p e d r a C

1350

575

600

630

675

700

725

775

800

825

875

1400

600

630

650

700

725

775

800

825

875

575

630

650

700

725

750

800

825

875

900

900 950

900 950 975

1025 1050

1450 1500

575

600

630

675

725

750

800

825

875

900

950

975

1025

1550

600

630

675

700

750

775

825

850

900

950

975

1025

1050

1600

600

650

700

725

775

800

850

900

925

975

1000

1050

1650

630

675

725

750

800

850

875

925

975

975

1050

1700

650

700

750

775

825

875

900

950

1000

1050

1750

675

725

775

800

850

900

950

975

1025

1800

700

750

800

825

875

925

975

1025

1050

1850

725

775

825

875

900

950

1000

1050

1900

750

800

850

900

925

975

1025

1950

775

825

875

925

975

1025

1050

2000

800

850

900

950

1000

1050

2050

825

875

925

975

1025

2100

825

900

950

1000

1050

Determination of the rated loads in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.1, table 1.1 for passenger elevators, with consideration given to an available area in the entrance area with closed door of 0.072 m2 (door model ThyssenKrupp K8A, door type M2T / dual panel, one-sided telescoping, side-opening, door width DW = 900 mm). When using other door models and door types, rated loads may vary from these values.

234

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

Project Planning Data (door mountings)

Decision-making aid for selecting a suitable door model S8A / K8A

Door model

-

2000 C-MOD

High-quality, elegant and efcient door

-

Economical solution for many common applications

-

Compact dimensions: low installation depth and width, ideal for narrow shafts

-

Further usage of existing swing landing doors possible

-

Version with asymmetric entrance offers additional planning freedom

-

Further usage of existing swing landing doors possible

series

-

Robust and reliable, even under challenging application conditions

-

Extensive range of re protection certications and many options

Special advantages

FINELINE

Dimensions of t he landing doors for project planning T T

T T

C1 C1

TB

Dimensioned drawing for side-opening door (left-opening version shown)

Door model

Door type M2T (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, left-opening)

S8A / K8A

M2T (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, right-opening)

Door width DW [mm]

C2

M2Z (dual panel, centre-opening) S8A / K8A

M4TZ (quadruple panel, telescoping, centre-opening)

Dimensioned drawing for centre-opening door (dual panel version shown)

Space requirement of door panels (in shaft width) C 1 [mm]

700

400

750

425

800

450

850

475

900

500

C 2 [mm]

150

700

400

750

425

800

S8A / K8A

S8A / K8A

TB

C2

150

450

850

475

900

500

700

400

400

750

425

425

800

450

450

850

475

475

900

500

500

800

250

250

850

265

265

900

275

275

Door packet thickness DD [mm]

295 (incl. door frame)




For dimensions C1 and C2 and for the dimension of door packet thickness TT, no shaft and dimensional tolerances are included in the calculation. To determine the maximum car width and maximum car depth in an existing elevator shaft, the spa ce requirements of the doors must be taken into consideration. Listed in the above table are the values for C1, C2 and DD for the various door models and door types. Furth er door designs possible on request.

www.liftequip.com

235

LEMoS

®

Project Planning Data (door mountings) n o i t a s Dimensions of t he landing doors for project planning i n r e Door width d Door model Door type o DW [mm] M 2L (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, left-opening) 2000 C-MOD

2R (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, right-opening) 2000 C-MOD

2000 C-MOD

4S (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening, symmetric) FINELINE

FINELINE

FINELINE

4/AS-L (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening, asymmetric left)

4/AS-R (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening, asymmetric right)

C 1 [mm]

650

390

700

415

750

440

800

465

850

490

900

515

DD [mm]

100

230 (not including depth of the door frame)

390

700

415

750

100

440 465

850

490

900

515

650

210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100) 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100)

700

210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100) 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100)

750

225

225

800

235

235

850

250

250

900

260

260

650

205

205

700

205

205

750

215

215

800

230

230

850

240

240

900

255

255

650

255

700

260

750

290

800

310

850

340

900

360

145

650

255

700

260

750 800

145


C 2 [mm]

650

800

4Z (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening)

Space requirement of door panels (in shaft width)

290 310

850

340

900

360






For dimensions C1 and C2 and for the dimension of door packet thickness, no shaft and dimensional tolerances are included in the calculation. To determine the maximum car width and maximum car depth in a n existing elevator shaft, the space requirements of the doors must be taken into consideration. Listed in the above table are the values for C 1, C2 and DD for the various door models and door types.

236

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

Technical Data

Technical data, installed compo nents and electric al data Rated load

Q

[kg]

Speed

v

[m/s]

Max. travel height

Max. TH

[m]

320

350

375

400

500

EC 1

430 – 580

435 – 590

450 – 610

475 – 725

40

[kg]

400 – 540

410 – 550

415 – 555

420 – 560

TW 45 C

Geared

Nominal power Max. mains power

2, 3

Mains rated current 2, 3 Max. mains current

2, 3

[kW]

2.7

2.9

3.0

[kVA]

6.4

6.7

[A]

5.1

5.5

[A]

9.2

9.7

Diameter of traction sheave

DT

[mm]

Suspension ropes

n x dS

[mm]

Max. mains power

2, 3

Mains rated current

2, 3

Max. mains current

2, 3

3.2

3.4

3.6

3.9

4.3

7.0

7.3

7.6

7.9

8.6

9.4

5.8

6.1

6.5

6.8

7.6

8.3

10.1

10.5

11.0

11.4

12.4

13.6

10 x 6

12 x 6

440 7x8 PMC 145-2 M

PMC 145-2 L

[kW]

2.38

3.69

[kVA]

4.1

6.3

[A]

4.1

6.6

[A]

5.9

Gearless

Nominal power


DT

[mm]

Suspension ropes

n x dS

[mm]

9.1 240

6x6

7x6

8x6

Elevator-car guide rails

T 70/B

Counterweight guides

T 50/A

Elevator-car buffer Counterweight buffer

1 x 100x80 A

n x type

2 x 100x80 A 1 x 100x80 A

n x type 630

750

825

Rated load

Q

[kg]

Speed

v

[m/s]

1.0

Max. travel height

Max. TH

[m]

40

Dual entrance

900

1000

possible

Mass of car (P 1000 SV) Drive

EC

1

[kg]

550 – 680

550 – 950

590 – 980

Yes

610 – 1000

TW 45 C

Geared

1050

630 – 1020

650 – 1050

700 – 1100

TW 63 B

Nominal power

[kW]

4.8

4.8

5.3

5.8

6.7

7.4

7.7

Max. mains power 2, 3

[kVA]

10.2

12.3

13.6

14.6

15.6

16.7

17.4

Mains rated current 2, 3

[A]

9.3

9.4

10.3

11.2

12.9

14.2

14.9

Max. mains current 2, 3

[A]

14.7

17.7

19.6 590

21

22.5

24.1

25.1

Diameter of traction sheave Suspension ropes Drive

550

No

Mass of car (P 450 SV)

Drive

450

1.0

Dual entrance Drive

425


DT n x dS

[mm]

440

[mm]

7x8

5 x 10

510 6 x 10

7 x 10

PMC 145 M / PMC 170 M / DAF 210 L

Gearless

PMC 170 XL / DAF 270 M

Nominal power

[kW]

4.8

5.8

Max. mains power 2, 3

[kVA]

8.8

11.9

Mains rated current 2, 3

[A]

9.3

13.1

Max. mains current 2, 3

[A]

12.7

17.1


DT

[mm]

Suspension ropes

n x dS

[mm]

320 7x8

8x8

T 89/B

Elevator-car guide rails

T 50/A

Counterweight guides Elevator-car buffer Counterweight buffer

2 x 100x80 A

n x type n x type

1 x 125x80 A

2 x 125x80 A 2 x 100x80 A

Equipment features for determining the elevator car weights: Min. EC: without dual entrance, door model FINELINE, hand-rail, without mirror, plastic ooring material, 2 mm. Max. EC: with dual entrance, door model K8A, hand-rail, mirror, plastic ooring material, 2 mm. 2) For 400 V / 50 Hz. 3) The specied powers and currents are average values 1)

for orientation, are based on the actu ally installed components and increase depending on the project according to elevator control unit, the number of landings, the type and number of operating and indicator elements, the car lighting and other electrical power consumers (e.g. fans).

www.liftequip.com

237

LEMoS

®

Elevator Car Design n o i t a s i n r e d o M

Colours / materials

WVSG

WVCW

Trafc White RAL 9016 /

Galvanised steel

WVSL

WVSF



Colour RAL / powder coating

powder coating

Grain 220/stainless steel ferritic

WVSE

WVCC

WVSA Grain 220/stainless steel austenitic

Car ceiling and lighting systems

Mirrors

Half mirror BTHM Mirror, entire height BBWD

SpotLED

SlimLED

Without lighting

Trafc white RAL 9016 /



powder coating, CWFS stainless steel grain 220, CSFS

powder coating, CWSL stainless steel grain 220, CSSL

powder coating, CWNL

Flooring material

FNES Black Stone / rubber

FRKB Kayar Black / rubber

FPDG Dove Grey / vinyl

FRKG Kayar Grey / rubber

FRIC Ice / rubber

FOEO Dark Brushed Oak / PVC

Prepared for ooring material of up to 25 mm to be provided by customer

Hand rail Handrails

Stainless steel Grain 220 dia. 4 0 mm straight version Rear wall, side walls

Stainless steel Grain 220 dia. 40 mm bowed version Rear wall, side walls

Stainless steel Grain 220 dia. 40 mm bowed version, all round L-layout, U-layout

Skirt guards

Optional

238

Grain 220 stainless steel 50 mm SBSS

Aluminium 30 mm SBAA

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

Elevator Car Design

Design variants VERTICAL A

VERTICAL B

VERTICAL C

Colours / materials

Galvanised steel

Trafc White /

WVSG

powder coating WVCW

Grain 220 stainless steel WVSF

WVCW

WVSF

CWFS

CWFS

CSSL

SBAA

SBAA

SBSS

without

FRKG

FRKB

without

HSRE + HSLT

HCIL

without

BTHM

BBWD


Wall WVSG Car ceiling with lighting systems Skirt guard Flooring material Hand rail Mirrors

The elevator car can also be supplied in galvanised sheet metal as the design for customer lining. Please specify the customer-designed equipment with weight.

VERTICAL

The elevator car is prepared for installation of a COP (car operating panel) as installation panel by the customer. On account of the selfsupporting construction no through-holes or openings may be provided in the walls (exception: cable lead-through).

www.liftequip.com

239

LEMoS

®

Car Design Options n Elevator car P450SV / P1000SV design options o i t a s i VERTICAL n Code r Colours / materials selection e d o M Walls (VERTICAL design line) Galvanised steel


BTHM

WVCW

Full height mirror without dots pattern

BBWD


WVSE

Grain 220 / stainless steel austenitic

WVSL WVSF WVSA

VERTICAL selection

Mirror on the rear wall of the car

Half mirror from height of hand-rail to cover

WVCC

Grain 220 / stainless steel ferritic

Code

WVSG

Colour / RAL powder coating


Colours / materials

Handrails in the elevator car

Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm version, straight on rear wall, rear

HSRE

on side wall, right

HSRI

on side wall, left

HSLT

Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm, bowed version on rear wall, rear

HBRE

on side wall, right

HBRI

on side wall, left

HBLT

Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm, bowed version, surrounding Car front walls

Galvanised steel


DPSG

DPCW

L-layout (on rear and side wall, opposite CIOP)

HCIL

U-layout (on three sides)

HCIU

Skirt guards in the elevator car

Colour / RAL powder coating

DPCC

Stainless steel grain 220 h = 50 mm without lighting

SBSS


DPSE

Aluminium h = 30 mm without lighting

SBAA


DPSL

Grain 220 / stainless steel ferritic

DPSF

Grain 220 / stainless steel austenitic

DPSA

Car ceiling and lighting

SpotLED Trafc White RAL 9016 / powder coating SpotLED grain 220 / austenitic stainless steel

SlimLED Trafc White RAL 9016 / powder coating

CWFS CSFS CWSL

SlimLED grain 220 / austenitic stainless steel

CSSL

Without lighting Trafc White RAL 9016 / powder coating

CWNL

Flooring material in the elevator car

Black Stone / rubber

FNES

Kayar Black / rubber

FRKB

Kayar Grey / rubber

FRKG

Ice / rubber

FRIC

Dove Grey / vinyl

FPDG

Dark Brushed Oak / PVC

FOEO

Without ooring material Option

240

Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

®

Lighting System

LED Lighting

Through the use of highly efcient and energy-saving LED lighting, energy

savings up to 78% over uorescent


lamps can be achieved.

W

White LED

W

LED strips With indirect lighting over the skirt guard, the LED lighting system offers you a special accent with soft light. Our atmospheric RGB LED lighting system offers you a broad spectrum of colored light.

RGB LED: all colors available on the skirt guard

www.liftequip.com

241

Technical Report

Technical Report Solutions for modernisation with components s t n e n o p m o c h t i w n o i t a s i n r e d o m r o f s n o i t u l o S t r o p e R l a c i h c e T

Solutions for modernization with components The elevator markets in Germany and many parts of Europe have a hig h number of existing installations, some of which are more than 25 years old. Due to the considerable age of these installations and safety-related considerations, as well as the need for necessary repairs and conversions, many of these installations have to be fundamentally renovated. It may also be necessary to modernize existing elevators as part of building renovation programmes and changes of use. In such cases, the installation is often completely replaced. The market potential in terms of modernization is therefore significantly greater than for new installations which are either in planning or have already been fitted. The majority of these installations still have a machine room, which it would then be advisable to keep in service, even in the case of modernization. Modernizations which, without a compelling reason, forgo the continued use of an existing machine room, should therefore be carefully examined in order to check that measures in place for rescuing elevator passengers, maintenance and installation inspection are not encumbered as a result. Complete replacement with an MRL system is frequently proposed as a modernization solution when suppliers are not able to offer project-related and customized solutions.

Whenever a modernization is planned, it is therefore necessary to check the current situation regarding the installation in terms of up-to-dateness, by using the available drawings and technical documents (register), and to document the actual status with photographs.

 Bracket

Modernization concepts, the selection of components and schedules must always be coordinated in detail.

 Access

When installations are modernized, experience shows that noise behaviour in the building can change perceptibly in connection with changes made to the elevator. It is therefore recommended that noise and passenger comfort should be measured before the conversion, in order for these measurements to then be used as comparison measurements after the modernization is completed. Because the total amount of time and resources required for modernization is not limited only to the elevator components, the surrounding area should also be included in the examination during the planning stage. The following general conditions should also be considered:

242

f astenings (masonry situa-

tion)  Shaft

openings (position and size)

 Existing

concrete foundations in machine room and pit (retain or remove)

 Dust-free

conversion

to the building during the conversion

 Transport

paths in the building for the conversion

 …

This means that, in the area surrounding the modernization, it must be possible to adapt the solutions and packages flexibly to the particular application conditions of the installation. Some requirements that should be taken into consideration are detailed below. Some requirements may also arise in combination:  Optimization

of the elevator car size

With an elevator car that can be flexibly configured with integrated car sling for gauge reduction, the internal car area can be optimized, given the available shaft cross section. When doors with corresponding pad

 Changes

that affect structural aspects (ceiling loads, wall fastenings and pit stresses)

 Further

usage of existing ceiling and wall openings

Figure 1: Shaft utilisation

46

UK

Figure 2: Elevator car with integrated car sling and flexible dimensions

LIFT-REPORT

40. Jahrg. (2014)

Heft 1

Issue 09/2015

Technical Report

Technical Report Solutions for modernisation with components thicknesses and installation dimensions are also used, in many cases this optimization makes it is possible to use a door with a width of 900 mm and a floor area which fulfil the requirements for a type of elevator that can be used by the disabled.  Door

openings

When the existing door openings on the floors can continue to be used as a result of appropriate planning, this means a considerable reduction in the additional measures taken by the customer. Old hinged-door frames can be retained and the sliding doors placed behind them. By panelling the frames, the closure to the masonry on the floor can then be made dust-free.

Figure 6: DAF210 with adaptation to TW63 frame with rope guard

Figure 4: LIOP, LOP, LIP

verter is also state-of-the-art practice and energy-efficient solutions with power regeneration are used more frequently even in the lower range of performance. Machine base frames for adaptation to local conditions can also be supplied in many cases. In terms of service and maintenance, both drive concepts are comparable, since brake manufacturers can alternatively also supply brakes with manual release for gearless brakes.

Figure 3: Panelled hinged-door frame with telescopic door

 Operating

and indicator elements

On the landing, LOP, LIOP, LIP panels with integrated electrics for simple cabling to the control system can be fitted as desired on the door frame or the masonry as flat attachment elements with different button designs. The requirements of EN 81-70 are then also met.  Gearless

48

www.liftequip.com

Figure 7: DAF270 with adaptation to TW130 frame with rope guard

Gears can be placed either with an adapter onto the existing frame or onto the foundation. For using gearless drives in the machine room, corresponding solutions with an optional traction sheave cover are available. All solutions are designed with appropriate insulation for sound-optimized installation. When adjacent drives are replaced, solutions with a gearless system and traction sheave in the shaft are available, which are placed in the wall opening.

or geared

For the drive, a check must be made to see whether an existing gear with large traction sheave should be replaced by a gear with large traction sheave or whether a gearless system with 2:1 suspension and smaller traction sheave is used. In modernization, the use of a frequency con-

s t n e n o p m o c h t i w n o i t a s i n r e d o m r o f s n o i t u l o S t r o p e R l a c i h c e T

Figure 5: ModKit with PMC 170

Figure 8: DAF210 as a replacement for lower

 Drum

drive as a special solution

Where space is very restricted, the solution with a drum drive is a possible alternative to the hydraulic or traction sheave elevator. EN 81-1 also describes the standard requirements for drum-drive elevators. Worm gears are generally used for the drive, while the use of gearless drives is limited in terms of rated load due to the required diameter of the traction sheave.

LIFT-REPORT

40. Jahrg. (2014)

Heft 1

243

Technical Report

Technical report Solutions for modernisation with components s t n e n o p m o c h t i w n o i t a s i n r e d o m r o f s n o i t u l o S t r o p e R l a c i h c e T

 Installation

When replacing parts, a check must be made to see whether components such as rails, brackets and the counterweight can, in fact, be used again. If they can, a considerable amount of installation time and effort, using dowels and transporting material, can be avoided. As a result, it may also be possible to reduce the length of time required for the conversion.  Modular

Figure 9: DAF270 with traction sheave in the shaft

Figure 10: Drum drive with gear TW130

LIFT-REPORT

40. Jahrg. (2014)

Heft 1

modernization

Based on an overall concept for the modernization, it is possible to implement the measures in several steps, when this is not possible in one step for budgetary reasons, for example. It is then ensured that, on completion of the entire modernization, the installation features stateof-the-art technology and no unnecessary costs are incurred through repeatedly replacing components.  Energy

244

part replacement

ef ficiency

Depending of the type of use (number of runs, equipment, etc.), the focus must be placed on reducing either the travelling requirement or the standby requirement. In VDI 4707 Part 2, the process has now been defined as to how, using component characteristic values, an energy efficiency analysis can be carried out even as part of the modernization planning (forecast tool).

 Structural

aspects

When the loads on an installation are increased, a change in or recalculation of the statics is always necessary. In many cases, one solution here can be to distribute the loading onto the shaft ceiling via a load distribution beam. This measure can also be helpful on occasions when, because of the installation situation, new ceiling openings have to be created. The drives are protected from vibration when placed on these beams. To further optimise the noise situation, it may be advisable in certain cases to also provide additional antivibrating elements underneath the beams. In this case, the rubber-metal connections should be designed accordingly. When individual components are replaced, all components to be changed and the different effects on the overall system during replacement must be assessed.  UCM

(unintended car movement)

As part of a modernization operation, a check must always be made to see what measures must be implemented in relation to the requirements according to A3. Replacing a drive always makes it necessary to carry out an assessment according to EN 81-1:A3 (UCM) and implement the necessary measures. In this

49

Issue 09/2015

Technical Report

Technical report Solutions for modernisation with components

case, comprehensive planning is required, which, in many cases, should be combined with simultaneous replacement of the control system, since the majority of control system developers offer A3 functionality as a pre-integrated feature in their current control systems. The solution is often easier to implement than networking the different components with additional detection systems. When a control system is later replaced, these components may no longer be required. When implementing the requirements of A3, it may be easier to forgo a levelling operation with earlyopening doors and demonstrate via rope elongation that, due to the buffering during loading, relevelling is not necessary. In this case, it is sufficient if the installation is securely stopped at the landing via a safety brake, as found on the gearless system in the form of an operational

www.liftequip.com

brake, or via an emergency brake system (NBS) on the gear.

Summary In Germany and in parts of Europe, the market volume in terms of modernization is significantly greater than the market for new installations. Types of modernization may turn out to be very different according to the local situation and the particular supplier. Approaches to modernization range from the typical replacement of individual components to modular and scalable replacement solutions, through to the complete replacement of the entire elevator system. All these solution options should be viewed in terms of a project in order for a solution to be found, on the basis of a technical and economic assessment, that is customized to the requirements of both customer and operator.

In the process, flexibly adjusted car dimensions can be assessed for optimum space utilisation. In the report, the different concepts will also be assessed on the basis of examples, in order for a technical and economic assessment of the solution options to be made. In the view of the operators and in respect of safety for ser vicing personnel, continuing to use existing machine rooms is to be preferred, provided that this space is not otherwise required for reasons of building use (e.g addition).

s t n e n o p m o c h t i w n o i t a s i n r e d o m r o f s n o i t u l o S t r o p e R l a c i h c e T

In existing installations, headrooms and shaft pits are generally sufficiently large, so that measures for temporary safety spaces are not necessary. A special application where space is restricted may take the form of a solution with a drum drive.

LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components GmbH, D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F.

245

246

Issue 09/2015

Safety

BASIC SAFETY PRACTICES FOR LIFTS

s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B

Disclaimer: The present ELA “Basic Safety Practices for Lifts” booklet is intended as a tool among others to help controlling safety risks. It is for general information purposes only and should not be construed as legal advice. It is not intended as a substitute for each company’s own assessment and decision making. LiftEquip declines any and all liability for any measure taken or not taken on the basis of the present booklet.

www.liftequip.com

247

Safety

INTRODUCTION


Installing, maintaining, repairing, and modernizing lis are acvies leading to exposure to specic risks. In order to migate these risks and help promote an injury-free workplace, professionals are therefore required to follow specic safety pracces and work methods. This ELA “Basic Safety Pracces” booklet gathers general and specic safety pracces which should be followed at all mes. This booklet has been designed, in the rst instance, for providers of installaon, maintenance, repair, and modernizaon services for lis. These service providers have a legal obligaon and responsibility to protect their employees against any risks related to their acvies. The booklet provides guidance in quong examples of protecon means which – when put in place adequately – will help aain the best level of protecon to, among others, contractor’s and subcontractor’s employees. It is also the company responsibly to idenfy, understand and comply will all the applicable local, regional, country and European requirements and laws. Equally, this booklet has also been designed for the employees. Indeed, the employee is responsible for following the safety pracces and for using the protecon equipment provided by his/her company. The booklet will help him/ her to understand the risks and, where needed, to require the necessary addional protecon means from his/her company. Safety pracces are generally based upon common sense. They have been set following the lessons learnt from many years of incidents, some of them very serious and leading to death. Some of the safety pracces are parcularly important: these are the VITAL rules. As clearly stated, these rules are VITAL for the preservaon of life itself. Should they not be followed, the result could be very serious or even fatal injuries.

(3)

248

Issue 09/2015

Safety

INTRODUCTION

This ELA “Basic Safety Pracces” booklet addresses most of the risks and situaons encountered in the li acvity. It provides guidelines and examples on how to protect against the risks and help starng the safety journey. However, this booklet should not be seen as an exhausve set of rules covering all the complexity of our work. It remains the responsibility of the company concerned to conduct its own risk assessment and provide the right prevenve measures. Your business as a contractor or subcontractor and your life as a worker depend on the strict applicaon of all safety pracces. Ensure their respect and respect them at all mes.


Finally, in case of a doubt, should anyone feel that the situaon is not fully under control, STOP working immediately and ask for support. The Eding Team

Disclaimer: The present ELA “Basic Safety Pracces for Lis” booklet is intended as a tool among others to help controlling safety risks. It is for general informaon purposes only and should not be construed as legal advice. It is not intended as a substute for each company’s own assessment and decision making. ELA declines any and all liability for any measure taken or not taken on the basis of the present booklet. © 2015 European Li Associaon (ELA) aisbl Belgium - All rights reserved.

(4) www.liftequip.com

249

Safety


N O I T C U D O R T N I

s o t s e b s A

s t c e j b o g n i l l a F

g n i l i e c n o t r u h f o k s i R

g n i p p i r t f o k s i R

t e i n h t u f t o n p e c o t a j n d o a h d s n a u r y c a f o w t k s i s i o R h

t n e m p n i o u q d r e g a z n a i h v o g n i m h d s e t u r c C e t o r p n u

d r a z a h l a c i r t c e l E

s o t s e b s A

s t c e j b o g n i l l a F


t h g i r e o g w t a n i r v e h e l t s n e u r u t c o n f c e , c o r a j k a s c d i R e a r h t o y b


p i l s f o k s i R


p i l s f o k s i R


p i l s f o k s i R

e n i h c a m m o o r o t e s n i s h e c c a c a m – r l o l / a f d f n o a k s i R


r m a c o e r f h l t l f a o f f p o t k o s i e R h t


e r e h t d d a m l o t r f i p l l r a f o f g o n i k d s n i a R l

: s k s i r e h t f o y r a m m u S (5)

250

Issue 09/2015

Safety

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)

Like all professionals – remen, policemen, welders etc. – or any sportsman – fencing, maral art – wearing personal protecve equipment allows one to perform the acvity in the best safe condions. The company has the responsibility to provide this Personal Protecve Equipment to all their employees. The employee has the responsibility to wear and use them and require them to be replaced if damaged.


2 types of protecve equipment are presented: n n

The personal protecve equipment which protects the body from an injury. The means of fall protecon which prevents the employee from falling from heights.

(6)

www.liftequip.com

251

Safety

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)


Glasses: n Are mandatory when there is a risk of ying objects (such as drilling, grinding…) n Recommended when using chemical products

Safety helmet required: n When there is a risk of falling objects n Are mandatory on all construcon sites Check the helmet following the manufacturer’s recommendaon! Protecve caps are: n Recommended all mes to protect against injuries in small machine room or work in the hoistway

Ear protecon: n Mandatory if noise > 85 dB(A)

Required gloves: n Heavy duty gloves when doing manual handling. n Cut protecve when performing repairs, using tools, etc. n Electrical gloves for work on potenal live equipment n Chemical gloves when using chemical products.

Fall protecon equipment are mandatory when there is a risk of fall: n Fall Arrest system allows the arrest of a fall n Fall Restraint prevents approaching the gap

Safety shoes: n An-slip, an-perforang. n Toe protecon against falling objects. n A heel to get a beer grip when climbing a ladder n Preferably providing protecon for the ankle

Working clothes: n Protect against cuts, dirt, etc. n Idenfy the company

Avoid wearing: n Metal watches, bracelets, necklaces, rings etc. when working on a live electrical equipment n Uned clothes that could be caught in unprotected moving equipment n Ties, scarves that could be caught in unprotected moving equipment Remember: n Addional safety requirements such as glasses, high visibility jacket… could be required locally!

(7)

252

Issue 09/2015

Safety

FALL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT Primary protecon means: the balustrade or guardrail A balustrade or guardrail should always have at least the following component: Top rail Mid rail Toe guard

Check the dimension in local regulaon!

Guardrail or balustrade shall be installed if a risk of fall exists as dened in the local regulaon (for example, gap>30 cm and working area >2 m): • On top of the car • On top of temporary working plaorm. • On a scaold. • On edge of a building. • In hoistway / sha opening.

Secondary protecon means: fall arrest system or fall restrain system


Fall Restraint System: PREVENTS a fall

Fall Arrest System: STOPS the fall Fall Arrest System includes:

Fall Restraint includes:

→ Body harness EN 361 → Short lanyard EN 355 with shock absorber → Connectors to aach the harness EN 362

→ → → →

Body harness EN 361 OR Belt EN 358 Adjustable lanyard EN 355 Connectors to aach to harness EN362

All fall protecon equipment: • Is individual: every employee exposed shall be provided with one • Must be formally inspected 1/year by a competent person (supplier or any trained person) • Must be checked before each use

Hooking points On the top of the car, unit in service

Other situaons: the life line Example of life line:

Life line made of cord with its aachment point for harness

The car beam is generally considered as an adequate hooking point for the fall arrest system.

Retractable life line

The life line shall be xed to an adequate hooking point with the right capacity as per local regulaon. The life line shall be protected against sharp edge.

The company to list the authorized hooking points.

When working on the car: • Aach aer accessing • Detach before egressing

• • •

This is to prevent sll being aached when pung the unit back in service.

•

Use life line when working on: Temporary plaorm On a car when ropes have been removed On a car parally assembled, suspended by chain or hoisng device A ladder when working on top of the counterweight


253

Safety

FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION


In the Li Industry, employees are exposed to risks which – if not fully idened and adequately managed – may lead to a fatal or serious accident. The present chapter aims to help any employee and company understanding what the main risks are and help them idenfy eecve means of protecon. The list is based on li industry experience and knowledge of serious accidents but however cannot be considered as fully exhausve.

(9)

254

Issue 09/2015

Safety


ACCESSING THE SITE – NEW EQUIPMENT – CONTROL OF MECHANICAL ENERGY DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of being hurt by a falling object can occur when walking on a construcon site and a worker drops a tool or materials.


PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS wear a safety helmet when working on a construcon site. ALWAYS be careful of workers working above when accessing the site or the building. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Personal Protecve Equipment: • Safety helmet. Check the safety helmet following the manufacturer’s recommendaon!


255

Safety


ACCESS TO THE MACHINE ROOM OR THE PULLEY ROOM – TRAP ACCESS – FALL PROTECTION


DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK

Risk of falling from unsuitable access equipment if: • unsafe ladder (damaged, too short or can’t be secured to a xing point)

Risk of falling from unsuitable access equipment if: • unsafe trap (not robust enough, too heavy, no system to prevent accidental closing etc.)

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS check condion of ladder and trap before use. NEVER use improvised access equipment. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Safe Access Equipment: • Ladder in good condion (not broken, damaged or fragile). • Ladder with non-slip feet. • Fixed ladder or hooking system to secure the ladder. • Secured and robust trap. • Handle to facilitate the access and good balance. Personal Protecve Equipment: • Boots with clean, non-slip soles. • Protecve cap. Safe procedure: • Check that the access equipments are safe. • Keep 3 points of contact when climbing up the ladder • NEVER stay posioned on the trap: it may not be robust. • ALWAYS close the trap (public and employee protecon) • If the access is not safe, inform the company.

The issue should be raised with your company who should inform the customer and/or inspecon body (if relevant) to help and nd an appropriate soluon.

(11)

256

Issue 09/2015

Safety


ACCESS TO THE MACHINE ROOM OR THE PULLEY ROOM – ACCESS TO ROOF – FALL PROTECTION

DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of falling from unprotected edge if: • Edge is within less than 3 m from the access path to the machine room or pulley room.


PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE : NEVER approach an unprotected edge. ALWAYS ensure that fall protecon is in place if a fall exists with 3 m from the access path to the machine room or pulley room. ALWAYS use a portable light if no proper lighng is in place. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Safe Access:

• Edge of the building protected by a compliant guardrail. Personal Protecve Equipment: • Fall protecon system and appropriate hooking point. Safe procedure: • Check that the access is safe.

If the access does not meet the criteria above, inform the company. The issue should be raised with your company who should in form the customer and/or inspecon body (if relevant) to help and nd an appropriate soluon.


257

Safety


WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM – FALL PROTECTION s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B

DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of falling through unprotected hole from an open trap or when liing equipment through the trap.

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: NEVER work in close proximity of an unprotected opening without appropriate fall protecon equipment.

If a barrier cannot be used, ALWAYS wear protecve equipment aached to a hooking point in the machine room. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Safe Access:

• Compliant guardrail around the trap. Personal Protecve Equipment • Personal fall protecon with the lanyard aached to an appropriate hooking point (such as a specially created point or an adequate beam). Safe procedure: • Install a compliant guardrail if none exists. • Idenfy the appropriate hooking point for fall protecon. • Wear personal fall protecon with the lanyard aached. • No employee shall stay within the vicinity of the fall hazard if not wearing any kind of fall protecon equipment.

If the access does not meet the criteria above, inform the company. The issue should be raised with your company who should inform the customer and/or inspecon body (if relevant) to help and nd an appropriate soluon. (13)

258

Issue 09/2015

Safety


WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM – CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of being electrocuted when: • Taking measurements on electrical equipment. • Replacing or repairing an electrical component or any equipment which can be powered with 110V DC or 50V AC and more (controller, selector, machine, main line switch, juncon box, door lock…). • Working in close proximity of the energized equipment.


Check if local regulaon requires a mandatory cercaon for all exposed employees!

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE : ALWAYS lock out and tag out the equipment before performing any work on the electrical equipment, except when measuring values during fault nding. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li Equipment Protecon: • Energized equipment is protected against accidental contact (IP2x). • Electric shock protecon devices. Personal Protecve Equipment: • Insulated gloves. • Safety glasses to avoid ashover injuries if exposed to live equipment. • Tesng device or measurement device depending on local constraint. • Locks and tools to prevent 3rd party pung the power back on. Safe procedure: Before working on the live equipment: • Switch o all the power sources of the unit (main power, car light, etc.). • Apply locks in order to prevent 3rd party switching the power back on. • Verify that the tesng device/mul-meter is working properly on a known source. • Verify that there is no power le on the equipment with the tesng device/mul-meter for every individual phase.

When replacing the main line switch: switch o, locked out and tagged out the power of the li at the main line switch of the building.


259

Safety


WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM – WORK ON ROTATING / MOVING EQUIPMENT s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B

DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of crushing or amputaon when: • Working on moving equipment such as ropes, sheave, selectors etc. • Working in close proximity of unprotected equipment.

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS lock out and tag out the equipment before performing any work on the moving/rotang equipment. NEVER get in close proximity to unprotected moving/rotang equipment. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Personal Protecve Equipment: • No e, scarf, loose clothing, etc. worn in proximity of moving equipment. Li Equipment Protecon – Check that: • Sheave, ropes are protected by a guard covering the nip points. Safe procedure: Before working on the equipment: • Switch o the power of the unit. • Apply locks in order to prevent 3rd party switching the power back and ensure the unit can’t move. • If using the emergency rescue operaon (ERO), ensure that no one gets in close proximity.

(15)

260

Issue 09/2015

Safety


WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM – WORK ON THE BRAKE CONTROL OF MECHANICAL ENERGY DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK When working on the brake, the movement of the sheave is free and can lead to an uncontrolled movement of the car.


PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS check the brake condion. ALWAYS check proper adherence of ropes into the sheaves. ALWAYS secure the cam to prevent one to open the manual landing door. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Example of a safe procedur e Before working on the brake: • Check the brake condion and adherence. • Secure the cam to prevent anyone opening the manual landing door. • Land the counterweight on the buer. An addional precauon can be to block the sheave to prevent uncontrolled movement.

On drum machine: The car should be landed on its buer or if slack rope, movement shall be prevented by prevenng the drum from moving.

(16)

www.liftequip.com

261

Safety


WORK ON THE LANDING – SERVICE & RENOVATION – FALL PROTECTION s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B


Risk of an employee or a member of the public falling through unguarded opening when the landing door is open and the car is not behind.

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS protect the working area at landings. ALWAYS inform the customer that the li is not available. ALWAYS verify that the landing doors are mechanically locked when closing the landing doors and before leaving site. NEVER leave the landing doors wide open when working in pit. NEVER open wide the landing doors when the car is not behind. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Safe procedure: When opening the landing doors: • Install protecve barrier if possible. • Take a stable posion to keep rm foong. • Preferably open the boom oor landing doors. • Only open a few cenmeters to prevent falling.

When working on the car from the landing: • Posion the car so that it is comfortable to work. • Switch o the unit to prevent potenal electrocuon if working on electrical equipment (juncon box, door operator…). When accessing the hoistway: • Posion the car safely: no more than 50 cm from landing. In case the car is stopped between oors (trapped passengers or renovaon): • Check the opening under the car. • Ensure the opening does not allow anyone to fall underneath.

(17)

262

Issue 09/2015

Safety


WORK ON THE LANDING – WORK ON MOVING / ROTATING EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of crushing or amputaon when working on moving equipment such as the car door operator, landing door panels or car doors.


PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS lock out and tag out the equipment before performing any work on the moving/rotang equipment. NEVER come in close proximity to unprotected moving/rotang equipment. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Personal Protecve Equipment: • Protecve gloves • No e, scarf, loose clothing etc. worn in proximity of moving/ rotang equipment. Safe procedure: • Switch o the power of the unit if power is not needed. • When opening/closing the landing/car doors or manipulang the car door operator, be aware of the kinec energy to control the movement and keep body parts away from nip points.


263

Safety


WORK ON THE LANDING – NEW EQUIPMENT – FALL PROTECTION s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B

DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of an employee or a worker of the construcon site falling through the unprotected hoistway opening.

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure voids and openings are protected by suitable guardrails in compliance with current standards. Important! When the mechanic is working in the hoistway, protecon against falling objects must be in place (see p 27). EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Hoistway protecon: • Fixed guardrails to current standards shall be installed to protect li employees and other workers.

Eecve barricade installed in front of the hoistway to prevent site workers and employees falling in the hoistway

Personal Protecve Equipment: • Fall protecon equipment if a fall hazard exists. • Suitable anchorage for lanyard at the ho istway opening. Safe procedure: In case a guardrail needs to be installed or if a ladder needs to be used in the vicinity of the opening, a personal fall protecon shall be used: • Install a specic hooking point for the lanyard at hoistway opening. • Tie o the body harness. • Protect the working area to prevent other workers falling into the hoistway opening. Before the work starts, the company should have a r isk assessment process to check that the hoistway condions is as per the installaon requirements. If the hoistway condions are not met by the General Contractor, work shall stop and company must be informed.

(19)

264

Issue 09/2015

Safety


ACCESS THE HOISTWAY – ACCESS THE TOP OF THE CAR – CONTROL OF THE ELEVATOR DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of being crushed in the hoistway when working on the top of the car.


PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS take control of the li before accessing the hoistway by switching o the power or acvang STOP and INSPECTION buons aer they have been checked separately. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li safety equipment: • free space or refuge or alternave means of safety distances. • STOP buon. • Inspecon switch. Safe procedure: Before accessing the top of the car: • Switch o the power of the unit and apply lock to prevent anyone pung power back on, OR : • Send the car several oors below (minimum 2). • Open the hoistway door with the release key. • Check that the car stops when landing doors safety contact opens. • Stop the car no more than 50 cm above the oor to safely access. • Push the STOP buon, close the doors, push the call buons and check that the car did not move. • Open the doors, push the INSPECTION buon, release the STOP buon back to normal, close the doors, push the call buons and check that the car did not move. • Open the landing doors and push the STOP buon back.

Assess other potenal risks such as fall from the car top or adjacent unit running in the same hoistway, etc. This procedure may need to be customized depending upon the technology.


265

Safety


ACCESS THE HOISTWAY – ACCESS TO THE PIT – CONTROL OF THE ELEVATOR s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B


Risk of being crushed by the car or the counterweight when accessing and working in pit.

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS take control of the li before accessing the hoistway by switching o the power or acvang STOP aer it has been checked. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li safety equipment – Check presence of: • STOP buon. • Pit ladder. Safe procedure: Before accessing the pit: • Enter the pit through the boom landing door or access door • Switch o the power of the unit and apply lock to prevent anyone to put power back. OR :

• Send the car to the top oor. • Open the hoistway door with the release key before the car arri ves at the oor. • Check that the car stops when landing doors safety contact opens. • Push the STOP buon, close the landing doors and push the call buon to check if the STOP switch is eecvely working. • Prevent the landing doors from closing completely (leave no more than 15 cm opening) by using a door blocking device. A screwdriver is not an appropriate tool. If there is no pit STOP Switch: Switch o the power.

(21)

266

Issue 09/2015

Safety


WORK IN THE HOISTWAY – TOP OF THE CAR / INSIDE THE CAR – FALL PROTECTION s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B


Risk of falling from the top of the car

Risk of falling from inside the car when exposed to a fall hazard

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure voids and openings are protected by suitable barriers in compliance with current standards. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Equipment on the car: • Fixed balustrade to current standards on car top, see page 8. Personal Protecve Equipment: • Fall arrest or fall restraint system. • Suitable anchorage for lanyard on the top of car. Safe procedure: Before accessing the car: • Check for balustrade. • If no balustrade or it is unsuitable, wear the appropriate fall protecon aached to suitable anchorage point. ALWAYS aach the harness when on the top of car. ALWAYS detach the harness before leaving the top of car.


267

Safety


WORK IN A HOISTWAY – MOVING IN THE HOISTWAY – CONTROL OF THE MECHANICAL ENERGY s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B


Risk of being crushed by an equipment when moving the car in the hoistway (counterweight, Bracket, etc.).

Risk of being crushed on top of the hoistway if insucient space on the top of the hoistway.

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: NEVER ride the li in normal speed. NEVER ride the li if there is no control (or inspecon box). EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS : Li safety equipment: • Free space or refuge or alternave means of safety distances (eg; above the top rail of the balustrade) • Control or inspecon box. • Limit switch. • Inspecon limit switch. Safe procedure: When riding the top of the car: • ALWAYS posion yourself in the center of the car when riding. • ALWAYS acvate the STOP buon aer a ride. • ALWAYS check the door lock when geng out at a dierent oor. • ALWAYS opt to ride down rather than up as it reduces the risk of being hit by the counterweight or xed equipment in the hoistway. In renovaon, if limit switches are not in place and a risk of crushing exists if the space is not sucient: • Install props under the counterweight with the right length to allow space on the top of the hoistway.

(23)

268

Issue 09/2015

Safety


WORK IN A HOISTWAY – ADJACENT UNITS – CONTROL OF THE ELEVATOR DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of being crushed by an adjacent running unit or any other equipment which may be moving (adjacent counterweight etc.).


PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS prevent the movement of the adjacent li by switching o its power or acvang its STOP in pit or on the top of the car. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li safety equipment: • Full screen is in place along the enre height of the hoistway if distance with adjacent moving equipment is less than 50 cm • Screen in pit. Safe procedure if no screen is in place and there is a risk of having the body outside of the car contours: Before accessing the top of the car or the pit: The adjacent unit shall not move accidently: • Switch o the power of the adjacent unit and apply locks to prevent anyone pung power back on. OR :

• Open the hoistway door with the release key. • Check that the car stops when landing doors safety contact opens. • Push the STOP buon and close the landing doors to check it is working eecvely.


269

Safety


WORK IN A HOISTWAY – WORK ON THE HYDRAULIC LIFTS – CONTROL OF MECHANICAL ENERGY


DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK When working on the hydraulic system, on the pipe or cylinder, the risk of having a free fall of the car is signicant, potenally resulng in crushing hazard if the employee is working in pit.

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS close the safety handle (if exisng). ALWAYS land the car on props or suspend the car with 2 safety means when working on the hydraulic system. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li safety equipment: • Safety bracket that allow to mechanically secure the car.

Prop of the right capacity and installed under the car to prevent from falling in pit in case of a major hydraulic failure Handle closed and removed

Tools & equipment: • Slings or props in good condion and right weight capacity. • Safety brackets. Safe procedure: Before working on the hydraulic system, mechanical energy shall be secured: • Close the safety handle (if exisng). • Land the car on the brackets specially designed (if equipped). OR

• Install adequate capacity prop, secure it to prevent from falling. • Land the car on props from the machine room. OR

• Secure the car by 2 slings or hoisng devices. Take any measure to avoid 3rd party pung the system back on by: • Locking out and tagging out the unit. • Removing the handle o. In case work in pit is long (for example, more than 15 min), mechanical protecon as described above is imperave.

(25)

270

Issue 09/2015

Safety


WORK IN A HOISTWAY – WORK ON A LADDER – FALL PROTECTION DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of fall from the ladder in case: • The ladder slips if not adequately secured. • The ladder is not in good condion. The risk can occur typically when working on the top of the counterweight or deecon sheave on top of the hoistway in repair or renovaon.


PROTECTION MEANS Work on ladder is allowed only for very short period of me. Otherwise, other means shall be idened (plaorm, scaold, etc). Check local regulaons! VITAL RULE: ALWAYS secure the ladder from bracing with cords or slings. ALWAYS wear fall protecon if a fall hazard exists and ALWAYS when feet are above 2 m. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Ladder in good condion. • Fall protecon equipment. Safe procedure: Before working on the ladder: • Install a lifeline in the hoistway to prepare a proper hooking point for the body harness. • Secure the ladder so that it will not move. When working on the ladder: • Tie o the body harness to the lifeline.


271

Safety


WORK IN A HOISTWAY –FALLING OBJECTS (RENOVATION & NEW EQUIPMENT) – MECHANICAL ENERGY s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B

DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of injury by a falling object can occur when: • Working in the hoistway while an object falls through unprotected holes in the hoistway. • Working in the hoistway while a colleague is working above in the machine room or on the top of the car and drops a tool or equipment. • Working in the hoistway while another colleague installs a li in the adjacent hoistway not being protected by a screen or other means.

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS wear a safety helmet when working on a construcon site or whenever a risk of falling objects exists in repair / renovaon. ALWAYS ensure that all holes into the hoistway are protected. NEVER allow stacked work. NEVER leave any tool or equipment on guide brackets or beams that could ulmately fall down. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Personal Protecve Equipment: • Safety helmet. Safe procedure: Before working in the hoistway: • Protect all holes by a xed plate or guard. • Protect the hoistway opening by guardrail and a net covering the enre opening. • Organize the acvity in the hoistway or common hoistway to eliminate stacked work.

When working in the hoistway: • Work from inside of the car as much as possible: any falling object will be stopped by the top of the car or ceiling.

(27)

272

Issue 09/2015

Safety


WORK IN A HOISTWAY – WORK ON ROPES (RENOVATION & NEW EQUIPMENT) DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK When working on the suspension system e.g. replacing ropes, this can lead to : • Free fall of the car. • Free fall of the counterweight.


PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS secure the car and the counterweight by 2 independent means when ropes are removed. ALWAYS trigger the safees. NEVER remove more than 50% of the ropes, if possible. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Slings in good condion and adequate weight capacity. • Props in good condion and adequate weight capacity. Li equipment: • Safees are triggered: governor and car is blocked.

Car secured by 2 slings and counterweight secured on props

Safe procedure: Before removing the ropes: • Posion the car at the proper height. • Posion the car on the safees. • Secure the car by 2 independent means: 2 slings or hoisng devices. If one fails, the system will be secured by the other one. • Install props under the counterweight. • Secure the props from falling (onto the guide for example).

Car secured by 2 independent slings aached to rail graber


273

Safety


CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES – HOISTING AND RIGGING ACTIVITIES s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B

DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of falling equipment if hoisng pracce is inadequate: • Car or counterweight insuciently secured. • Damaged sling or hoisng equipment. Risk of fall with the car if rigging pracce is inadequate: • Gravity center insuciently idened.

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure that the hoisng and rigging equipment is formally veried as per the local laws, are in good condion and properly rated for the load to be lied and suspended. ALWAYS protect slings from sharp edges with packing. NEVER walk / stand under suspended load. NEVER used, damaged or unknown capacity equipment. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Cered hoisng tools: slings, shackles, hooking points shall be rated for the maximum load and in good condions. • Cered hoisng device, rated for the maximum load: ¡ To hoist material only (chain hoist). ¡ To hoist material and employee (e.g. Tirak). Safe procedure: Before liing or rigging: Check the weight of the equipment. • Use the right hooking point, shackle, sling and hoisng equipment accordingly. • Test the hooking point with specic equipment: it is usually the one that fails rst .

When liing equipment (machine, controller etc): • Idenfy the center of gravity to minimize unexpected swinging. NEVER hold the equipment with the hand: it can be crushed. Use a cord to control the movement.

(29)

274

Issue 09/2015

Safety


CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES – SCAFFOLD DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of fall from the scaold. Risk of falling with the scaold if inadequately built. Check if cercaon is required by law for scaold and scaolder.


PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure it has been built and checked by an authorized person. NEVER remove any barrier or planking. NEVER use an incomplete scaold. ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity and check if it is visibly displayed. ALWAYS ensure inspecon by an authorized person. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Cered scaold. Safe procedure: • Check that the scaold is secured to the structure. • Ensure that there is safe access to the scaold with a xed ladder. • Ensure that the plaorm is in good condion, guardrails are in place. • NEVER climb onto the guardrails. Any defect shall be raised with the company and the scaold shall not be used. Note: Even if the primary protecon mean relies on the properly built car plaorm, it is recommended to wear a body harness and be ed o to a life line suspended in the hoistway.


275

Safety


CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES – TEMPORARY FIXED WORKING PLATFORM s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B


Risk of fall from a temporary xed working plaorm Risk of falling with the temporary xed working plaorm if inadequately built or inadequate guardrails Check if cercaon is required by law for plaorm and plaorm installer!

PROTECTION MEANS

Safe and robust plaorm with guardrails protecng from falling

Safe metal working plaorm

VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure it has been built and checked by an authorized person. NEVER remove any barrier or planking. NEVER use an incomplete working plaorm. ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity and check if it is visibly displayed. ALWAYS ensure a safe xed mean of access to the plaorm. ALWAYS ensure inspecon by an authorized person. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Cered working plaorm. • Cered shoe, adequately calibrated to capacity of the plaorm. • High quality materials. Safe procedure: • Check that the temporary xed working plaorm is robust. • ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity. • Ensure that there is safe access with a xed ladder. • NEVER climb onto the guardrails. • ALWAYS wear a body harness aached to a life line to prevent falls in case the plaorm collapses. Any defect shall be raised with the company Note: Even if the primary protecon mean relies on the properly built car plaorm, it is highly recommended to wear the body harness and be ed o to a life line suspended in the hoistway. (31)

276

Issue 09/2015

Safety


WORK IN A HOISTWAY – CAR USED AS A TEMPORARY MOVING PLATFORM – (RENOVATION & NEW EQUIPMENT) DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of fall from the moving plaorm. Risk of fall with the car if inadequately built.


PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure that 2 independent safees are in place: • Ropes and governor. • Or ropes and addional safety. • Or special hoisng device authorized to li persons and an addional safety device.

Car connected to the ropes and governor in place

EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Cered safees (governor or addional safety). • Cered hoisng device in good condion and right capacity. • Cered hooking points with the right capacity. Safe procedure: • ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity. • ALWAYS install the governor and the ropes as soon as possible and/or as per the installaon method. • ALWAYS use proper hoisng equipment. • ALWAYS install the appropriate balustrade on top of the car. • ALWAYS ensure inspecon by an authorized person. Note: Even if the primary protecon means relies on the properly built car plaorm, it is highly recommended to wear fall protecon ed o to a life line suspended in the hoistway. It is recommended to have an audio visual system xed under the car to inform other mechanics of the movement of the car when doors safees are disabled.


277

Safety


CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES – DEFEATING A SAFETY CIRCUIT s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B

DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of being crushed when accessing/working/egressing the hoistway. Similar risks exist for members of the public in the situaon that the landing door safety has been disabled.

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: Defeang a circuit shall be the last opon when no other alternaves exist: NEVER defeat a circuit for a long period. NEVER leave a shunt (shorng wire) in place when leaving the site. NEVER install a shunt in any hoistway equipment (lock, car lock, emergency stop etc): it is not visible and may be forgoen. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Company approved shunts, 1 m long coloured cables to make it visible. Safe procedure: Before installing a shunt: • Remove the li from normal operaon. • Idenfy precisely the circuit to be defeated with the electrical diagram • If there is no other alternave method than shorng it, conduct a risk assessment. • ALWAYS use 1 m long coloured cable, properly authorized. • ALWAYS check the electrical diagram to be sure to place the shunt on the right circuit. • NEVER short the enre safety chain. • Install the shunt when the power is o to prevent electrocuon. If riding in the hoistway is necessary: • ALWAYS test STOP and INSPECTION before shunt is placed! Before leaving the site: • ALWAYS check all the safees aer having removed the shunt.

(33)

278

Issue 09/2015

Safety


CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES – ASBESTOS s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B


Asbestos in brakes – risk of severe health eects if brake lining are removed without precauons.

Asbestos on hoistway walls – risk of severe health eects if put in contact or removed without precauons.

PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: NEVER touch materials in the machine room or hoistway. NEVER work on equipment that contains asbestos without having the proper training and protecve equipment. ALWAYS be alert for dierent asbestos containing materials. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Review the local regulaon to idenfy mandatory training, safety protecve tools and equipment! Safe procedure: The company must ask the customer for the record of asbestos before commencing work.

If asbestos has to be removed to perform maintenance, repair or modernizaon/replacement, it has to be done by a specialized company or by specially cered mechanics.


279

Safety

FREQUENT ACCIDENTS PREVENTION


Hopefully, fatal and serious accidents represent a minor proporon of the accidents reported by the companies. This chapter aims to present the risks that are the source of the most frequent accidents which occur. These accidents are, most of the me, not specic to li work. Although not usually fatal they can sll lead to painful injuries. Consequently, these risks must not be neglected and appropriate measures as suggested in the examples shall be taken. Again, this list is not exhausve and it is the responsibility of every company and employee to conduct a proper risk assessment and to comply with the communicated rules.

(35)

280

Issue 09/2015

Safety


ACCESS THE HOISTWAY – ACCESS TO THE PIT DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of falling, slipping when accessing or egressing the pit if: • There is no ladder for pit > 1 m. • Ladder is not adequate. • Ladder is not used. • Floor is slippery.


PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li safety equipment: • Pit ladder. • Pit ladder is within reach from the landing. • Pit ladder is secured and safe. Safe procedure: Before accessing the pit: • Check the posion and condion of the ladder if any. • Block the door with the door blocking device in order to prevent the door from closing. • Ensure that the STOP buon is working properly (see p. 20) and is acvated. • In a safe and stable posion, reach for the ladder.

When egressing the pit: • Keep the STOP buon acvated. • Take the ladder and climb up safely. • Once safe on the landing, release the STOP. • Close the landing doors and verify these are mechanically closed. • Keep 3 points of contact on the ladder Use the pit ladder or a portable ladder. NEVER jump in pit! If the pit ladder is unsafe, it should be raised with your company who should inform the customer and/or inspecon body (if relevant) to help and nd an appropriate soluon.


281

Safety


SLIP, TRIP, FALL s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B


Risk of falling on stairs when there is poor lighng or stairs are in poor condion

Risk of falling when the ground is wet, uneven, with a small step etc…

These accidents are some of the most frequent!

PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Protecve Personal Equipment: • An-slip shoes. • Shoes with a heel to give a beer grip on ladder. Safe procedure: • ALWAYS keep a rm foong. • ALWAYS watch for wet oor, slippery oor, icy condions… • ALWAYS be aware of the me switch. • ALWAYS use the handrail when going down the stairs, or keep points of contact where there is none (use the wall as a support). • NEVER rush, parcularly down the stairs. • NEVER use your mobile when walking or climbing down stairs.

(37)

282

Issue 09/2015

Safety


SAFE USE OF HAND TOOLS s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B


Risk of slipping of tools if the spanner, screwdriver or bolt is in poor condion.

PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools and protecve equipment: • CE-marked and authorized by the company. • Hammer in good condion, xed head with sound handle. • Spanners in good condion, not burred or splayed. • Screwdrivers with good insulaon, not broken or worn. Safe procedure: • ALWAYS check the equipment is in good condion before use. • ALWAYS wear cut protecve gloves. • ALWAYS use the appropriate equipment (an adjustable wrench is less safe than a spanner which is less safe than a hex key). • NEVER use an electrician’s screwdriver for mechanical work. • NEVER use damaged tools. • ALWAYS use the correct sized tool for the job.


283

Safety


SAFE USE OF ELECTRICAL PORTABLE TOOLS s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B


Risk of dust in the eye, risk of cuts, laceraon, ying parcles and re.

Risk of cuts, laceraon when using cung tools.

PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools and protecve equipment: • CE-marked and authorized by the company. • Glasses and protecve gloves. • Tool (vice-grip…) to maintain the piece rmly in place. • Grinder and drill equipped with a handle to get a rm grip. Safe procedure: • ALWAYS check the good condion of the equipment before use (overall condion, cable is not damaged, protecon in place). • ALWAYS use the drill and grinder with 2 hands. • ALWAYS wear glasses and gloves when drilling, grinding. • ALWAYS check that the grinder disk is within the limit date of use. • ALWAYS have a hot work permit if required. • NEVER use damaged tools. • NEVER hold the piece with the hand when drilling or grinding: secure it rmly in place with the correct tool. • NEVER cut upwards with angle grinder. Ear protecon should be used when drilling or grinding.

(39)

284

Issue 09/2015

Safety


SAFE USE OF CHEMICALS s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B


Risk of loss of conscious, disease or health issues in case of use of dangerous products.

Risk of explosion if ammable product is used in close proximity to hot work or lit cigarees.

PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Selecon of the product: • Only use the chemicals approved by the company: usually, poisonous or toxic products are not necessary in li industry. • NEVER buy products not approved by the company. • ALWAYS check the Material Safety Data Sheet which describes the potenal dangers & safety precauons to take for each product. Tools and protecve equipment: • Gloves and glasses if a risk of splashing exists. • Suitable Respiratory Protecve Equipment. Safe procedure: • ALWAYS wear gloves to avoid product penetraon through the skin. • ALWAYS use small quanes in non-venlated areas (pit). • ALWAYS put the cap back on aer use. • NEVER smoke, grind or weld in close proximity to ammable product. • NEVER transfer a chemical product into an unidened can. • Read and follow the “precauons for use” as wrien on the container. • NEVER store volale chemicals / aerosols in non-venlated areas (pit)


285

Safety


MANUAL HANDLING s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B

DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of back injuries when liing equipment. Risk of cuts, laceraon if the load falls down. Risk of falls or slips when handling the equipment.

PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools and protecve equipment: • Protecve gloves. • Handling equipment if the load is heavy (as dened in the risk assessment or as per the regulaon). Safe procedure: • ALWAYS keep the back straight and use the legs to li the load. • ALWAYS place the hands so that they don’t get crushed. • ALWAYS scan the route to idenfy possible risks of fall and slip.

(41)

286

Issue 09/2015

Safety


Other risks that have not been developed in the present booklet but which can however be relevant: • Risk of a re. • Risk related to welding acvies. • Risk related to the specicity of the site (nuclear plant, chemical plant, explosive atmosphere etc). • Risks related to the use of vehicles. •…



287

Safety


This document was prepared by experts of the Educaon & Training Commiee and Quality, Safety, Environment and Educaon Commiee of the European Li Associaon It is illustrated by drawings which are available free of charge in high and low resoluon on the ELA website at

www.ela-aisbl.org

Make the fullest possible use of this brochure and drawings

European Li Associaon 44 Avenue Herrmann-Debroux, box 1, B-1160 Brussels Tel.: +32 (0) 2 779 50 82 – Fax: +32 (0)2 772 16 85

288

Issue 09/2015

Calendar

With us you can plan September 2015

Oktober 2015

November 2015

Dezember 2015

KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO 36 37

7

1

2

3

4

5

8

9 10 11 12 13

40

6

41 5

6

7

1

2

3

44

8

9 10 11

4

45 2

3

9

4

5

6

7

1

49

8

50

7

1

2

3

4

5

8

9 10 11 12 13

6

38 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

42 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

46

10 11 12 13 14 15

51 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

39 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

43 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

47 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

52 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

40 28 29 30

44 26 27 28 29 30 31

48 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

53 28 29 30 31

r a d n e l a C

49 30 January 2016 CW

MON TUE WED THU FRI

53 1 4

5

6

March 2016

February 2016

7

SAT

SUN

1

2

3

8

9 10

CW

MON TUE WED THU

4

5

CW

SAT SUN

5 1

2

6

9 10 11 12 13 14

8

3

FRI

6

MON TUE WED THU

9

7

10

April 2016

7

3

FRI

4

SAT SUN

1

2

5

8

9 10 11 12 13

6

CW

MON TUE WED THU

13 14 4

5

6

7

FRI

SAT SUN

1

2

8

9 10

3

2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

7 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

11 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

15 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

3 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

8 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

12 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

9 29

13 28 29 30 31

17 25 26 27 28 29 30

May 2016 CW

July2016

June 2016

MON TUE WED THU

FRI

17 5

6

7

MON TUE WED THU

1

22

8

23 6

7

FRI

3

SAT SUN

1

2

4

8

9 10 11 12

CW

MON TUE WED THU

26

5

27 4

5

6

7

FRI

SAT SUN

1

2

8

9 10

3

CW

MON TUE WED THU

4

5

SAT SUN

31 1

2

32

9 10 11 12 13 14

8

3

FRI

6

7

18 2

3

19

10 11 12 13 14 15

24 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

28 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

33 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

20 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

25 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

29 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

34 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

26 27 28 29 30

30 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

35 29 30 31

9

4

CW

SAT SUN

August 2016

22 30 31 September 2016 CW

MON TUE WED THU

35 36 5

6

7

October 2016

FRI

CW

SAT SUN

1

2

3

8

9 10 11

MON TUE WED THU

FRI

39

4

40 3

4

5

December 2016

November 2016

6

7

SAT SUN

CW

1

2

44

8

9

45

MON TUE WED THU

7

3

FRI

4

SAT SUN

1

2

5

8

9 10 11 12 13

6

CW

MON TUE WED THU

48 49 5

6

7

FRI

SAT SUN

1

2

3

8

9 10 11

4

37 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

41 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

46 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

50 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

38 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

42 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

47 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

51 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

39 26 27 28 29 30

43 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

48 28 29 30

52 26 27 28 29 30 31

44 31 Holiday: Neujahrstag (01.01.) Hl. Drei Könige (06.01.) Karfreitag Ostermontag 1-May Christi Himmelfahrt Pfngstmontag Fronleichnam MariäHimmelfahrt (15.08.) Tag der dt. Einheit (03.10.) Reformationstag (31.10.) Allerheiligen (01.11.) Buß- u. Bettag 1.u. 2. Weihnachtstag (25./26.12.)

BW BY1) B E BB HB HH HE MV NI NW RP SL SN ST SH TH x x x x x x x x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x x x x x x x

x

x x x x x

x x x x x

x x x x x

x x x x x

x x x x x x

x

x

x

x

x

x x x x x

x x x x x

x x x x x x

x x x x x x

x x x x x x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x x

x

x

x x x x x 2)

x x x x x

x x x x x

x x x x x 3)

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

School year 2015/2016 Winter

x

x x

x x

k x

x

School holidays Germany:

x

x

BW * BY 08.02. - 12.02. * BE 01.02. - 06.02. BB 01.02. - 06.02. HB 28.01. - 29.01. HH 29.01. HE MV 01.02. - 13.02. NI 28.01. - 29.01. NW RP SL 08.02. - 13.02. ST 08.02. - 20.02. SA 01.02. - 10.02. SH TH 01.02. - 06.02.

Easter

School year 2016/2017 Pentecost

Summer

Autumn

24.03. / 29.03. - 02.04. *17.05. - 28.05. 28.07. - 10.09. 02.11. - 04.11. * 21.03. - 01.04. 17.05. - 28.05. 30.07. - 12.09. 31.10. - 04.11. 21.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. / 18.05. * 21.07. - 02.09. 17.10. - 28.10. 23.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. * 21.07. - 03.09. 17.10. - 28.10. 18.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. * 23.06. - 03.08. 04.10. - 15.10. 07.03. - 18.03. 06.05. / 17.05. - 20.05. 21.07. - 31.08. 17.10. - 28.10. 29.03. - 09.04. 18.07. - 26.08. 17.10. - 29.10. 21.03. - 30.03. 14.05. - 17.05. 25.07. - 03.09. 24.10. - 28.10. 18.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. 23.06. - 03.08. * 04.10. - 15.10. 21.03. - 02.04. 17.05. 11.07. - 23.08. 10.10. - 21.10. 18.03. - 01.04. 18.07. - 26.08. 10.10. - 21.10. 29.03. - 09.04. 18.07. - 27.08. 10.10. - 22.10. 25.03. - 02.04. 06.05. * 27.06. - 05.08. 03.10. - 15.10. 24.03. 06.05. - 14.05. 27.06. - 10.08. 04.10. - 15.10. 24.03. - 09.04. 06.05. 25.07. - 03.09. * 17.10. - 29.10. 24.03. - 02.04. 06.05. 27.06. - 10.08. 10.10. - 22.10.

Christmas 23.12. - 07.01. 24.12. - 05.01. 23.12. - 03.01. 23.12. - 03.01. 21.12. - 06.01. 27.12. - 06.01. 22.12. - 07.01. 22.12. - 02.01. 21.12. - 06.01. 23.12. - 06.01. 22.12. - 06.01. 19.12. - 31.12. 23.12. - 02.01. 19.12. - 02.01. 23.12. - 06.01. 23.12. - 31.12.

x means public holiday k means public holiday in municipalies with a predominantly Catholic populaon.

www.liftequip.com

289

Standards and Guidelines

Standards and Guidelines: s e n i l e d i u G d n a s d r a d n a t S

Legal requirements both at the European and national level constitute the framework for design, manufacture, distribution and operation of lifts. The corresponding standards and guidelines describe the technical demands on the products. The new standards take the expanded safety requirements into account, which underlie the current state of the art. EN 81-20 for passenger and freight lifts under the Lift Directive includes guidelines on the design for rope and hydraulic lifts and describes the conditions that have to be met during the installation of lifts. EN 81-50 lays down the calculations and tests that have to be conducted for components and systems. The current major changes are dominated by the new Lift Regulation AR 2014/33/EU and EN 81-20/-50. The transiti -

onal periods are presented in the illustration below.

EN 81-20 + EN 81-50 Transitio nal period in combination wi th old / new Elevator Directive 12.12.2014

20.04.2016

31.08.2017

EN 81-1/2

EN 81-20/-50

AR 95/16/EG

AR 2014/33/EU

The entire guideline family of the EN81- series is affected by the changes in the new EN 81-20/-50, which replace the previous EN 81-1 and EN 81-2. Consequently the individual standards will also be revised in the years to come

290

Issue 09/2015

Standards and Guidelines

Standards and Guidelines: s e n i l e d i u G d n a s d r a d n a t S

EN 81 Familie

EN 81-1X Grundlagen + Interpretationen

EN 81-2X Aufzüge f. den Personen- u. Lastentransport

10 System der Normenfamilie 11 Definitionen

20 Personenaufzüge

Seil Hydraulik etc.

12 Methoden für Risikobeurteilung

21 Neuaufzüge in bestehenden Gebäuden 22 Schrägaufzüge für Personentransport 28 Fern-NotrufSystem

EN 81-3X Aufzüge für den Lastentransport

30 Kleingüteraufzüge 31 Betretbare Güteraufzüge

EN 81-4X Sonderaufzüge für Personenund Lastentransport 40 Treppenlifte u. Schrägaufzüge f. Behinderte 41 Vertikale Plattformaufzüge 43 Aufzüge für Arbeitsplätze

EN 81-5X Prüfungen

50 Baumusterprüfungen Sicherheitsbau -teile

51 Baumusterprüfungen Aufzüge 58 Brandschutztüren

EN 81-6X Dokumentation für Aufzüge

EN 81-7X Sonderanwendungen

EN 81-8X Bestehende Aufzüge

60 Wartungs- und Bedienungsanl eitungen

70 Anforderung an Aufzüge f. Personen mit Behinderungen

80 Sicherheitsanpassung bestehender Aufzüge

61 Wartungs- und Bedienungs. Lastenaufzüge

71 Vandalenresistente Aufzüge

81 Modernisierung bestehender Aufzüge

68 Fernüberwachung

72 Feuerwehraufzüge

73 Verhalten von Aufzügen im Brandfall 76 Evakuierungsaufzüge für Pers. mit Behinderungen

82 Verbesserung der Zugänglichkeit besteh ender Aufzüge 83 Verbesserung der Schutzmassnahmen gegen mutwillige Zerstörung bestehender Aufzüge

77 Aufzüge i n Erdbebengebieten

Important notes on the application of the guidelines and standards • Lift planning must take the transitional periods for the application of the new standards and reference dates for distribution under the new Lift Directive into account to ensure that no retrotting is needed in the event of any building

site date postponements. • All current type approval certicates for safety components will also retain their validity under the new Lift Directive; •

• • •

they only need to be documented with a new conformity declaration under the new lift guidelines. Under the new Lift Directive protection against unintended car movement (UCM) becomes a safety component in accordance with 2014/33/EU. This does not have to be provided by a tested complete system; it can as before be the result of individual type tested components. The enhanced requirements for protected areas and crushing distances must be observed during lift planning. The strength requirements for doors and cars have been increased. If you have any questions on interpreting the standards, there is a hotline at the DAfA. The queries are answered by experts and are generally accessible via the VDMA homepage.

www.liftequip.com

291

Own Notes

Own Notes s e t o N n w O

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

292

Issue 09/2015

Own Notes

Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

s e t o N n w O

++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

www.liftequip.com

293

LiftEquip TEAM

The TEAM of LiftEquip M A E T p i u q E t f i L

Man ag i n g Di r ec t o r

Support

E-Mai l : o r d er m an ag em en t @l i f t eq u i p .d e

Thorst Thorsten en Elsässer

Matt atthias hias Bayha Bayha

Inge Arold

Managing Director

Head of Order Management

Order Management

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2928 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 752 3037 thorsten.elsaesser@ liftequip.de

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2962 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 745 6004 matthias.bayha@ liftequip.de

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2998 [email protected]

E-Mail: E-Mail: produk tservi [email protected]

Sales Sales D-A-CH D-A-CH

Sales Sales Export

294

Or d e r m a n ag e m e n t

Volker Lenzner

Norbert Blum

An Anita ita Rank

Head of Product Service

Product Service

Sales Support

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2967 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1166 [email protected]



Markus Bruckmeyer

Thomas Bäzner

Jochen Böhmler

Head of Sales D-A-CH

Sales D-A-CH

Sales D-A-CH

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2935 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1426 markus.bruckmeyer@ liftequip.de

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2986 M: +49 (0) 172 / 735 0058 thomas.baezner@ liftequip.de

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2987 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 2040 joc jochen.bo .boehmler@ ler@ liftequip.de

Günter Stoll

Ewelina Czarnik

Maria Kairidou

Head of Sales Export

Sales Export

Sales Export


T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2968 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1699 ewelina.czarnik@ liftequip.de

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2964 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4100 maria.kairidou@ liftequip.de

E-Mail: E-Mail: vertrieb@lif tequip.de

E-Mail: E-Mail: salesexport@liftequi p.de

Issue 09/2015

LiftEquip TEAM

We're here for you Order management

Samira Jünger

Nida Koyuncu

Order Management

Order Management

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2782 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1080 samira.juenger@ liftequip.de


E-Mail: E-Mail: claim@lift equip.de

Sales Sales D-A-CH D-A-CH

Sales Sales Export

M A E T p i u q E t f i L

E-Mail: E-Mail: [email protected]

E-Mail: E-Mail: [email protected]

Frank Jobst

Thomas Oelschlägel

Jochen Digel

Quality Management

Scheduling

Hotline Frequency Inverter


T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2071 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1436 thomas.oelschlaegel@ liftequip.de

M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 2020

Volker Hermenau

Thomas Schmid

Rana Recber

Sales D-A-CH

Sales D-A-CH

Sales

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2975 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4090 volker.hermenau@ liftequip.de

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2970 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1005 thomas.schmid@ liftequip.de

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2893 rana.recber@ liftequip.de

Patrick Schoch

Waldemar Tabakow

Julian Wirtl

Sales Export

Key Account Manager

Trainee

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2966 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 3838 patrick.schoch@ liftequip.de

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-3063 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1083 waldemar.tabakow@ liftequip.de

T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2964 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 675 4018 julia julian n.wirtl irtl@ @lifte lifteq quip.d ip.de e

E-Mail: E-Mail: vertrieb@lif tequip.de

E-Mail: E-Mail: salesexport@lift equip.de

www.liftequip.com

295

7 2

6 2

5 2

4 2

3 2

2 2

1 2

0 2

9 1

8 1

7 1

6 1

5 1

4 1

3 1

2 1

1 1

0 1

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0


Bernhaeuser Straße 45 D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F. Tel.: +49 (0) 71 58 12 - 2929 Fax: +49 (0) 71 58 12 - 2971 E-Mail: [email protected] Internet: www.liftequip.com www.liftequip.com

More than you expect ...

2.1 2.1 Dri Drive ve Uni Units ts Inquiry/Order

Customer



Inquiry

o



Ord er __________________ ___________________________ __________ _

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Machine type

 Gear

Controller type



VVVF inverter

 MFC

 Gearless

Frequency regulated regulated 20/21

 MFC

30/31  Others

 MFR

Suspension r

 1:1

Rated load Q [kg]

 3:1

 4:1

___________ ___________

Car weight [kg] incl. Car sling

___________ ___________

Counterweight Counterweight [kg]

___________ ___________

Travel height [m]

___________ ___________

Compensation Compensation rope / chain

 Yes

Machine located

 Above

(MR)  Below (MR)

Depth of machine [m] (if machine not above)



No  Above

beside  Below beside

 Above

(HR)  Below (SP)

___________ ___________ Gear Gearless

Documentation

 2:1

___________ ___________

Rated speed v N [m/s]

Machine type

 2-speed

 TW

45 C  TW 160  PMC 145-2  PMC 170  German

 TW

63 B  W 263 C  DAF 210  DAF 270  English

 French*

 TW

130  W 332 C  SC 300  SC 400  Russian**

Notes:

Page 1 of 2

Issue: 12/2014

2.1 2.1 Dri Drive ve Uni Units ts Inquiry/Order

Motor direction

 Horizontal

 Vertical

Machine in version

 Left

 Right

Protection class in machine room

 IP21

 IP54

Traction sheave diameter [mm]

_____________

Wrap angle

_____________

Groove type of traction sheave

 V-groove

Rope type

 Warrington

 Seat

8x19

 PAWO

6  8  _________

groove

 Drako

250 T  _________

Rope diameter [mm]



Number of ropes

___________ 2 up to 10

Groove clearance

___________ mm

Power supply [V]

 400

Frequency of the mains [Hz]



Encoder

 4096  1024

 2048***

Encoder protocol

 EnDat

 Biss-C

Power supply of encoder

 TTL

Special versions



Emergency braking system NBS



Surface colour (drive)

 Standard

Machine base frame (RAL 7005)



50



10



13



EX



round-groove ***



Drako 300 T



16

 ___________  ___________

 HTL

 SSI

 Sinus***

Brake monitoring monitoring (SA 3) sheave in shaft (SA 9)  Traction sheave side (SA 11)  Oil drain at side  Partial explosion (SA 4)  _________ No

 Yes  NBS

power pack  NBS switchbox  EN81-A3

primed RAL 7021  Special colour RAL ___________ With roller bearing distance between ropes ______________ mm bearing (flat frame)  Without roller bearing  With isolation

Notes:

*(Machine TW45C, TW63B, TW 130, TW160, DAF 210, DAF 270, SC300, NBS) **(Machine TW45C, TW63B, TW 130, TW160, DAF 210, DAF 270, SC300, SC400) ***( only gearless drives possible)

Page 2 of 2

Issue: 12/2014

2.1 2.1 Dri Drive ve Uni Units ts Drive with d rum Inquiry/Order Customer



Inquiry

o



Ord er __________________ ___________________________ __________ _

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Machine type

 Gear

Controller type



VVVF inverter

 MFC

Suspension r

 1:1

with drum

Frequency regulated regulated 20/21

 MFC

30/31

 Others

 2:1

Rated load Q [kg] ___________ ___________ Rated speed v N [m/s]

 0,3

m/s

 0,5

Car weight [kg] incl. Car sling

___________

m/s

 0,63

m/s

 _____

m/s

Counterweight Counterweight [kg] ___________ ___________ Travel height [m] ___________ ___________ Machine located

 Above  Below

Depth of machine [m] (if machine not above) Machine type

Page 1 of 2

 Above

beside  Below beside

___________ ___________ Gear

 TW

45 C  TW 160

 TW

63  W 263 C

 TW

130  W 332 C

Issue: 02/2014

2.1 Drive Units Drive with d rum Inquiry/Order Documentation



German

 English

 French*

Motor direction

 Horizontal

 Vertical

Machine in version

 Left

 Right

Protection class in machine room

 IP21

 IP54

Drum diameter

 360

Rope diameter [mm]



Power supply [V]

 400

Frequency of the mains [Hz]



Encoder

 4096  1024

Power supply of encoder

 TTL

Special versions



Surface colour (drive)



Emergency braking system NBS

 450

6  8  _________

50

 520 

10



 Russian**

EX

 ________ 

13



16

 ___________  ___________

 HTL

Brake monitoring (SA 3)  Oil drain at side (SA 11)  _________ Standard primed RAL 7031 (Gear)  Standard primed RAL 9005 (Gearless)  Special colour RAL ___________ 

No

 Yes  NBS

power pack  NBS switchbox  EN81-A3

Notes:

*(Machine TW45C, TW63, TW 130, TW160) **(Machine TW45C, TW63, TW 130, TW160)

Page 2 of 2

Issue: 02/2014

5.2 ModKit MO61 Enquiry/Order

Customer

Enquiry  Ord er ______________________________ 

Company

o LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components


+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date



1:1



2:1

ModKit MO61 (D4)

Data: Rated load Q [kg] Rated speed v N [m/s] Car weight* [kg] Headroom SK [mm] Travel height FH [m] Mass GGH [mm] Ceiling thickness s [mm] Traction sheave height n [mm] Pulley distance Y [mm] Traction sheave diameter DT [mm] Diverter pulley diameter DU [mm] Distance ceiling opening SAM (2:1) 750 – 1400 [mm] SAM (1:1) 600 – 1400 [mm] Distance ceiling opening min 200x200 [mm] Distance GG to wall min 130 [mm] *car weight with doors and car sling

Page 1 of 2

Issue: 02/2015

5.2 ModKit MO61 Enquiry/Order

Modernisationset ModKit MO61 consis ting of : __________________________________________________________________________ PMC145-2 M / 145-2L, incl. connection line (according to calculation) 



Frequency inverter:

 MFC

21-xx

 MFC

31-xx

 MFR



Machine base frame ModKit MO61, Machine base frame isolation



2 pc rope pulley with rope pulley addition (car + cw)Rope guard



Suspension rope 6 mm, Rope attachment



Brake control 2 (with MFC 31-xx integrated)

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Options:  Governor

GBTK 6023 / D300, with console and final limit switch OFF

 Governor

tensioning pulley



Overspeed governor rope length [mm] ____________

Notes:

Page 2 of 2

Issue: 02/2015

1.2 Car Slings TCS Enquiry/Order

Customer

o

Enquiry  Ord er _____________________________ 

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Type of car sling

 TCS

25

 TCS

40



TCS 60

Rated load [kg] ___________

DGB Distance between guide rails [mm] __________ Suspension

 1:1

 2:1

Number of buffers ________  Without buffer plate Documentation

 German  English  Russian

Rated speed [m/s]

___________

Guide type

Sliding Roller

Guide rail surface

 Short

 Long

 100

 180

 High

load  300 mm

 Drawn

 Processed

 Oiled

 Dry

Guide rail head [mm] (rubbing suface width mind 28 mm)



9



16



19

 Others

Rope diameter [mm]



8



10



13



Number of ropes

___________ 2 up to 8

Location of speed governor rope

 Left

behind  Left front

 Right

Distance guide rail–governor rope [mm]

 150

 250

Protection class of car

 IP20

 IP54

Travelling cable mounting

 None

 At

Car weight without car sling [kg]

________________

Total safety mass [kg]

________________

Braking system (upward direction)

 Yes



No

Car isolation

 Yes



No

Page 1 of 2

 200

16

________  Others___

behind  Right front  350

side

 400

 At

front

acc. to EN 81

Issue: 04/2015

1.2 1.2 Car Car Sling Sli ngs s TCS TCS Enquiry/Order

Floor material thickness [mm]

___________ ___________

Height [mm]

___________ (Distance between fixing points)

Width [mm]

___________ (DGB -110/DGB -50 if TCS 25)

Number of rope pulleys



Rope pulley axle diameter [mm]

 360

Rope pulley distance at car sling [mm]

___________ ___________

Bearing type of rope pulley

 Standard

1



2

 None

 450

 High

load

Rope pulley isolation at car sling

 Yes

Type of compensation compensation chain

 WF100

 WF150

 WF200

 WF300

 WF350

 WF400



No

 540

Compensation chain

 Yes

 No

 WF250

Notes:

Page 2 of 2

Issue: 04/2015

1.3 1.3 Cou Count nterweight erweights s GTK Enquiry/Order

Customer



Enquiry



Ord er ________________ ________________

To

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Distance between guide rails [mm]

 700

 1050

 1370

Counterweight Counterweight frame width [mm]

 135

 200

 270

Suspension

 1:1

 2:1

Rated speed [m/s]

___________ ___________

Max 2.5 m/s

Guide rail surface

 Drawn

 Processed

 Oiled

 Dry

Guide rail head [mm]



5*

Guide type

 Sliding  Short  Roller



9



 ___________

16

 Others

 Long

 High

load

 60

Counterweight Counterweight mass [kg]

___________ ___________

Rope diameter [mm]



Number of ropes

___________ ___________

2 up to 8

Number of buffers for counterweight counterweight

___________ ___________



Documentation

 German

 English

Counterweight Counterweight safety gear

 Yes



CW rope pulley diameter [mm]

 360

 450

Compensation chain

 Yes



Compensation Compensation chain type

 WF100

 WF150

 WF200

 WF300

 WF350

 WF400

8



10

No



13



16

 _________

Without buffer buffer plate

acc. to EN 81  540

No

Panelling of counterweight frame

 Yes



No

CW-panelling CW-panelling acc. to EN 81-1

 Yes



No

Counterweight Counterweight fillers

 Steel

 Gussolith

 Without

 WF250

fillers

Notes:

*No safety gears possible.

Issue: 08/2008

1.4 1.4 Safet Safety y Gears Gears Enquiry/Order

Customer



Enquiry



Ord er ________________ ________________

Company

To LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components


+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Safety gear operation



In downward direction (freefall) (freefall )  In upward direction acc. to EN 81

Guide rail surface

 Drawn

 Processed

 Oiled

 Dry

Operating speed [m/s]

___________ ___________

Car weight, incl. car sling [kg]

___________ ___________

Rated load [kg]

___________ ___________

Counterweight Counterweight [kg] (only required for braking upwards)

___________

Rope weight [kg] (only required for braking upwards)

___________

Compensation Compensatio n chain [kg]

___________

Travelling cable [kg]

___________ ___________

Guide rail head [mm]

 

9 19

10  28,6 

 

13 35

 

Type of progressive safety gear (e.g. type RL 111)

___________ ___________

Type of braking system (e.g. type RL 011)

___________ ___________

Elevator standard

 EN

Documentation

 German

 English

 French

 Russian

81

and/or

14  16 Others ___________ ___________

 TRA

Notes:

Issue: 11/2009

1.5 Overspeed Governors (300 mm) Enquiry/Order Customer  Enquiry  Order _____________________________

To

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Use of governors g overnors Governor type

 Car

standard Remote tripping Blocking device

 Counterweight

 Standard

(G) with power supply (M)  Rocker blockable with without power supply (O) ), EN81-A3 conform  Rocker blockable without  Wheel blockable without power supply, acting right (R)  Wheel blockable without power supply, acting left (L)

Governor pulley type



 300 mm with test groove 300 mm (1) groove (2) initiator (3)  300 mm with test groove, 1 mounted initiator groove (4)  250 mm with test groove  300 mm with test groove, 2 mounted initiators initiators (5)  212 mm at 300 mm wheel without 300 groove (6)

Governor switch type

     

Governor mounting type



Governor impulse generator



Non-locking, for vN ≤ 1.0 m/s (1) Non-locking, EX EX protected, for vN ≤ 1.0 m/s (2) Locking and non-locking, non-locking, manual reset (3) Locking and non-locking non-locking electrical reset, reset, 24 V (4) Locking, manual reset (5) Locking, electrical res reset, et, 24 V (6)

Without console (U)  With console (K)  With console and final limit limit switch (N)  On console at guide rail 

With mounted impulse generator, generator, vN≤1.6m/s (I) Without impulse generator generator

Rated speed [m/s]

___________ Max 2.5 m/s

Tripping speed [m/s]



For car __________________ ______________________ ____ counterweig ht _____________  For counterweight

Max 2.5 m/s Max 2.5 m/s

Documentation

 German

 Russian

 English

 French

Notes:

Page 1 of 3

Issue: 07/2012

1.5 Overspeed Governors (200 mm) Enquiry/Order Customer  Enquiry  Order _____________________________

To

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Application Overspeed Governor

 Car

OG version



standard remote tripping slump protection

OG switch versionst



OG mounting



 

switch non-locking type with 2 contacts, automatic reset via spring power vN ≤ 1,0 m/s, without additional additional locking type switch (3) usable (1) with 1 contact, with electrical reset, 24 V (3)  switch locking type with  switch locking type with 1 contact (3) and switch non-locking type with 2 contacts (1) (4) 

without console, mounting directly with with the flooring (U) console for mounting on guide guide rail (MRL)

Sensors, 36 pulses/revolution pulses/revolution

 

Accessories

standard version version (G) rocker blockable with with voltage, 24 V (M) rocker blockable without without voltage, 12 V (O)

1 Initiator (detection of movement) movement) (1I) 2 Initiators (detection of movement and travel direction) (2I)

reinforcement of of housing for rope forces from 1800 N to 4000 N (V)  tension pulley, operating of of the safety gears in download direction direction ↓  tension pulley, operating of the safety gears in down- and upward direction ↕ 

Rated speed [m/s]

___________ Max 1,6 m/s

Tripping speed [m/s]

 

Documentation

for car ______________________ _________________ _____ for counterweight counterweigh t ______________

 German

 English

 French

Max 3,0 m/s Max 3,0 m/s 

Russian

Notes:

Page 2 of 3

Issue: 07/2012

1.5 Rope Tensioning Pulleys Enquiry/Order Customer  Enquiry  Order _____________________________

To

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

 car



counterweight counterweight

Travel height [m]

___________ ___________

Rated speed [m/s]

___________ Max 2.5 m/s

Car guide rail type



Car braking system

 Yes



Distance guide rail - governor rope [mm] Optional

 150*

 200

 250

 300

 350

 400

T 70-1/A (k=9mm) (k=9mm) (k=16mm)  T 125/B (k=16mm)  T 140-1/B (k=19mm) (k=19mm)  ___________

T 90/B (k=16mm) (k=16mm) (k=16mm)  T 127-2/B (k=16mm)  T 140-2/B (k=28,6mm) 

No

Notes:

*Only for T70-1/A rail.

Page 3 of 3

Issue: 07/2012

1.6 Rubber- and Oil Buffers Enquiry/Order

Customer



Enquiry



Ord er ________________

To

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Buffer type

Rubber buffer (vN≤1m/s)  Oil buffer Retardation monitoring device 

 Yes

 No

Rated speed [m/s] ___________ Total load, incl. travelling cable, rope weight, compensation chain [kg] (capacity + car complete)

___________ each buffer

Counterweight mass

___________ kg

Oil buffer with reduced stroke (SA 1)

 Yes



Place of installation

 MRL

 Machine

Buffer support

 Yes

 No

Documentation

 German

 English

 French

 Russian

No room

Notes:

Issue: 02/2009

1.7 Roller-, Sliding Guides and Lubricators Enquiry/Order

Customer



Enquiry



Ord er ________________

Company

To LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components


+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Guide type Lubricator Application for

 Sliding  Short

 Long

 Roller

 60

 100

 Yes



 Car

 Counterweight

 High

load  180  300 mm

No

Rated speed [m/s] ___________ Guide rail head [mm]

 

5 19

9  28.6 



16

Notes:

Issue: 08/2008

1.8 Ropes/ Rope Attachments Enquiry/Order

Customer



Enquiry



Ord er ________________

To

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Elevator rope

 Warrington

Rope diameter [mm]



Rope length [m]

___________

Number of ropes

___________

Oil for rope maintenance

 Yes

Rope cleaner

 Yes

Number of rope attachments for the car

___________

Number of rope attachments for the counterweight

___________

Onesided integrated rope attachment and mounting parts1

 Yes

8x19

6  8  __________



 Drako

250 T  Drako 300 T 

10



13

 PAWO

 16

No

 No



No

1) only at PAWO ropes

Governor rope

 Warrington

Rope diameter [mm]

 6,5

Rope length [m]

___________



6x19

8

Notes:

Issue: 08/2008

1.9 Rope Pulleys Axles, Axle Brackets Enquiry/Order

Customer



Enquiry



Ord er ________________

To

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Material of rope pulley

 Cast

Rope pulley diameter [mm]

 360

 400

 450

 540

 640

 740

Rope diameter [mm]

 

steel

8 16

 Polyamide*

 

10 18

13  ___________ 

Number of grooves of rope pulley ___________ Groove distance RA [mm] ___________ Bearing type of rope pulley

 Standard

 High

Axle for Rope pulley

 Yes



No

Axle bracket

 Yes



No

Rope pulley load [kN]

___________

Rope speed [m/s]

___________

load

Notes:

*Possible for diameter 360 mm, 7x8, RA 14 and 450 mm, 7x10, RA 18.

Issue: 08/2008

5._ LEA MRL– Systems ®

Enquiry/Order

___ LEA

___ LEA -flex ___ LEA -comfort

®

Customer

®

®

o

 Enquiry  Order ____________________________

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Lift d ata: Project name Rated load Q [kg]

________

Rated speed v N [m/s] ______

Mass of car* [kg] ________

Pit [mm]

________

Headroom [mm]

_________

Travel height FH [m] _____

Shaft depth ST [mm]

______

Shaft width SB [mm] _______

Gauge between rails FK [mm] _____________

Cabin width KB [mm]

_____

Cabin depth KT [mm] _______

Gauge between rails GG [mm] _____________

Cabin height KH [mm] _____ (Cabin without cladding)

Clear cabin height KH [mm]

_______

GG-Compensation x [%] _____________

Door width TB [mm] ________

Door height TH [mm] _______

__ Entrances/open through

Car floor thickness [mm] ____ Mounting in shaft of anchor  Flat

pit

 New

installation /

 Flat

Fixing span [mm] ________  Anchor rail

 Dowels

head

 Replacement or

modernisation

* Weight of car with doors withoutch frame

Component set contains: Gearless (PMC / DAF) Machine frame Counterweight / fillers Suspension ropes Shaft bow

    

Inverter MFC Car sling Overspeed governor Governor rope Rails

    

Inverter MFR Car Buffers Rope attachment Doors

    

Options: Sliding guide Well lighting

 

Roller guide Pit ladder

 

Compensation chain Car 

Notice and statements t o car equipm ent and special requests: ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ Issue: 03/2015

5.

– Cargo

®

Enquiry/Order Customer

o

 Enquiry  Order ____________________________

Company



+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Lift Data: Project name Rated Load Q [kg] ________

Operating speed v N [m/s] ____

Mass of car* [kg]

Pit [mm]

Headroom [mm] _________

Travel height TH [m] _____

Shaft depth SD [mm] ______

Shaft width SW [mm]

Gauge between rails [mm] _________________

Car width CW [mm]

_____

Car depth CP [mm]

Car heigth CH [mm]

_____

(cabin without cladding)

Clear cabin height [mm]______ CW-compensation x [%] _____________________

Door width CW [mm] _______

Door height DH [mm]_________ ___ Access/Dual entrance

________

Car floor height [mm]

_____ _______

__

Mounting in shaft of anchor

______

Gauge between rails CW [mm] ______________

Distance between fastening [mm]__________________  Rails

 Dowels

Number of Landing ___________  New

Installation /

 replacement

or modernisation

**Car weight with doors but without car sling

Component Set Contains: Gear Machine base frame Counterweight / Filler Suspension rope Shaft bow Option: Guide rails Shaft lighting

    

 

Geraless Car sling Governor Governor rope Rails



Roller guides Pit ladder



   



Inverter MFC Car Buffer Rope attachment Doors



Compensation chain Car



   



Notes: ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ Issue: 03/2015

5.10 LEMoS Enquiry/Order

Customer  Enquiry  Ord er ____________________________ Company

o LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components


+49 (7158) 12-2929

Fax

+49 (7158) 12-2971

E-Mail

[email protected]

Date

Plant date for th e modernisation:

Project name: _______________________

Factory no.:____________________________

Year: ______________________________

Manufacturer: __________________________

Rated load Q [kg] __________

Rated speed vN [m/s] _______

Mass of car* [kg] ________

Shaft pit [mm] _____________

Headroom [mm] __________

Travel height TH [m] _____

Shaft depth SD [mm] _______

Shaft width SW [mm] _______

Gauge between rails car [mm] ___________

Car width [mm] ____________

Car depth [mm]____________

Gauge between rails CW [mm] __________________

Car height (raw car) [mm] _____ Clear car height [mm] _______

Counterweight [kg]_______

Door widht DW [mm] _________ Door heigt DH [mm] ________ Dual entrance yes  no 

Entrance 1 ______ doors

Entrance 2 ________ doors

Rail specification at partial replacement Guide rail 

Guide blade ______ mm

Treads ___________ mm

Version

Drawn 

machined 

Sliding guide 

Pulley guide 

Car floor thickness [mm] _________________________ Fastening in well:  Partial  Full

 Anchor

rail type ________

Distance between fastening [mm] __________________  Dowel

replacement (without CW, rails, adjustable bracket)

replacement (without control, operating- and indicator elements)

*Weight of car with integrated car sling and doors

07-2014 Page 1 of 6


LEMoS consisting of:

Drive:

Gear



Gearless



Inverter:

MFR (with regeneration)



MFC



Machine base frame



Machine base isolation



Car LEMoS



Counter weight



Buffer



Rope attachment



Overspeed governor

Diameter [mm]

200 

300 

Position governor

Back left



Back right



Front left



Front right



Note: Construction drawing w ith t ested dimensions alternatively to the indi vidual measure

Options:

Pulley guides



Governor rope



Suspension rope



Buffer support with buffer



Adjustable bracket



Counterweight filler



Car guide rail



Counterweight guide rail



Pit ladder



Compensation chain



Door typ:

ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A

 M2T,

right 

 M2Z,

center-opening

 M4ZT,

Wittur Fineline

Sematic C-MOD

 4S

left 

center-opening

(4-panel, telescopic center-opening)

 4/AS-L

(4-panel, center-opening)

 4/AS-R

(4-panel, center-opening)

 2L

(2-panel, side left opening)

 2R

(2-panel, side right opening)

 4Z

(4-panel, telescopic center-opening)

Other door type

 _________________________________________________

Door version

 Color

RAL _______________

 Stainless

steel grain 220

 Stainless

steel leather

 special

 Stainless

steel linen

___________________________________________ 07-2014 Page 2 of 6


Elevator Car Design (see brochu res page 20):

Walls:

 Galvanised  Traffic

steel

white RAL 9016/powder coating

 Powder

coating RAL ___________________

 Stainless

Ceiling and lighting :

steel grain 220  Spot

 Stainless

LED

 Traffic

steel leather

 Slim

LED (single lamp)

coating

 Stainless  without

steel 220

lighting

 Traffic

white RAL 9016

 Powder

Mirror:

 Half

mirror

Flooring:

 Black

Stone/rubber

 Kayar

 Kayar

Grey/rubber

 Ice/

Handrails:

Skirt guards:

 one

 Full

Grey/vinyl

 Prepared

side

coating

height mirror Black/ rubber

rubber

 Dark

Brushed Oak/PVC

for flooring material of up to 25 mm  two

sides

 three

sides

 Stainless

steel 220, Ø 40 mm, version straight

 Stainless

steel 220, Ø 40 mm, bowed version

 Stainless

steel 220, Ø 40 mm, bowed version,surrounding

 Aluminium,  Stainless

steel linen

white RAL 9016

 Powder

 Dove

 Stainless

30 mm

steel grain 220, 50 mm

Notes:

____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

07-2014 Page 3 of 6


Shaft sit uation:

LEMoS:

Position counterweight (GW) behind Following components will remain: car rails, CW-rails, counterweight Position counterweight (GW) side, without dual entrance Following components will remain: car rails, CW-rails, counterweight

As an alternative to the measurements can also be a manhole floor plan will be made available. Dimension shaft front to car rail

A=

Dimension from car guide blade to CW rail level

B=

Centre CW rail to rear wall

C=

Car guide blade to left side wall

D1=

Car guide blade to right side wall

D2=

CW guide blade to left side wall

F1=

CW guide blade to right side wall

F2=

Dimension from CW guide blade to car rail level

G=

Dimension for collision check CW car door

J1=


L1=

Gauge between rails for car

FKSTM=

Gauge between rails for counterweight

GGTSTM=

CW depth

GGT=

 Counterweight rear

 Without bracket support

 Without bracket support

 CW rear left

 CW front left

 CW rear right*

 CW front right*

With bracket support  CW left  CW right*

*Counterweight (CW) right symmetrical (mirror image)

07-2014 Page 4 of 6


LEMoS:

Position Counterweight (CW) side, with dual entrance Following components will remain: car rails, CW-rails, counterweight

As an alternative to the measurements can also be a manhole floor plan will be made available. Dimension shaft front to car rail

A=

Dimension from car guide blade to CW rail level

B=

Centre CW rail to rear wall

C=

Car guide blade to left side wall

D1=

Car guide blade to right side wall

D2=

Dimension from CW guide blade to car rail level

G=


J1=


L1=

Dimension for collision check CW car door _DE

J3=

Dimension for collision check CW car door _DE

L2_DL=

Gauge between rails for car

FKSTM=

Gauge between rails for counterweight

GGTSTM=

CW depth

GGT=

 Without bracket support  CW rear left  CW rear right*

 Without bracket support  CW front left  CW front right*

With bracket support  CW left  CW right*

*Counterweight (CW) right symmetrical (mirror image)

07-2014 Page 5 of 6

01 LiftEquip General-catalogue En

Recommend Documents